Genesys Framework 8.1 Customer Service Software Deployment Guide
Publicitate
Publicitate
Framework 8.1
Deployment Guide
The information contained herein is proprietary and confidential and cannot be disclosed or duplicated without the prior written consent of Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 2000–2013 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
About Genesys
Genesys is the world's leading provider of customer service and contact center software - with more than 4,000 customers in 80 countries. Drawing on its more than 20 years of customer service innovation and experience,
Genesys is uniquely positioned to help companies bring their people, insights and customer channels together to effectively drive today's customer conversation. Genesys software directs more than 100 million interactions every day, maximizing the value of customer engagement and differentiating the experience by driving personalization and multichannel customer service - and extending customer service across the enterprise to optimize processes and the performance of customer-facing employees. Go to www.genesyslab.com
for more information.
Each product has its own documentation for online viewing at the Genesys Technical Support website or on the
Documentation Library DVD, which is available from Genesys upon request. For more information, contact your sales representative.
Notice
Although reasonable effort is made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of release, Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc., cannot assume responsibility for any existing errors.
Changes and/or corrections to the information contained in this document may be incorporated in future versions.
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security
You are responsible for the security of your system. Product administration to prevent unauthorized use is your responsibility. Your system administrator should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the features available that reduce your risk of incurring charges for unlicensed use of Genesys products.
Trademarks
Genesys, the Genesys logo, and T-Server are registered trademarks of Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories,
Inc. All other trademarks and trade names referred to in this document are the property of other companies. © 201
3
Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.The Crystal monospace font is used by permission of Software Renovation Corporation, www.SoftwareRenovation.com
.
Technical Support from VARs
If you have purchased support from a value-added reseller (VAR), please contact the VAR for technical support.
Technical Support from Genesys
If you have purchased support directly from Genesys, please contact Genesys Technical Support . Before contacting technical support, please refer to the
Genesys Care Program Guide
for complete contact information and procedures.
Ordering and Licensing Information
Complete information on ordering and licensing Genesys products can be found in the
Genesys Licensing Guide.
Released by
Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. www.genesyslab.com
Document Version: 81fr_dep_06-2013_v8.1.30
1.00
Table of Contents
List of
Procedures
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
About Genesys Framework ..................................................................... 17
Making Comments on This Document .................................................... 18
Contacting Genesys Technical Support................................................... 18
Changes in This Document ..................................................................... 19
Version 8.1.301.00.............................................................................. 19
Version 8.1.201.00.............................................................................. 19
Version 8.1.101.00.............................................................................. 19
Version 8.1.001.00.............................................................................. 20
Framework Overview ........................................................................... 21
Framework Architecture ...................................................................... 27
High-Level Framework Architecture ........................................................ 27
Configuration Layer Functions............................................................ 28
Configuration Layer Architecture ........................................................ 29
Management Layer Functions ............................................................ 31
Management Layer Architecture......................................................... 31
Media Layer Functions ....................................................................... 34
Media Layer Architecture.................................................................... 34
Deployment Guide 3
Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Services Layer Overview .................................................................... 35
Services Layer Architecture................................................................ 35
Framework Connections.......................................................................... 36
Planning the Installation ...................................................................... 39
Major Planning Steps.......................................................................... 39
Telephony Network Description .......................................................... 40
Licensing Your Applications ................................................................ 41
Configuration Environment Types....................................................... 41
Multi-language Environments (UTF-8 Support)....................................... 44
Framework Support for UTF-8............................................................ 44
Converting from a non-UTF-8 Database to a UTF-8 Database.......... 45
Network Locations for Framework Components ..................................... 46
Configuration Layer ............................................................................ 46
Management Layer............................................................................. 50
User Interaction Layer (Genesys Administrator)................................. 56
IPv6 vs. IPv4 Overview....................................................................... 59
Communication Session Failures ....................................................... 62
Software Exceptions ........................................................................... 65
Application Failures ............................................................................ 66
Database Failures............................................................................... 66
Remote Site Failures .......................................................................... 67
Common Log Options......................................................................... 67
Access to Hosts File at Start-up ......................................................... 67
User Authentication ............................................................................ 67
User Authorization .............................................................................. 68
Genesys Security Using the TLS Protocol.......................................... 71
European Data Protection Directive Disclaimer.................................. 72
Deployment Overview .......................................................................... 73
Hardware and Network Environment.................................................. 75
Internet Browsers................................................................................ 75
4 Framework 8.1
Table of Contents
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Deployment Guide
Deployment Sequence ............................................................................ 76
Deployment Using Genesys Administrator.............................................. 78
Genesys Installation Wizard ............................................................... 79
Genesys Configuration Wizards ......................................................... 79
Setting Up the Configuration Layer .................................................... 85
DB Server Configuration File .............................................................. 92
Configuring DB Server on UNIX ......................................................... 92
Configuring DB Server Logging .......................................................... 93
Starting Configuration DB Server ............................................................ 93
Installing Configuration Server ................................................................ 94
Initializing the Configuration Database .................................................... 99
About the Initialized Configuration Database.................................... 102
Configuring Configuration Server .......................................................... 103
Configuration Server Configuration File............................................ 103
Configuring Configuration Server Logging........................................ 105
Configuring Configuration Server for Multi-language Environment
Encrypting the Configuration Database Password ................................ 106
Starting Configuration Server ................................................................ 106
Installing an Interface to Deploy Your System ....................................... 107
Installing Genesys Administrator ...................................................... 107
Installing Configuration Manager ...................................................... 107
Starting Genesys Administrator ........................................................ 109
Starting Configuration Manager........................................................ 109
Changing Configuration Server Port Assignments ................................ 110
Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer................ 114
Continuing the Installation of Your System ....................................... 120
Setting Up the Management Layer.................................................... 121
Deploying Local Control Agent .............................................................. 122
Notes on Configuring the LCA Port .................................................. 122
Specifying the Genesys Deployment Agent Port.............................. 123
Installing Local Control Agent ........................................................... 123
5
Table of Contents
Chapter 7
LCA Log Options .............................................................................. 126
Configuring ADDP Between Solution Control Server and
Local Control Agent ...................................................................... 126
Deploying the Management Layer Using Genesys Administrator ......... 127
Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager ................... 128
Deploying Management Layer Components on Windows................ 129
Deploying Management Layer Components on UNIX...................... 129
Manually Deploying the Management Layer ......................................... 134
Task Summary .................................................................................. 134
Deploying Log DB Server ................................................................. 136
Configuring Database Access Points ............................................... 142
Deploying Message Server............................................................... 147
Initializing the Log Database............................................................. 153
Deploying Solution Control Server.................................................... 153
Deploying Solution Control Interface ................................................ 158
Deploying SNMP Master Agent ........................................................ 162
Installing Solution Control Server Utilities Separately ........................... 168
Continuing the Installation of Your System ....................................... 170
Starting and Stopping Framework Components............................. 171
Logging In to Interface Components................................................. 173
Starting and Stopping with the Management Layer............................... 173
Stop vs. Graceful Shutdown ............................................................. 174
Configuration Server......................................................................... 178
Configuration Server Proxy............................................................... 179
Configuration Manager ..................................................................... 180
License Manager .............................................................................. 181
Message Server................................................................................ 181
Local Control Agent .......................................................................... 182
Genesys Deployment Agent ............................................................. 184
Solution Control Server..................................................................... 185
Solution Control Interface ................................................................. 188
SNMP Master Agent ......................................................................... 188
Genesys Administrator ..................................................................... 189
6 Framework 8.1
Table of Contents
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Server Applications........................................................................... 191
GUI Applications ............................................................................... 191
Starting and Stopping with Windows Services Manager ....................... 191
Setting Up Redundant Components................................................. 193
Redundant Configuration DB Servers ................................................... 194
Redundancy...................................................................................... 194
Setting Up Redundant Configuration DB Servers............................. 194
Starting a Backup Configuration DB Server ..................................... 202
Redundant Configuration Servers ......................................................... 203
Redundancy...................................................................................... 203
Setting Up Redundant Configuration Servers................................... 203
Synchronizing HA Ports Between Redundant Configuration
Starting a Backup Configuration Server ........................................... 217
Configuring ADDP Between Redundant Configuration Servers ....... 218
Redundant Client DB Servers ............................................................... 220
Redundancy...................................................................................... 221
Setting Up Redundant Client DB Servers......................................... 221
Starting a Backup Client DB Server.................................................. 226
Redundant Message Servers ................................................................ 227
Redundancy...................................................................................... 227
Setting Up Redundant Message Servers ......................................... 227
Starting a Backup Message Server .................................................. 233
Redundant Solution Control Servers ..................................................... 234
Redundancy...................................................................................... 234
Setting Up Redundant Solution Control Servers .............................. 235
Synchronizing HA Ports Between Redundant Solution Control
Starting a Backup Solution Control Server ....................................... 242
Redundant SNMP Master Agents ......................................................... 243
Redundancy...................................................................................... 243
Setting Up Redundant SNMP Master Agents................................... 243
Starting a Backup SNMP Master Agent............................................ 250
Setting Up the Rest of Your System ................................................. 253
Recommended Order ............................................................................ 253
Deployment Guide 7
Table of Contents
Chapter 10
Appendix A
Contact Center Objects ......................................................................... 255
Access Groups ................................................................................. 255
Agent Groups.................................................................................... 257
DB Server for Solutions .................................................................... 258
Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems............................. 259
Licensing Requirements ................................................................... 260
Configuration Server Proxy Functions .............................................. 260
Distributed Solution Control Server Functions.................................. 261
When to Use This Architecture ......................................................... 261
Configuration Server Proxy ................................................................... 261
Setting Up Configuration Server Proxy............................................. 263
Starting Configuration Server Proxy ................................................. 271
Configuring Redundant Configuration Server Proxies...................... 273
Failure of Configuration Server Proxy............................................... 275
Failure of Master Configuration Server............................................. 275
Distributed Solution Control Servers ..................................................... 276
SCS in Distributed Mode .................................................................. 276
Configuring Distributed Solution Control Servers ............................. 277
Dividing Configuration Among Solution Control Servers .................. 279
Specifying Message Server for SCS Communications..................... 280
Notes on Configuring SCI ................................................................. 282
Notes on Configuring Message Server for Centralized Logging....... 282
Installing Applications ....................................................................... 284
Redundancy Support............................................................................. 284
Minimum Permissions ....................................................................... 285
Database User Privileges ...................................................................... 286
8 Framework 8.1
Table of Contents
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
LCA Startup Script—gctilca .............................................................. 288
GDA Startup Script—gctigda ............................................................ 290
Standard Configuration Procedure................................................... 293
Using Genesys Administrator ........................................................... 293
Using Configuration Manager ........................................................... 296
Using Genesys Administrator ........................................................... 298
Using Configuration Manager ........................................................... 301
Graphical User Interface Applications ................................................... 306
Standard Installation Procedure ....................................................... 309
Graphical User Interface Applications ................................................... 313
Troubleshooting the Installation............................................................. 314
User Password Requirements and Restrictions .................................... 318
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) ..................................................... 321
Literal IPv6 Addresses in URLs ........................................................ 323
Network Notation .............................................................................. 323
Kinds of IPv6 addresses ................................................................... 323
Transition Mechanisms ..................................................................... 325
Dual-Stack IPv6 Implementation ...................................................... 326
Microsoft Windows Implementation .................................................. 326
Operating Systems Supporting Dual-Stack Architecture for IPv6..... 327
Deploying License Servers in Mixed Protocol Environments ........... 330
Using Wildcards in an IPv6 Address................................................. 331
Deployment Guide 9
Table of Contents
Genesys 8.1 IPv6 Support..................................................................... 331
Common Principles........................................................................... 331
Implementation Characteristics ........................................................ 333
IPv6 Support by Genesys Products.................................................. 333
Deployment Considerations .................................................................. 333
External Interfaces............................................................................ 335
Dynamic Runtime Changes .............................................................. 336
Third-Party Dependencies ................................................................ 336
Appendix F
Creating the Response File ................................................................... 338
Running the Silent Installation ............................................................... 339
About the Silent Setup Log File ............................................................. 339
Appendix G
Installation Worksheet ....................................................................... 341
How to Prepare a Worksheet ................................................................ 341
Database Connections .......................................................................... 347
Supplements
Related Documentation Resources ................................................... 351
Document Conventions ...................................................................... 353
Index
10 Framework 8.1
Deployment Guide
List of Procedures
Enabling and disabling IPv6 support using an environment variable . . . 60
Enabling and disabling IPv6 support using a configuration option . . . . . 60
Installing Configuration DB Server on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Installing Configuration DB Server on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Configuring Configuration DB Server on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Starting Configuration DB Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Installing Configuration Server in Master mode on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Installing Configuration Server in Master mode on Windows . . . . . . . . . 97
Populating History Change Adapter tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Initializing the Configuration Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Running Genesys SQL scripts using the DB2 Command-Line
Configuring Configuration Server on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Starting Configuration Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Installing Configuration Manager on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Starting Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Changing the Configuration Server listening port using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Changing the Configuration Server listening port using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating a Host object using Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Creating a Host object in Configuration Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Modifying a Configuration Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Modifying a Configuration Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configuring a DB Server Application object using Genesys
Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configuring a DB Server Application object using Configuration
11
List of Procedures
12
Modifying a DB Server Application object using Genesys
Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Modifying a DB Server Application object using Configuration
Manually Installing Local Control Agent on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Manually Installing Local Control Agent on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Deploying Management Layer components using Genesys
Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Wizard Manager—Installing Log DB Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Wizard Manager—Installing Message Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Initializing the Log Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Wizard Manager—Installing Solution Control Server on UNIX. . . . . . . 132
Configuring a Log DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Configuring a Log DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Manually installing Log DB Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Manually installing Log DB Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configuring a Database Access Point for the Log DB Server using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Configuring a Database Access Point for the Log DB Server using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configuring a Message Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Configuring a Message Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Manually installing Message Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Manually installing Message Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Configuring a Solution Control Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Configuring a Solution Control Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Manually installing Solution Control Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Manually installing Solution Control Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Configuring a Solution Control Interface Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Configuring a Solution Control Interface Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Manually installing Solution Control Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Framework 8.1
List of Procedures
Deployment Guide
Configuring an SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Configuring an SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Manually installing SNMP Master Agent on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Manually installing SNMP Master Agent on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Installing only Solution Control Server utilities on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installing only Solution Control Server utilities on Windows . . . . . . . . . 169
Starting an application using its startup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Starting DB Server manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Starting Configuration Server manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Starting Configuration Server Proxy manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Starting Configuration Manager manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Starting Message Server manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Starting Genesys Deployment Agent on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Starting Genesys Deployment Agent on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Starting Solution Control Server manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Starting Solution Control Interface manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Starting Genesys SNMP Master Agent manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Stopping server applications manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Stopping GUI applications manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Adding LCA port information to the configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Modifying a backup Configuration DB Server start file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Starting a backup Configuration DB Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Configuring a backup Configuration Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Configuring a backup Configuration Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
13
List of Procedures
14
Installing a backup Configuration Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Installing a backup Configuration Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Modifying a primary Configuration Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Modifying a primary Configuration Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Modifying a backup Configuration Server start file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Synchronizing HA ports between redundant Configuration Servers . . 216
Starting a backup Configuration Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Configuring a backup Client DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configuring a backup Client DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Modifying a primary Client DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Modifying a primary Client DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Starting a backup Client DB Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Configuring a backup Message Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Configuring a backup Message Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Modifying a primary Message Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Modifying a primary Message Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Modifying a backup Message Server start file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Starting a backup Message Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Modifying a backup Solution Control Server start file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Synchronizing HA ports between redundant Solution Control
Starting a backup Solution Control Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Framework 8.1
List of Procedures
Deployment Guide
Configuring a backup SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Configuring a backup SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Modifying a primary SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Modifying a primary SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Modifying a backup SNMP Master Agent start file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Starting a backup SNMP Master Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configuring a Configuration Server Proxy Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Configuring a Configuration Server Proxy Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Installing Configuration Server Proxy on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Installing Configuration Server Proxy on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Modifying a Client Application using Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . 270
Modifying a Client Application using Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . 271
Starting Configuration Server Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Setting up a backup redundant Configuration Server Proxy using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Setting up a backup redundant Configuration Server Proxy using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Configuring Distributed Solution Control Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Specifying a Distributed Solution Control Server to control a Host,
Application, or Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Configuring a dedicated Message Server for Distributed
Solution Control Servers using Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . 280
Configuring a dedicated Message Server for Distributed
Solution Control Servers using Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . 281
Importing a predefined application template using Genesys
Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Creating a new application template using Genesys Administrator . . . 295
Importing metadata for an application template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
15
List of Procedures
Importing a predefined application template using Configuration
Creating a new application template using Configuration Manager . . . 297
Creating and configuring a Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Configuring Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Creating and configuring a Server Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Configuring Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Synchronizing options between primary and backup servers . . . . . . . 305
Synchronizing ports between primary and backup servers . . . . . . . . . 305
Creating and configuring a GUI Application object using
Genesys Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Creating and configuring a GUI Application object using
Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Installing a server application on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Installing a server application on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Installing a GUI application on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Troubleshooting the installation of a Genesys application . . . . . . . . . . 314
Logging in to a Framework GUI application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
16 Framework 8.1
Preface
Welcome to the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide. This document describes the configuration, installation, starting, and stopping procedures relevant to the
Genesys Framework.
This document is valid only for the 8.1.x releases of this product.
Note:
For versions of this document created for other releases of this product, visit the Genesys Technical Support website, or request the
Documentation Library DVD, which you can order by e-mail from
Genesys Order Management at [email protected]
.
This preface contains the following sections:
About Genesys Framework, page 17
Making Comments on This Document, page 18
Contacting Genesys Technical Support, page 18
Changes in This Document, page 19
For information about related resources and about the conventions that are used in this document, see the supplementary material starting on
About Genesys Framework
The Genesys Framework, a mandatory part of any Genesys-based interaction management system, provides functions required for the normal operation of any Genesys solution.
In brief, you will find the following information in this manual:
•
How to install and use Wizard Manager
•
How to configure all Framework components with wizards or manually
•
How to install Framework components
•
How to configure redundancy—that is, backup and primary servers—for
Framework components, including DB Server and Configuration Server
Deployment Guide 17
Preface Intended Audience
•
How to start and stop Framework components with the Management Layer or manually
•
How to log in to a Genesys GUI application
Intended Audience
This document is intended primarily for system integrators, system administrators, contact center managers, and operations personnel. It has been written with the assumption that you have a basic understanding of:
•
Computer-telephony integration (CTI) concepts, processes, terminology, and applications
•
Network design and operation
•
Your own network configurations
You should also be familiar with Genesys Framework architecture and
functions, as described in Chapter 2 on page 27 , the Framework Management
Layer User’s Guide, and Framework 8.0 Architecture Help.
Making Comments on This Document
If you especially like or dislike anything about this document, feel free to e-mail your comments to
.
You can comment on what you regard as specific errors or omissions, and on the accuracy, organization, subject matter, or completeness of this document.
Please limit your comments to the scope of this document only and to the way in which the information is presented. Contact your Genesys Account
Representative or Genesys Technical Support if you have suggestions about the product itself.
When you send us comments, you grant Genesys a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate, without incurring any obligation to you.
Contacting Genesys Technical Support
If you have purchased support directly from Genesys, please contact Genesys
Technical Support .
Before contacting technical support, please refer to the
Genesys Care Program
Guide
for complete contact information and procedures.
18 Framework 8.1
Preface Changes in This Document
Changes in This Document
Version 8.1.301.00
This document has been updated as appropriate for features that are new in this
release of Management Framework, as described in “New in This Release” on page 22 , including:
•
Updated description and implementation of multi-language environments
and UTF-8 support. See “Multi-language Environments (UTF-8 Support)” on page 44
, and the procedure “Initializing the
Configuration Database” on page 100 .
•
Updated description of HA Configuration Server Proxy configuration to
include restoration of client connections; see “Configuring Redundant
Configuration Server Proxies” on page 273 .
•
Appendix A, “Minimum Permissions,” on page 285 , provides the
minimum installation and database permissions required for Management framework.
Version 8.1.201.00
This document has been updated as appropriate for features that are new in this
release of Management Framework, as described in “New in This Release” on page 22 , including:
•
Added optional installation of Solution Control Services utilities
separately; see “Installing Solution Control Server Utilities Separately” on page 168
.
In addition, with all 6.x products reaching the End of Support milestone, all references to these products have been removed.
Version 8.1.101.00
This document has been updated as appropriate for features that are new in this
release of Management Framework as described in “New in This Release” on page 22 , including:
•
Updated implementation of Configuration History Log; see “Configuration
•
Added configuration of LDAP external authentication on Configuration
Server Proxy; see “External Authentication” on page 262 .
•
Added use of Configuration History Log on Configuration Server Proxy;
see “Configuration History Log” on page 263 .
•
Added password restrictions for users; see “User Password Requirements and Restrictions” on page 318
.
Deployment Guide 19
Preface Changes in This Document
Version 8.1.001.00
This is the first release of the Framework 8.1 Deployment Guide. In the future, this section will list topics that are new or have changed significantly since the first release of this document.
20 Framework 8.1
Chapter
1
Framework Overview
This chapter lists major Framework functions and highlights new features added in each release.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Major Functions
The Genesys Framework, a mandatory part of any Genesys-based interaction management system, provides functions required for the normal operation of any Genesys solution:
•
Configuration centralizes processing and storage of all the data required for Genesys solutions to work within a particular environment.
•
Access Control sets and verifies users’ permissions for access to, and manipulation of, solution functions and data.
•
Solution Control starts and stops solutions and monitors their status.
•
Alarm Processing defines and manages conditions critical to the operation of solutions.
•
Troubleshooting hosts a user-oriented, unified logging system with advanced storage, sorting, and viewing capabilities.
•
Fault Management automatically detects and corrects situations that might cause operational problems in solutions.
•
External Interfaces enable communication with a variety of telephony systems and database management systems (DBMS).
•
Attached Data Distribution supports the distribution of business data attached to interactions, within and across solutions.
Deployment Guide 21
Chapter 1: Framework Overview New in This Release
New in This Release
Before you familiarize yourself with the Genesys Framework architecture and functionality, note the following major changes that were implemented in the
8.1 release of Framework, and the sources that describe them in detail:
General Features
•
Support of IPv6: Genesys Framework now supports IPv6 on most
connections. Refer to “IPv6 vs. IPv4 Overview” on page 59 and Appendix
D, “Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)” on page 321
for more information.
•
Support of FlexLM 11.9: Genesys Framework now supports the FlexLM
11.9 license manager. Refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for information about this licensing upgrade.
•
Enhanced failure detection: Configuration Server and Solution Control
Server now support heartbeat detection functionality used by Local Control
Agent (LCA) to detect unresponsive Genesys applications. For more information, refer to the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide.
Configuration Layer
•
New types of Application, Script, and Switch configuration objects:
Users can now define new types of configuration objects, as follows:
Application
types
Advisors–Advisors Cisco Adapter
,
Advisors–Advisors Genesys
Adapter
,
Advisors–Advisors Platform
,
Advisors–Contact Center
Advisor
,
Advisors–Frontline Advisor
Business Rules Application Server, Business Rules Execution
Server
CSTA Connector
Federation Server, Federation Stat Provider
Genesys Administrator Server
OT ICS OMP Infra
,
OT ICS Server
Social Messaging Server
UCM Connector
VP MRCP Proxy, VP Policy Server
Web Engagement Backend Server, Web Engagement Frontend Server
WebRTC Gateway
Script
types—
Business Rules Data
Switch
types—
Aastra MX-ONE
,
Broadsoft BroadWorks
22 Framework 8.1
Chapter 1: Framework Overview New in This Release
•
Enhanced Configuration Conversion Wizard (CCW): You can now use
CCW to convert:
An existing Configuration Database from its current character encoding to a multi-language Configuration Database using UTF-8 encoding
A single-tenant Configuration Database to a multi-tenant
Configuration Database
•
Writable Configuration Server Proxy: Users can now configure a writable Configuration Server Proxy to allow its clients to add, delete, or
modify configuration objects and their permissions. Refer to “Writable
Configuration Server Proxy” on page 262
for information about this feature.
• Enhanced Client Reconnection with HA Configuration Server
Proxies: Client connections are now restored automatically by the backup
Configuration Server Proxy after a switchover of the proxy servers. See
“Configuring Redundant Configuration Server Proxies” on page 273 .
•
Support for Multi-language Environments: Multi-language environments are supported starting in release 8.1.2. Configuration
Database and client DBMS must be configured appropriately when the
database is first created. See “Multi-language Environments (UTF-8
for more information.
•
Support for storage of UTF-8 encoded data: Configuration Server has a new multi-language startup mode that enables storage of data in UTF-8
format. See “Multi-language Environments (UTF-8 Support)” on page 44
for more information.
•
Simpler upgrade of Configuration Database: Migration is not required for Configuration Database 8.1.1; if users require additional applications and enumerators in a new release of Configuration Server 8.1.x, upgrade of locale information using CCW is all that is required. Refer to the Genesys
Migration Guide for more information about this new migration path.
• Synchronized display of Wrap-up Time changes between Agents and
Agent Logins: If the Wrap-up Time is changed at the Agent Login level, the new value now appears in the Agents’ configuration.
•
Enhanced support for Outbound Contact Solution: When configuring a
Campaign Group, users can now select Average Distribution Time or
Maximum Gain as an optimization method. Target Value for Maximum
Gain is a calculated value based on Established Gain and Abandoned Loss.
•
Enhanced support for Routing solutions:
Support of Oracle’s large objects (LOB) data type for Routing
Strategies, making storage of Routing Strategies more efficient.
Support of UTF-8 encoding for Business Attributes and Attribute
Values.
Deployment Guide 23
Chapter 1: Framework Overview New in This Release
Management Layer
See the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide for information about the following new features that are specific to the Management Layer:
•
Ability to enable and disable log filtering at the application level: Log filtering can be enabled and disabled for individual applications.
•
Alarm Detection and Reaction scripts are environment independent:
Alarm Detection and Alarm Reaction scripts now use the name of the affected configuration object by default, instead of the database identifier
(DBID). This ensures seamless XML import and export of Alarm
Detection and Alarm Reaction script definitions.
• Enhanced robustness of connections between Local Control Agent
(LCA) and Applications on a Host: Applications on a Host now connect to the LCA on that Host using a loopback interface. This enables the connection to remain stable regardless of the status of the Network
Interface Card.
•
Enhanced audit logs: Host and Tenant attributes have been added to audit logs generated by Configuration Server and Solution Control Server.
•
Enhanced reporting of Log Database failure: If Message Server is unable to enter a log into the Log Database, a log event is generated, and can be used to trigger an alarm.
•
Enhanced monitoring of the state of NTP Services: Local Control Agent can now monitor the state of NTP services. New logs report when an NTP service ceases to be available and when it becomes available. In addition, users can now change the signature of an NTP service/daemon.
•
Ability to install Solution Control Server utilities separately: Users can now install the Solution Control Server utilities without installing Solution
Control Server. Previously, the utilities were only installed automatically
with Solution Control Server. See “Installing Solution Control Server
Utilities Separately” on page 168
.
•
Enhancements to mlcmd command-line interface: Access to mlcmd is now restricted to authorized users. In addition, the parameters now use a name or a DBID, and new parameters enable users created to:
Clear all active alarms raised by an application or on the basis of a specific Alarm Condition.
Report CPU usage for each thread of a given process of a given application, and to store the results in an XML file for which you can set the path and filename.
24 Framework 8.1
Chapter 1: Framework Overview New in This Release
Security Features
Unless otherwise stated, refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for information about the following new security-related features in release 8.1:
•
Enhanced password protection: A system administrator, or a user with equivalent access rights and permissions, can configure the following:
Additional attributes for user passwords, such as case, punctuation, character type, expiration, and reuse.
A user to be required to change his or her password at next login (if forced password reset is supported by the user interface).
An account to be locked out after a specified time of inactivity.
The maximum number of concurrent connections (logins) to
Configuration Server that a single account can have.
In addition, the hash algorithm for the secure storage of passwords has also been updated.
•
Enhanced security for linked configuration: In a situation where a user is editing an object that is linked to other objects, only a user with access to one or more of those linked objects can change the link between their linked objects and the object being edited.
•
Enhanced security for high-availability (HA) pairs: When configuring two applications as an HA pair, both applications must be started from the
same account. See chapter 8 on page 193 for more information.
•
Limited display of sensitive information: Error messages for authentication errors no longer contain a hint or direct indication of the reason that authentication failed. In logs, new options enable sensitive data in logs to be marked for post-processing by the user, such as deletion, replacement, or hiding.
•
Support for database encryption: The Configuration Database and Log
Database can now store encrypted data using database encryption capabilities, but only if the Database Management System (DBMS) supports the encryption.
•
Extended support of Client-Side Port Definition: Message Server and
Configuration Server Proxy now support Client-Side Port Definition on all their connections.
•
Extended support of TLS: LCA, Genesys Deployment Agent, and
Message Server now support TLS. All Management Framework components now support TLS implemented with OpenSSL.
•
Compliance with FIPS: TLS as implemented by Genesys meets the
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS).
• Enhanced configuration of external authentication:
LDAP external authentication can now be configured on the Master
Configuration Server and on each Configuration Server Proxy, so
Deployment Guide 25
Chapter 1: Framework Overview New in This Release
authentication requests will be performed directly without forwarding them to the Master Configuration Server.
Configuration Server Proxy can also support multiple LDAP servers.
LDAP and RADIUS external authentication can now be configured on the Configuration Server and Configuration Server Proxy
Application object’s
Options
tab, instead of using configuration files.
Configuration Server and Configuration Server Proxy now supports
LDAP full referrals returned by Microsoft Active Directory.
Refer to “External Authentication” on page 262 and the Framework
External Authentication Reference Manual for more information.
User Interaction Layer
For information about changes in the 8.1 release of Genesys Administrator, see the Framework 8.1 Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide.
Retired Features
•
The IDEA, RC4, RCS, and MDC2 algorithms, part of OpenSSL software, are no longer used by Genesys Framework.
26 Framework 8.1
Chapter
2
Framework Architecture
This chapter describes the architecture and functionality of Framework 8.1 and its layers.
This chapter contains the following sections:
High-Level Framework Architecture, page 27
User Interaction Layer, page 33
Framework Connections, page 36
High-Level Framework Architecture
The Genesys Framework consists of five layers (see Figure 1 on page 28
):
•
The Configuration Layer processes and stores all the data required for running Genesys solutions in a particular environment; it notifies clients of any configuration changes. The Configuration Layer also controls user access to a solution’s functions and data.
•
The Management Layer controls the startup and status of solutions, logging of maintenance events, generation and processing of alarms, and management of application failures.
•
The User Interaction Layer provides a comprehensive user interface to configure, monitor, and control the management environment.
•
The Media Layer enables Genesys solutions to communicate across media, including traditional telephony systems, Voice over IP (VOIP), e-mail, and the Web. This layer also provides the mechanism to distribute interaction-related business data within and across solutions.
Deployment Guide 27
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Configuration Layer
•
The Services Layer generates the statistical data used for interaction processing and contact center reporting and enables solutions to communicate with various database management systems (DBMSs).
SOLUTIONS
Services Layer
Media Layer
User Interaction Layer
Management Layer
Configuration Layer
FRAMEWORK
Figure 1: Framework Architecture
In sophisticated configurations using the Management Layer functionality, each layer depends on the layers below it to work properly.
Also note that a Genesys installation depends on License Manager, a third-party application not shown on the diagram, for license control.
Configuration Layer
Configuration Layer Functions
The Configuration Layer provides:
•
Centralized configuration data processing and storage for one-time entry of any information about contact center entities that any number of applications require to function in a particular business environment.
•
An advanced, configuration-data-distribution mechanism, so applications can read their configuration upon startup and be notified of updates at runtime without service interruptions.
•
Comprehensive data-integrity control functions that prevent entry of illogical configuration data that might cause solution malfunction.
28 Framework 8.1
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Configuration Layer
•
Advanced reconnection management which ensures that applications have up-to-date data after reestablishing connection to Configuration Server.
•
Access control functions to regulate user access to solution functions and data, based on the access privileges set for each item.
•
Wizards to help users through the automated process of solution deployment.
•
Universal, open, Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) interface to the configuration, so that a broad range of third-party applications can read and write the information.
Warning!
SOAP functionality is restricted to certain environments.
•
Support for geographically distributed environments.
•
Integration with external data sources.
•
Import and export of configuration data to and from the Configuration
Database.
Configuration Layer Architecture
Figure 2 shows the structure of the Configuration Layer.
Configuration
Database
DB Server
Configuration
Manager
Configuration Server
Solution
Deployment
Wizards
Deployment Guide
Management
Layer
User Interaction
Layer
Media
Layer
Services
Layer
SOLUTIONS
Figure 2: The Configuration Layer Architecture
•
Configuration Server provides centralized access to the Configuration
Database, based on permissions that super administrators can set for any user to any configuration object. Configuration Server also maintains the common logical integrity of configuration data and notifies applications of changes made to the data. Optionally, you can run Configuration Server in
Proxy mode to support a geographically distributed environment. (The
29
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Configuration Layer geographically distributed architecture is more complex than shown in the
diagram. See “Architecture” on page 260 for details.)
•
Configuration Manager provides a user-friendly interface for manipulating the contact center configuration data that solutions use and for setting user permissions for solution functions and data.
•
The Configuration Database stores all configuration data. DB Server—a
Services Layer component—is the access point to the Configuration
Database.
Warning!
Never add, delete, or modify any data in the Configuration
Database, except through applications developed by Genesys, or through applications instrumented with the Genesys
Configuration Server application programming interface
(API). If you have compelling reasons for accessing the database directly, consult Genesys Technical Support before you do so.
•
Solution Deployment Wizards automate deployment and upgrade. These wizards also handle solution-specific data integrity.
•
Configuration Conversion Wizard (CCW) (not shown in the diagram) provides a user-friendly interface for migrating Genesys configuration data to the 8.1 data format. Starting in release 8.1.3, CCW also enables you to migrate the Configuration Database to a multi-language format using
UTF-8, and to migrate a single-tenant (enterprise) Configuration Database to a hierarchical multi-tenant database. Refer to the Genesys Migration
Guide for more information about CCW.
•
Configuration Import Wizard (not shown in the diagram) makes it easier to integrate data from external data sources into the Genesys Configuration
Database. It provides a user-friendly interface to automatically import agent data from Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) and
Microsoft Active Directory databases and switch configuration data from various switches. The Wizard capabilities also include import and export of configuration data to and from Extensible Markup Language (XML) files, generation of custom reports from the Configuration Database, and comparison of two configuration sets (including import of configuration differences).
30 Framework 8.1
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Management Layer
Management Layer
Management Layer Functions
The Management Layer provides:
•
Centralized solution control and monitoring, displaying the real-time status of every configured
Solution
object, and activating and deactivating solutions and single applications, including user-defined solutions.
•
Centralized logging that records applications maintenance events. The unified log format enables easy selection of required log records and centralized log storage for convenient access and solution-level troubleshooting. Centralized logging also allows you to track individual interactions, audit activities in your contact center, and store alarm history.
•
Flexible alarm signaling that triggers alarms based on application maintenance events, system performance parameters, or Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) thresholds. Alarms are communicated to
Solution Control Interface and can be written to system logs. You can configure the system to convert alarms into SNMP traps and send them as e-mails to a specified Internet address. (The latter automatically enables paging notifications.) The Management Layer automatically associates alarms with the solutions they affect and stores alarms as active conditions in the system until they are either removed by another maintenance event or cleared by the user.
•
Fault-management functions, consisting of detection, isolation, and correction of application failures. For nonredundant configurations, the
Management Layer automatically restarts applications that fail. For redundant configurations, this layer supports a switchover to the standby applications and also automatically restarts applications that fail.
•
Remote deployment of Genesys components.
•
Built-in SNMP support for both alarm processing and SNMP data exchange with an SNMP-compliant network management system (NMS).
As a result, you can integrate a third-party NMS with a Genesys system to serve as an end-user interface for control and monitoring function and for alarm signaling function.
•
Individual host monitoring, including CPU and memory usage records and information about running processes and services.
•
Support for geographically distributed environments.
Management Layer Architecture
shows the structure of the Management Layer.
Deployment Guide 31
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture
32
Management Layer
Centralized Log
Database
DB Server
Message Server
Solution Control
Interface
Solution Control
Server e-mail. page,
NMS
SOLUTIONS
Figure 3: Management Layer Architecture
•
Local Control Agent (not shown in the diagram), located on every host that the Management Layer controls and/or monitors, is used to start and stop applications, detect application failures, and communicate application roles in redundancy context.
•
A remote deployment agent (not shown in the diagram), referred to as the
Genesys Deployment Agent, part of the Local Control Agent Installation
Package, deploys Genesys Installation Packages as directed by Genesys
Administrator—a User Interaction layer component.
•
Message Server provides centralized processing and storage of every application's maintenance events. Events are stored as log records in the
Centralized Log Database where they are available for further centralized processing. Message Server also checks for log events configured to trigger alarms. If it detects a match, it sends the alarm to Solution Control
Server for immediate processing.
•
Solution Control Server is the processing center of the Management Layer.
It uses Local Control Agents to start solution components in the proper order, monitor their status, and provide a restart or switchover in case of application failure. Solution Controls Server also includes four utilities that provide the ability to gracefully stop T-Servers, handle T-Server stuck calls, send log messages on behalf of applications, and exchange information with Solution Control Server. These utilities can be installed with or without Solution Control Server.
•
Solution Control Interface displays the status of hosts and all installed
Genesys solutions and information about each active alarm, enables the user to start and stop solutions or single applications (including third-party applications), and also allows advanced selection and viewing of maintenance logs.
•
The Centralized Log Database (also called the Log Database) stores all application log records, including interaction-related records, alarm history records, and audit records. DB Server—a Services Layer component—serves as an access point to the Centralized Log Database.
Framework 8.1
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture User Interaction Layer
•
Genesys SNMP Master Agent (an optional component not shown in the diagram) provides an interface between the Management Layer and an
SNMP-compliant NMS.
User Interaction Layer
Functions
The User Interaction Layer provides centralized web-based functionality and interfaces for the following:
•
Deployment of Genesys components to any computer on the network using the Genesys Deployment Agent (a Management Layer component).
•
Configuration, monitoring, and control of applications and solutions.
Currently, Genesys Administrator is the only component in the User
Interaction layer.
Architecture
Figure 4 shows the structure of the User Interaction Layer (only Genesys
Administrator for now), and how it fits into a Genesys environment.
Web
Browser
Centralized
Log Database
Genesys
Administrator
Deployment Guide
Configuration
Server
Solution Control
Server
SOLUTIONS
Figure 4: User Interaction Layer Architecture
•
The browser-based Genesys Administrator includes a comprehensive user interface to configure, monitor, and control the management environment.
•
Genesys Administrator:
Communicates with the Configuration Server (a Configuration Layer component) to exchange configuration information.
33
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Media Layer
Communicates with the Solution Control Server (a Management Layer component) to exchange status, operations, and control information.
Reads logs from the Centralized Log Database (a Management Layer component).
•
Depending on the solutions deployed in the system, Genesys Administrator may also communicate with other back end servers to retrieve solution-specific information.
Media Layer
Media Layer Functions
The Media Layer provides:
•
Interfaces to communication media.
•
Distribution of interaction-related business data within and across solutions.
Media Layer Architecture
Figure 5 shows the structure of the Media Layer.
Internet
Media
Traditional
Telephony
VoIP
Telephony
Interaction
Server
T-Servers
T-Servers for
IP Solutions
34
SOLUTIONS
Figure 5: Media Layer Architecture
•
Interaction Server provides an interface with Internet media like e-mail and web communications. T-Server provides an interface with traditional telephony systems.
•
T-Servers provide an interface with traditional telephony systems.
•
T-Servers for IP Solutions provide an interface with VoIP telephony systems.
All of these servers communicate interaction-processing requests from the
Genesys solutions to the media devices and distribute interaction-processing events in the opposite direction. They also maintain the current state of each
Framework 8.1
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Services Layer interaction and all the business data collected about each interaction during processing stages. These servers distribute attached data to all the applications that participate in processing the interaction. They can also transfer that data across multiple interaction-processing sites.
Another Media Layer component, Load Distribution Server (LDS), not shown in the diagram, increases system scalability and availability. Mediating between T-Servers and T-Server clients, LDS enables an N+1 architecture, where N is the number of clients that handle the load, in situations where the total traffic of a large installation exceeds the capacity of a single client.
Services Layer
Services Layer Overview
The Services Layer provides:
•
Interfaces for Genesys solutions to various DBMSs.
•
Conversion of events related to management of single interactions into statistical data, which is then used for interaction processing and contact center reporting.
Services Layer Architecture
Figure 6 shows the structure of the Services Layer.
Deployment Guide
Figure 6: Services Layer Architecture
•
Stat Server tracks real-time states of interaction management resources and collects statistics about contact center performance. Genesys solutions use the statistical data to more “intelligently” manage real-time interactions.
Through Genesys Reporting, you can use the data to generate real-time and historical contact center reports.
35
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Framework Connections
•
DB Server provides the interface between Genesys applications and the
DBMS holding the operational databases for solutions.
Framework Connections
Figure 7 shows connections that Framework components establish to each
other and to solutions.
LEGEND:
GUI
Application
Server
Application
optional connection mandatory connection
Agent
Desktops
Configuration
Layer
Solution
Deployment
Wizards
Config.
Manager
SCI
Management
Layer
LCAs
SCS
User Interaction
Layer
Media
Layer
All Genesys processes
Services
Services
Layer
Genesys
Administrator
T-Server Stat Server
Config.
Server
All Genesys processes
Message
Server
All Genesys processes
DB Server DB Server
Web
Management
Server
Configuration
Database
Centralized
Log
Database
FRAMEWORK
Figure 7: Detailed Framework Architecture
DB Server
Custom
Reporting
Database
36 Framework 8.1
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Framework Connections
IPv6 Support
All Framework server components support IPv6, except for the following:
•
When connecting to FlexNet Publisher 11.9 license server, all Framework servers support IPv6 on only the RHEL 5 64-bit, Windows 2008 64-bit, and HP-UX 11i v3 Integrity (Itanium) operating systems.
For more information about IPv6, see Appendix E on page 321
.
Deployment Guide 37
Chapter 2: Framework Architecture Framework Connections
38 Framework 8.1
Chapter
3
Planning the Installation
This chapter describes the main tasks that you should complete, and the considerations you should take, when planning your Framework installation.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Initial Considerations, page 39
Multi-language Environments (UTF-8 Support), page 44
Network Locations for Framework Components, page 46
Solution Availability, page 58
Security Considerations, page 67
Initial Considerations
Major Planning Steps
Achieving optimal performance with your Genesys installation requires comprehensive planning. How well Genesys Framework components function in a particular environment depends on a number of variables, including amount of computer memory, network location of the applications, and the specific tasks the applications perform. This document describes various characteristics of Framework components and looks at how they interact with each other and the applications they serve. It provides basic data and makes recommendations that will help you select the optimal components for your specific needs, choose a computer for each component, and define the optimal location for each component on the network.
Start your deployment planning by identifying the existing telephony resources in your contact center environment. Then follow the deployment
recommendations for each architecture layer given in “Network Locations for
Framework Components” on page 46
.
Deployment Guide 39
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Initial Considerations
Consider whether you can benefit from:
•
Using the Management Layer (see “Management Layer” on page 50
).
•
Having redundant configurations (see “Application Failures” on page 66
).
•
Installing an additional Configuration Server in Proxy mode (see “Solution
).
•
Installing a number of Solution Control Servers in Distributed mode (see
“Solution Availability” on page 58 ).
•
Using Load Distribution Server (refer to LDS documentation for information).
In addition, review “Solution Availability” on page 58 and “Security
Considerations” on page 67 , which are common aspects of any Genesys
installation.
Finally, prepare an installation worksheet based on the sample given in
appendix G, “Installation Worksheet,” on page 341
.
Telephony Network Description
Certain information is required to deploy Framework, so prepare a description of your telephony and media network as discussed in this section. You will use data from this description when supplying configuration parameters to
Deployment Wizards or when configuring objects for your contact center using
Genesys Administrator or Configuration Manager.
You must have the following information available for every switch that you plan to use in your interaction management solution:
1. Switch type, which usually corresponds to the switch vendor, brand name, and model number.
2. Version of the switch software.
3. Type of CTI Link (TCP/IP, X.25, or ISDN).
4. Version of the CTI Link software.
5. Information required to connect to the CTI Link (for example, for TCP/IP connection, host name and port number), including password, service id, and other parameters required for switch security.
6. Types and numbers of telephony devices, also called Directory Numbers or
DNs. You may have to configure specific types of DNs (for example,
Routing Points) on the switches to support functions of the interaction management solutions.
7. Login codes to be assigned to agents for runtime associations between agents and their working places.
8. Information about how the switch DNs are arranged into working places.
9. Information about how DNs that belong to a particular switch can be reached from other switches in a multi-site installation.
40 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Initial Considerations
In addition, describe your contact center resources:
1. For every user who must access any interaction management application, define the following parameters: a unique employee ID, unique user name, and password. The role of a user in the contact center defines the set of access privileges for this user in the system. For more information, see
“Security Considerations” on page 67 .
2. For agents, define Login codes in every switch at which they might be working.
3. For agents, define skills that might be considered as criteria for effective interaction processing.
4. Note how agents are arranged into groups.
5. Decide how to arrange the working places into groups.
Guidelines for Naming Hosts
To ensure that the operating systems properly interpret host names, follow these guidelines when naming the host computers in your system:
1. If possible, use the host’s DNS name.
2. If it is not possible to use the DNS name, use the host’s IP address, in the format x.x.x.x.
However, verify the availability of that IP address by using the command ping <IP address>
on the command-line before starting the installation process.
Licensing Your Applications
Genesys licenses its applications using the FlexLM License Manager, produced by Macrovision. At startup, all licensed Genesys servers establish a client connection to License Manager, providing a computer host ID or IP address along with various information about the application. If the application has a valid license, License Manager allows the application to start and run properly. Note that the Management Layer can control and monitor License
Manager as a third-party application but not as a Genesys server application.
To find more information about how Framework and other Genesys components are licensed, refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide.
Configuration Environment Types
Genesys provides its software to two types of companies:
•
Companies that own their telephony equipment and use it for their own needs.
•
Companies (such as service providers) that make their telephony equipment available to other companies.
Deployment Guide 41
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Initial Considerations
Two types of the Genesys configuration environment address the difference in the needs of these two types of companies—enterprise and hierarchical multi-tenant.
You establish a particular configuration environment when you create the
Configuration Database structure during the Configuration Layer installation.
For more information about the two configuration environments and resulting differences in configuration objects, refer to Framework Configuration
Manager Help.
Enterprise
The enterprise (also referred to as single-tenant) configuration environment serves the needs of a single company that owns its telephony equipment and uses it for its own needs. In an enterprise configuration environment, all configuration information is visible to all users—employees of the company—given that they have sufficient permissions.
Starting in release 8.1.3, you can now convert your enterprise configuration environment to a hierarchical multi-tenant environment, using the
Configuration Conversion Wizard. Refer to the Genesys Migration Guide for more information.
Hierarchical Multi-Tenant
The hierarchical multi-tenant configuration environment serves the needs of a company—typically, a service provider—making its telephony equipment available to other companies. So, this configuration environment also serves the needs of every company using the service. In this environment, configuration information about the resources that are managed exclusively by the service provider is visible on the service provider side only. Only personnel from the service provider company can register the entities that provide the technical foundation for setting up the CTI services, such as switching offices, data network hosts, and CTI applications. These resources may be shared by some or all of the companies using the service (“Tenants”). The resources of the individual companies, such as user accounts, agent groups, outbound campaigns, and so forth, are configured separately by the personnel of these companies. This configuration is visible only to that company's users.
This general structure can be extended to an unlimited number of layers. The service provider can provide its services not only to companies that use its services directly (as existed prior to release 8.0), but to other companies, such as resellers, who in turn sell those services to other companies. The customers of these resellers can, in turn, be direct users and perhaps other resellers. This hierarchical layering can be from one to an unlimited number of levels.
Tenants that provide services to other tenants are called parent tenants; those that use these services are called child tenants. Therefore, a single Tenant object can be a parent, a child, or both.
42 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Initial Considerations
Large
Configuration
Environments
Notes:
Prior to release 8.0, the hierarchical multi-tenant environment was known as the multi-tenant environment, because the latter was limited to one layer of hierarchy. In release 8.0 and later, the two terms are used interchangeably, but always refer to a hierarchical multi-tenant environment.
A single instance of Configuration Server can support over 500,000 objects with a start-up time of less than 5 minutes. This configuration would require at least 1 GB of RAM for storage.
Genesys defines a large configuration environment as one in which the
Configuration Database stores 50,000 or more configuration objects. Genesys strongly recommends that you consider these guidelines when operating within a large configuration environment:
•
Use Genesys Administrator, Configuration Manager and other
Configuration Server clients with special care, to prevent loading problems. For example, create user accounts with different configuration access capabilities, so that contact center staff can log in to Genesys
Administrator and Configuration Manager and perform only those tasks they are required to perform over the configuration objects for which they have permissions. This saves Genesys Administrator and Configuration
Manager from loading all the objects from the Configuration Database.
•
Consider using Configuration Unit and Folder objects when creating a large number of configuration objects. The recommended number of configuration objects per folder is up to 4,000. Anything larger significantly increases Configuration Manager time for loading configuration objects.
•
When creating configuration objects of the
Script
type (for example, routing strategies), keep in mind that both the number of
Script
objects and the script size significantly affect the time it takes Configuration
Manager to load the
Script
configuration objects. If you create large scripts, reduce the number of
Script
objects in a subfolder to achieve an acceptable loading speed. For instance, for the script-type configuration objects approximately 150 KB in size, limiting the number of script-type objects to 30 per subfolder guarantees an acceptable loading speed.
•
When creating a large number of configuration objects of the
Agent Login type, assign them to
User
configuration objects as you create the logins.
When the Configuration Database contains too many unassigned agent logins, Genesys Administrator and Configuration Manager takes a long time to open the
Agent Login
browse dialog box from the
Configuration
tab or the
Person Properties
dialog box. To guarantee an acceptable loading speed, keep the number of unassigned
Agent Login
objects below 1000 per
Tenant object.
Deployment Guide 43
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Multi-language Environments (UTF-8 Support)
•
For all configuration objects, do not store large amounts of data as text properties in an object’s Annex, unless it is explicitly required by Genesys applications.
Multi-language Environments (UTF-8
Support)
UTF-8 data encoding enables a system to work with multi-language data that is encoded with UTF-8. In release 8.1.2, Configuration Server introduced this functionality for string fields of some configuration objects (
Business
Attribute
and
Attribute Value
objects). In release 8.1.3, this support was extended to all string fields of all configuration objects, with some exceptions noted later in this section. This functionality is optional, and must be enabled to take effect.
Warning!
You must enable Configuration Server to handle UTF-8 data within the following time frame:
• After the database has been initialized.
• Before you start Configuration Server for the first time. Trying to enable a Configuration Server for UTF-8 that has already been started at least once will result in a warning message being logged.
You can perform an object search of data encoded in UTF-8, using the standard wildcard symbols, with search data supplied by UTF-8. The search parameters, in UTF-8, are compared with the data. All fields that are searchable with non-UTF-8 data are searchable with the UTF-8 data.
To configure your system to support multiple languages, satisfy the database
prerequisites in “Databases” on page 73
Framework Support for UTF-8
Framework supports UTF-8 encoding of the following:
•
Most configuration fields (exceptions below)
•
Solution Control Server alarm names, messages, and display thereof
•
Content of log messages in Message Server and in the centralized Log
Database
•
UTF-8 initialization of the Configuration Database and the Log Database
Framework does not support UTF-8 encoding of the following items; they must be in ASCII.
•
Names of
Application
objects
44 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Multi-language Environments (UTF-8 Support)
•
Command-line arguments specified during configuration in the Start Info section
•
Command-line arguments used by mlcmd and logutility
•
Local configuration file used by Configuration Server
•
SNMP traps and scalar data
•
Database access credentials in the
[dbserver]
configuration option section of DB Server
•
Database parameters in Database Access Points
•
Host names
•
Database table name in
Table Access objects
•
Log names and log file names specified in the
[log]
configuration option section
DBMS Supporting for UTF-8 Encoding
The following DBMS can be used with UTF-8 encoding:
•
DB2
•
MS SQL (uses UCS-2 encoding)
•
Oracle
•
PostgreSQL
The following database do not support UTF-8 encoding:
•
Sybase
•
Informix
Converting from a non-UTF-8 Database to a UTF-8 Database
Starting in release 8.1.3, you can use the Configuration Conversion Wizard
(CCW) to convert a non-UTF-8 compatible Configuration Database into a database that can store and work with encoded data. Refer to the Genesys
Migration Guide for information about using CCW to convert your configuration database.
Except for the conversion of the Configuration Database, Genesys does not otherwise provide any tools to support the migration of an existing database, that cannot work with UTF-8 data, into a database than can store and work with encoded data. Genesys recommends that you use tools and utilities provided by the DBMS you are using to do any such conversion.
Deployment Guide 45
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
Network Locations for Framework
Components
This section provides basic data and makes recommendations that will help you select the optimal components for your specific needs, choose a computer for each component, and define the optimal location for each component on the network.
A separate section presents the information for each layer of Framework.
Note:
In release 8.x, Genesys Administrator performs the same functions as, and can be used instead of, Configuration Manager and Solution
Control Interface. Accordingly, both Configuration Manager and
Solution Control Interface are marked in this section as optional, although they are still available in this release.
For more information, refer to “User Interaction Layer (Genesys
Administrator)” on page 56 , and to the Framework Genesys
Administrator Deployment Guide.
Configuration Layer
The Configuration Layer is a mandatory part of any Genesys CTI installation.
You cannot configure and run any other layers of Framework—or any solutions—unless Configuration Layer components are running.
Configuration Database
Warnings!
• Never add, delete, or modify any data in the Configuration
Database except through applications developed or those instrumented with Genesys Configuration Server API. If you have compelling reasons for accessing the database directly, consult Genesys Technical Support before you do so.
• Configuration Server treats its information and checks integrity constraints in a case-sensitive manner. Therefore, your SQL database must be installed and configured in case-sensitive mode. Refer to your SQL Server Administrator documentation for additional information.
The Configuration Database stores all configuration data.
46 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for the
Configuration Database:
•
The size of the Configuration Database depends on the size of the contact center, or—more precisely—on the number of entities in the contact center that you specify as configuration data objects. If data storage capacity is limited, consider allocating 10 KB of space for every object in the contact center as a general guideline. Otherwise, allocating 300 MB accommodates a Configuration Database for a typical enterprise installation.
•
Treat the Configuration Database as a mission-critical data storage. Ensure that only the properly qualified personnel gain access to the DBMS that contains the Configuration Database itself. Information about access to the database is stored in the configuration file of Configuration Server. To protect this file, place it in a directory that is accessible only to the people directly involved with Configuration Layer maintenance.
•
Consider encrypting the database access password via Configuration
Server.
•
As with any mission-critical data, regularly back up the Configuration
Database. Base the frequency of scheduled backups on the rate of modifications in a particular configuration environment. Always back up the database before making any essential modifications, such as the addition of a new site or solution.
•
Switch Configuration Server to Read-Only mode before performing any maintenance activities related to the Configuration Database.
•
Save the records of all maintenance activities related to the Configuration
Database.
•
Users of the Configuration Database should have at least the following privileges for all tables in the database:
Select
Insert
Update
Delete
DB Server
DB Server provides the interface between Configuration Server and the DBMS holding the Configuration Database.
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for
DB Server:
•
The Configuration Layer requires a dedicated DB Server that should not be used for any other purposes. This DB Server has a special installation and
startup procedure. Refer to the DB Server sections of Chapter 5 on page 85
and Chapter 7 on page 171 for more information about installing and
starting the Configuration DB Server.
Deployment Guide 47
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
•
Locate DB Server on the computer on which the DBMS client runs.
•
Install DB Server on a multiprocessor computer to optimize its performance. As the DBMS itself, DB Server can spawn child processes that benefit from multiprocessor capabilities.
•
Provide sufficient RAM to run DB Server processes. To ensure adequate performance, do not run DB Server processes in Swap mode.
Configuration Server
Configuration Server provides centralized access to the Configuration
Database, based on permissions that you can set for any user to any configuration object. Configuration Server also maintains the common logical integrity of configuration data and notifies applications of changes made to the data.
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for
Configuration Server:
•
Genesys solutions installed in a particular environment can have only one
Configuration Database managed though one Configuration Server at a time.
•
Because Configuration Server keeps all configuration data in its memory, allocate memory for this server based on the expected size of the
Configuration Database.
•
Although you can install Configuration Server anywhere on the network because it does not generate heavy traffic, the most logical location for it is on the computer running DB Server.
Note:
If you are using Configuration Server in high-availability (HA) mode,
Genesys recommends that you configure redundant DB Servers for both Configuration Servers, or else move DB Server to a host other than the one on which primary or backup Configuration Server is running.
•
When you install Configuration Server on a UNIX host computer, increase the swap area of the host to at least 600 MB to accommodate a large
Configuration Database.
Configuration Server Proxy
To support geographically distributed installations, Configuration Server can operate in Proxy mode. In this document, a Configuration Server that operates in Proxy mode, and that provides similar functionality to Configuration Server
7.x, is called Configuration Server Proxy. For more information about
Configuration Server Proxy, see “Solution Availability” on page 58 .
48 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for
Configuration Server Proxy:
•
Genesys solutions installed in a particular environment can have only one
Configuration Database managed though one Configuration Server at a time.
•
Configuration Server Proxy keeps all configuration data in its memory which improves data processing performance. Proxy consumes approximately the same amount of RAM as Configuration Server Proxy
7.x and 8.0, and Configuration Server 8.x.
•
You can install Configuration Server Proxy anywhere on the network because it does not generate heavy traffic.
•
When you install Configuration Server Proxy on a UNIX host computer, increase the swap area of the host to at least 600 MB to accommodate a large Configuration Database.
Configuration Manager
Note:
In release 8.x, Genesys Administrator performs the same functions as, and can be used instead of, Configuration Manager. For more
information, refer to “User Interaction Layer (Genesys Administrator)” on page 56
, and to the Framework Genesys Administrator Deployment
Guide.
Configuration Manager provides a user-friendly interface for manipulating the contact center configuration data that solutions use and for setting user permissions for solution functions and data.
When planning your installation, follow this recommendation for
Configuration Manager:
•
Install and run as many instances of Configuration Manager on the network as needed.
Note:
You can launch multiple instances of Configuration Manager on the same computer and connect them to different Configuration
Servers or to the same Configuration Server. You can also open as many object
Property
dialog boxes as you need from a single instance of Configuration Manager.
Genesys Security Pack on UNIX
Genesys Security Pack on UNIX, an optional component of the Configuration
Layer, provides the components, such as shared libraries, which are used for generation of certificates and their deployment on UNIX computers on which
Deployment Guide 49
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
Genesys components are installed. For more information, refer to the Genesys
Security Deployment Guide.
Configuration Import Wizard
Use the Configuration Import Wizard (CIW), an optional component of the
Configuration Layer, to import the following data into the Genesys
Configuration Database:
•
Agent data from Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) and
Microsoft Active Directory databases.
•
Switch configuration data from various switches.
You can also use CIW to import and export configuration data to and from
Extensible Markup Language (XML) files, generate custom reports from the
Configuration Database, and compare two configuration sets (including import of the configuration differences). For more information about CIW, refer to the
Framework Imported Configuration Data Formats Reference Manual.
When working with CIW, Genesys recommends that you allow up to 1 GB memory for import and export operations to and from a large Configuration
Database.
Management Layer
The exact configuration of the Management Layer depends on which of the following management functions you would like to use:
•
Solution and application control and monitoring
•
Centralized logging
•
Alarm signaling
•
Application failure management
Genesys recommends that you use all these capabilities to optimize solution management.
Management Layer Capabilities—Required
Components
If you intend to use one or more of the Management Layer capabilities, plan to install the components required for each capability, as outlined in this section.
Note:
In release 8.x, Genesys Administrator performs the same functions as, and can be used instead of, Solution Control Interface. For more
information, refer to “User Interaction Layer (Genesys Administrator)” on page 56
, and to the Framework Genesys Administrator Deployment
Guide.
50 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
Solution and Application Control and Monitoring
Install these components to control and monitor solutions and applications:
•
Local Control Agent
•
Solution Control Server
•
Solution Control Interface (optional)
Refer to the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide for descriptions of, and recommendations for, these components.
Centralized Logging
Install these components to use centralized logging:
•
Centralized Log Database
•
DB Server (as a client of Configuration Server)
•
Message Server
•
Solution Control Interface (optional)
Note:
Although Solution Control Server is not required, it is a source of log events vital for solution maintenance. For example, Solution Control
Server generates log events related to detection and correction of application failures. As such, it is useful for centralized logging.
Refer to the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide for descriptions of and recommendations for these components.
Alarm Signaling
Install these components to provide alarm signaling:
•
Message Server
•
Solution Control Server
•
Solution Control Interface (optional)
•
Genesys SNMP Master Agent, if SNMP alarm signaling is required. See
also “Built-in SNMP Support” on page 52 .
Note:
You do not need to install the Genesys application called G-Proxy to provide the alarm-signaling functions of the Management Layer.
Refer to the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide for descriptions of and recommendations for these components.
Application Failure Management
Install these components to detect and correct application failures:
•
Local Control Agent
Deployment Guide 51
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
•
Solution Control Server
•
Solution Control Interface (optional)
Refer to the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide for descriptions of and recommendations for these components.
See the section “Application Failures” on page 66 and for information about
the application-failure management mechanism.
Built-in SNMP Support
Install the following components to integrate Genesys Framework with an
SNMP-compliant third-party NMS (network management system):
•
Local Control Agent
•
Solution Control Server
•
Genesys SNMP Master Agent or a third-party SNMP master agent compliant with the AgentX protocol
•
Message Server if SNMP alarm signaling is required
Refer to the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide for descriptions of and recommendations for these components.
Management Layer Components
This section provides recommendations for planning and installing the
Management Layer components.
Local Control Agent
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for Local
Control Agent:
•
Install an instance of LCA on each computer running a monitored application, whether a Genesys daemon or a third-party application. LCA is installed at the port number you specify in the
LCA Port
property of the corresponding
Host
object in the Configuration Database. If you do not specify a value for
LCA Port,
the LCA default port number is
4999.
By default, LCA runs automatically on computer startup.
Note:
On Windows operating systems, the installation script always installs LCA as a Windows Service. If you are changing the LCA port number in the host configuration after the installation, you must also change the port number in the
ImagePath
in the application folder, which you can find in the Registry Editor. Refer
to “Notes on Configuring the LCA Port” on page 122 for
instructions.
52 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
•
On UNIX platforms, LCA must be added to the r/c
files during the installation, so that LCA can start automatically on computer startup. In practice, this means that the person installing LCA must have sufficient permissions.
•
If you will be using Genesys Administrator to deploy Genesys applications and solutions to any hosts in your network, you must install and run the latest instance of LCA on each target host. This will install a remote deployment agent (referred to as the Genesys Deployment Agent), which is used by Genesys Administrator to carry out the deployment on that host.
Message Server
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for Message
Server:
•
Genesys recommends the use of one Message Server and of one Log
Database for all but large installations. If you are working within a large installation and think about evenly dividing the total log-event traffic among number of Message Servers, each serving any number of clients, keep the following facts in mind:
Although any number of Message Servers can store log records in the same Log Database, one Message Server cannot store log records to more than one Log Database.
Because any number of Message Servers can send log records to
Solution Control Server, Solution Control Interface can display alarms based on log records from a few Message Servers.
•
If you want an application to generate alarms, you must configure it to send log events to Message Server. Use the same Message Server for both the centralized logging and alarm signaling.
•
If you want Message Server to provide alarms, you must connect it to
Solution Control Server. This means that you must configure a connection to every Message Server in the SCS
Application
object’s
Properties dialog box.
•
As with any other daemon application, you can deploy redundant Message
Servers.
•
To optimize the performance of the connection with DB Server, configure the number of messages that the Message Server sends to DB Server before receiving a response. The smaller the number of messages, the greater the decrease in performance. See the “Message Server” section of the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for more information.
Deployment Guide 53
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
Solution Control Server
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for Solution
Control Server:
•
Given that you can install and use more than one SCS that is operating in
Distributed
mode within a given configuration environment, consider deploying a few Solution Control Servers in this mode for large or geographically distributed installations. In these installations, each server controls its own subset of
Host
,
Application
, and
Solution
objects.
Distributed Solution Control Servers communicate with each other through the dedicated Message Server.
•
As with any other daemon application, you can deploy redundant Solution
Control Servers. Redundancy support for SCS is implemented through direct communication between the backup SCS and the LCA of the host on which the primary SCS runs. To set up HA port synchronization between
primary and backup Solution Control Servers, see “Synchronizing HA
Ports Between Redundant Solution Control Servers” on page 240 .
Note:
You cannot perform a manual switchover for Solution Control
Server.
Solution Control Interface
Note:
In release 8.x, Genesys Administrator performs the same functions as, and can be used instead of, Solution Control Interface. For more
information, refer to “User Interaction Layer (Genesys Administrator)” on page 56
, and to the Framework Genesys Administrator Deployment
Guide.
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for SCI:
•
Install and run as many instances of SCI on the network as needed.
Note:
Launch only one instance of SCI per host computer.
•
Keep in mind that although you can configure SCI to work with more than one Solution Control Server and more than one Log Database, SCI can only work with one SCS and one Log Database at a time.
•
Use SCI for advanced viewing and handling of the log.
•
Use SCI to view active alarms and define what solutions the alarms might affect.
54 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
DB Server for Log Database
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for
DB Server:
•
Locate DB Server on the same computer on which the DBMS client runs.
•
Install DB Server on a multiprocessor computer to optimize its performance. As with the DBMS itself, DB Server can spawn child processes that benefit from multiprocessor capabilities.
Centralized Log Database
As with any historical database, the size of the Centralized Log Database grows with time. So, when you are planning your installation, keep in mind that:
•
The maximum allowable record size is 1 KB.
•
The size of the Centralized Log Database depends on:
The number of applications in the system.
The log level you have set for the network output for each application.
The required time the log records should be kept in the database.
provides general timing recommendations.
With these limits in mind, follow these recommendations for the Centralized
Log Database:
•
For efficient online log viewing, allocate temporary database space of at least 30 percent of the expected Centralized Log Database size.
•
Limit permissions to modify the Centralized Log Database content to
Message Server(s) only.
•
Define how long the log records are to be kept in the database before they become obsolete. Use the Log Database Maintenance Wizard to delete obsolete records or configure the removal of obsolete records using the
DBMS mechanisms.
•
Users of the Centralized Log Database should have at least the following privileges for all tables in the database:
Select
Insert
Update
Delete
•
Make a trade-off between how long the log records are to be kept and the ability to access them efficiently. If both a considerable period of record storage and quick online access to the log records are important, back up the more dated records in a separate database.
Deployment Guide 55
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
Table 1:
Recommended Log Storage Time
Logging Level Supported Call Volume
STANDARD
INTERACTION
TRACE
100 calls/sec
10 calls/sec
5 calls/sec
Recommended
Storage Time
10 days
1 day
1 day
SNMP Master Agent
When planning your installation, Genesys recommends that you use SNMP
Master Agent only if both of these conditions apply:
•
You want to access the Management Layer functions via an NMS interface; or you have another SNMP-enabled Genesys application and want to access its features via an NMS interface.
•
You don’t have another AgentX-compatible SNMP master agent in place.
User Interaction Layer (Genesys Administrator)
Starting in release 8.0, the web-based Genesys Administrator provides the functionality provided by Configuration Manager and Solution Control
Interface. Install Genesys Administrator, preferably in close proximity with
Configuration Server. You can then install as many web browsers as required, on which you can access Genesys Administrator.
Media Layer
For every switch that you plan to make a part of your interaction management solution, install at least one T-Server application.
T-Server
T-Server provides an interface between traditional telephony systems and
Genesys applications.
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for T-Server:
•
At the premise level, always associate one switch with one T-Server.
•
Allocate memory for T-Server based on the number of interactions you expect to be simultaneously processed at a given site during the busiest hour and the typical amount of business data attached to the interactions.
Allocate at least 500 bytes per interaction plus memory space for a
“typical” amount of attached data.
56 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Network Locations for Framework Components
•
Provide sufficient RAM to run T-Server processes. To ensure adequate performance, do not run T-Server processes in Swap mode.
•
Do not install real-time third-party applications on the computer running
T-Server.
•
Consider using a dedicated subnetwork for T-Server connection to the link.
•
Do not enable IP routing between the link subnet and the network when
T-Server is installed on a computer with two or more network cards (one of which is used for link connection and the others for connection to the rest of the network).
Services Layer
Although the Services Layer components are considered elements of
Framework, it is logical to install them when you install the solution that they will serve. When deploying these, consider the following recommendations.
DB Server
DB Server provides the interface between Genesys applications and the DBMS holding the operational databases for solutions.
When planning your installation, follow these recommendations for
DB Server:
•
Do not use the DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Layer to access any databases other than the Configuration Database. (See
.)
•
Consider dividing database-related traffic evenly among any number of
DB Servers, each serving up to 255 clients.
•
Locate DB Servers on the computer on which the DBMS client runs.
•
Install DB Server on a multiprocessor computer, to optimize its performance. As the DBMS itself, DB Server can spawn child processes that benefit from multiprocessor capabilities.
•
Provide sufficient RAM to run DB Server processes. To ensure adequate performance, do not run DB Server processes in Swap mode.
Stat Server
Stat Server tracks real-time states of interaction management resources and collects statistics about contact center performance. Genesys solutions use the statistical data to more “intelligently” manage interactions. Use Genesys
Reporting to generate real-time and historical contact center reports based on data that Stat Server collects.
For specific recommendations on Stat Server installation, refer to Stat Server documentation.
Deployment Guide 57
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability
Solution Availability
This section describes the events that affect the availability of Genesys solutions.
Think of the availability of an interaction management solution as the amount of time that the solution is available to process enterprise interactions. Two major categories of events affect availability: changes in the operating conditions and failures. The first category combines the various operational and maintenance activities that require temporary shutdown and restart of the entire system or of one of its components. The second category deals with the temporary inability of the solution to perform its required functions because of operator errors or software faults.
Given the complexity of the solution architecture, remember that:
•
Any interaction management solution relies on functionality provided by a number of components, each performing a specific task. The overall availability of a solution depends on the availability of each of the components involved.
•
Interaction management solutions do not operate in isolation. On the contrary, they essentially bring together various business resources, such as telephony switches, call-processing telephony terminations, database management systems, and Internet communication servers. As such, the inability of an interaction management solution to perform its required function may be the result of the unavailability of an external component or system.
•
Genesys solutions, which consist of software components only, operate on hardware platforms that require maintenance and that are subject to failures. For example, running redundant processes on the same host may work in the presence of a software failure; however, it offers no protection if the computer itself or a communication link to it fails. The availability of a solution can never be greater than the availability of the underlying hardware platform.
The Genesys Framework is designed to minimize the impact on solution availability associated with operational and maintenance activities. Because the Configuration Layer updates solutions about any configuration changes at runtime, uninterrupted solution operations are guaranteed regardless of the number or frequency of changes made to the contact center environment.
Dynamic reconfiguration is a standard feature of every Genesys 7.x and 8.x component and does not require you to make any special adjustments to enable configuration settings.
Solution availability can also be affected by accidental operator errors, unauthorized actions, or actions that are carried out in a less than skillful manner. The data integrity rules implemented in the Configuration Layer greatly reduce errors of the first type. The basic integrity rules common across all solutions are supported by Configuration Server, and therefore enforced
58 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability regardless of the type of client application through which the data is managed.
More advanced integrity rules specific to a particular solution are implemented in the solution wizards. Genesys recommends that you use wizards for the initial deployment of solutions and major configuration updates in the course of solution operation.
Genesys Framework also provides a comprehensive set of access control functions that help minimize the risk of failures associated with unskilled or unauthorized operator actions. For more information about these functions, see
“Security Considerations” on page 67 .
Finally, to reduce the impact on solution operations, schedule all operational and maintenance activities that directly affect system behavior for off-peak hours, when solutions operate at minimum loads.
Faults—accidental and unplanned events causing a system to fail—present the biggest challenge to solution availability. The functions that detect, isolate, and correct various types of faults are partly incorporated into every Genesys component and partly implemented in the Management Layer of the Genesys
Framework. Refer to the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide for more information about the various fault-detection mechanisms implemented in Genesys software.
IPv6 vs. IPv4 Overview
Note:
This section provides a high-level view of IPv6, and how to enable it in a Genesys component. For detailed information about IPv6, the operating systems that support it, and things to consider when
deploying it, see Appendix D, “Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)” on page 321
. For a list of Framework connections that support IPv6, see
.
Internet Protocol version 6, commonly known as IPv6, is a network layer protocol for packet-switched inter-networks. It is designated as the successor of IPv4, the current version of the Internet Protocol, for general use on the
Internet.
IPv6 must be configured on each component that is going to support it. There are two ways to enable it, as follows:
•
Use the environment variable
GCTI_CONN_IPV6_ON
. Use the procedure
“Enabling and disabling IPv6 support using an environment variable” on page 60 .
•
Use the configuration option enable-ipv6
. Use the procedure “Enabling and disabling IPv6 support using a configuration option” on page 60 .
Deployment Guide 59
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability
Procedure:
Enabling and disabling IPv6 support using an environment variable
When to use this procedure:
•
If an IPv6 connection is to be established before an application is able to, or must, read information from Configuration Server.
•
If you want all Genesys applications on the same host to support IPv6. You only have to configure the host once, rather than configure each application on that host individually. In addition, this host-level setting will override any application-level setting.
If neither of these situations apply to you, you can choose to enable or disable
.
Start of procedure
Set the environment variable
GCTI_CONN_IPV6_ON
to true, represented by any non-zero integer value, to enable IPv6; or to false, rep resented by zero (
0
), to disable IPv6.
The default value of this environment variable is false (
0
), indicating that IPv6 support is disabled. This default value ensures backward compatibility.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Enabling and disabling IPv6 support using a configuration option
Do not use this procedure if:
•
An IPv6 connection is to be established before an application is able to, or must, read information from Configuration Server.
•
You want all Genesys applications on a specific host to support IPv6, and you want to set it only once.
If neither of these situations apply to you, you can choose to enable or disable
Start of procedure
Using either Genesys Administrator or Configuration Manager, set the enable-ipv6
option in the common
section of the options of the component’s
Application
object.
60 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability
Refer to component-specific documentation and Appendix D on
for more information about IPv6 and any specific considerations for deploying
IPv6 in your situation. Refer to the Framework Configuration Options
Reference Manual for more information about this option.
End of procedure
Mixed IPv4 and IPv6 Environments
You can configure IPv6 and IPv4 in the same environment, as described in
Appendix D. In this mixed environment, you can configure connections with servers that support IPv4, IPv6, and both. For connections with servers that support both IPv4 and IPv6, you can specify which version you prefer to use.
For example, if you are setting up a connection to a DB Server that supports both IP4 and IPv6, you can choose to use IPv4 or IPv6 for that connection.
There is no universal rule that determines what version should be used, so the choice is up to you.
To configure this choice, use the Transport parameter ip-version
on the
Advanced
tab of the
Connection Info
dialog box for the connection:
ip-version
Default Value:
4,6
Valid Values:
4,6
and
6,4
Specifies the order in which IPv4 (
4
) and IPv6 (
6
) are used for the connection with a server that has a mixed IPv4/IPv6 configuration. This parameter has no effect if the environment variable
GCTI_CONN_IPV6_ON or the option enable-ipv6
is set to
0
.
This option also has no affect on connections to Configuration Server that are established before the option value can be read from the Configuration
Database.
The same option can also be set in the transport
section of the Host’s
Annex
to set the IP version used on the connection between Solution Control Server and
LCA. Otherwise, Management Framework components do not support this option. Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for more information about setting this option in the host.
Table 2 summarizes how this parameter or option affects the connection for
which it is configured.
Table 2: IP Version Selected by ip-version Parameter/Option
Connecting Server
Supports only IPv4
ip-version=4,6
IPv4 is used
ip-version=6,4
IPv4 is used
Deployment Guide 61
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability
Table 2: IP Version Selected by ip-version Parameter/Option
Connecting Server
Supports both IPv4 and IPv6
Supports only IPv6
ip-version=4,6
IPv4 is used
IPv6 is used
ip-version=6,4
IPv6 is used
IPv6 is used
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend or support IPv6-only environments.
Communication Session Failures
In a distributed interaction management solution, components must communicate continuously with each other and with some external resources.
A communication session with a required resource can fail for any of these reasons:
•
Failure of the resource itself
•
Problem with the hardware where the resource is located
•
Network connectivity problem between the two points
•
Forced termination of the connection that has not shown any activity for a specified amount of time
Any time a solution component cannot communicate with a required resource, the solution may not be able to perform its required function.
After a failure is detected, the fault correction procedure normally consists of repeated attempts to regain access to either the resource in question or to a redundant resource, if one is available.
Each underlying communication protocol is typically equipped with functions that monitor open communication sessions. When a failure is detected, the communication software signals an abnormal condition to the interacting processes. This detection mechanism is fully supported in the Genesys solutions, whose connection layer translates system messages into appropriate events on the application level.
However, communication protocols do not always provide adequate detection times. The TCP/IP stack, for example, may take several minutes to report a failure associated with a hardware problem (such as when a computer goes down or a cable is disconnected). This delay presents a serious challenge to the availability of any interaction management solution.
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol
All but a few Genesys interfaces use the TCP/IP stack. To compensate for the manner in which this stack operates, Genesys components use the Advanced
Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP), which periodically polls the opposite process when no actual activity occurs at a given connection. If a configurable
62 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability timeout expires without a response from the opposite process, the connection is considered lost and an appropriate event is sent to the application.
Genesys recommends enabling ADDP on the links between any pair of
Genesys components. ADDP helps detect a connection failure on both the client and the server side. For most connections, enabling detection on the client side only is sufficient and it reduces network traffic. However, Genesys strongly recommends that you use detection on both sides for all connections between Configuration Server and its clients (including Solution Control
Interface), as well as between any two T-Servers.
To enable ADDP between two applications, specify addp
as the
Connection
Protocol
when configuring the connection between applications; also, set values for the
Local Timeout, Remote Timeout,
and
Trace Mode
properties. For more information, refer to Framework Configuration Manager Help.
For complete instructions on configuring ADDP between two applications,
refer to Appendix B on page 293
. For instructions on configuring ADDP between the primary and backup T-Servers, refer to the Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server.
After a communication session failure is detected, the application makes repeated attempts to regain access to the required resource. If a redundant process is not configured, the reaction is a repeated attempt to restore the communication session with the same process. If a redundant process is configured, the application makes alternate attempts to restore the failed communication session and to establish a session with the redundant process.
This way, if the session has terminated because of a failure of the opposite process, the application eventually connects to the standby process configured to provide the same type of service.
Note:
Beginning with release 7.5, backwards compatibility of the Keep-Alive
Protocol (KPL) is no longer supported. If you used KPL in previous versions of Genesys, consider using ADDP instead.
Configuration History Log
The Configuration History Log consists of a set of a records that contains historical information about client sessions and changes to configuration objects. It enables a client to restore a session that was terminated by a service interruption, and request any changes to configuration objects that occurred during that service interruption.
For all Configuration Servers except Configuration Server Proxies, the records are stored in the Configuration Database. For Configuration Server Proxy, the records are stored in a separate database referred to as the History Log
Database.
The History Log is installed with default parameters when you install
Configuration Server or Configuration Server Proxy. You configure the
Deployment Guide 63
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability
Maintenance
Errors
Minimizing
Performance
Impacts
History Log parameters in the options of the Configuration Server
Application object in Genesys Administrator or Configuration Manager. Refer to the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for detailed descriptions of the configuration options that relate to the History Log.
When requested by a client that is recovering from a service interruption,
Configuration Server or Configuration Server Proxy does the following:
•
Restores the client’s session according to a client session record.
•
Returns all data that has been changed since that client disconnected.
History Log functionality is mandatory, and cannot be turned off permanently.
No maintenance is required for the History Log, because it is maintained automatically by Configuration Server or Configuration Server Proxy. At startup, Configuration Server Proxy checks whether there is a pre-existing
History Log database with the same name as that defined in the configuration file. If it does not find a match, it creates a new one. If it does find a match,
Configuration Server Proxy backs up that file, appending the
.bak
file extension. This is not required for other Configuration Servers, because the history log records are stored in the Configuration Database and are maintained with the configuration records. Based on the expiration parameters,
Configuration Server and Configuration Server Proxy purges information from the database, both at startup and during normal operations.
Any errors that occur when writing to the History Log generate Log Event
21-22138.If persistent or fatal errors occur as a result of a corrupt History Log
Database on Configuration Server Proxy, remove the corrupt file and, optionally, replace it with the backup file created during Configuration Server
Proxy startup. Then, restart Configuration Server Proxy.
Note:
Genesys strongly recommends that you associate an alarm with this
Log Event, and that you inform Genesys Technical Support if you encounter any errors or corruption.
.
Depending partially on the size of the updates, the History Log can affect the performance of Configuration Server. To minimize these performance impacts, you can turn off the History Log functionality temporarily by setting the active
option to false
for the Configuration Server
Application
object. The functionality will be turned back on either when you manually reset the option
(to true
), or when you restart Configuration Server.
Warning!
When History Log functionality is turned off, current activities are not recorded. Therefore, clients that are disconnected during this time cannot retrieve the updates necessary to restore their sessions.
64 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability
To minimize the performance impacts on Configuration Server Proxy, you can also:
•
Save the History Log in memory instead of on the hard drive, by setting the all
option to
:memory: for the Configuration Server Proxy
Application object.
•
Limit the ensured integrity of the internal history database to only in cases of Configuration Server Proxy failure. Default History Log operation on
Configuration Server Proxy ensures the integrity of the internal History
Log Database if both Configuration Server Proxy and the operating system fail. However, this is CPU-intensive. Instead, you can limit the scope of this protection to failure of Configuration Server Proxy only by setting the failsafe-store-processing
option to false.
If the operating system fails, the History Log Database may not be wholly preserved. However, this operation has less impact on system performance.
Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for more information about the configuration options used to configure the configuration history log.
Software Exceptions
A software exception is an interruption in the normal flow of a program caused by an internal defect. An operating system generates exceptions in response to illegal operations that a software program attempts to perform. After generating an exception, the operating system terminates the process, which may make unavailable all solutions that use the functionality of this component.
Genesys provides an exception-handling function that monitors the exceptions the operating system generates. The function attempts to prevent application termination by skipping the program block from which the exception originated. In most cases, this action amounts to losing one processing step with respect to a single interaction in favor of preventing an application failure.
Although the function attempts to prevent application termination, it still reports the exception with the highest priority marking. This ensures that operators know about the exception and can take appropriate measures.
You can configure the number of times during which the function tries to prevent an application from failing if it continues to generate the same exception. If this threshold is exceeded, the exception-handling function abandons the recovery procedure, allowing the operating system to terminate the application. This termination can then be detected and corrected by external fault-management functions.
By default, the exception-handling function is enabled in any daemon application; six exceptions occurring in 10 seconds will not cause an application to terminate. To change these parameters or disable the exception handling, use a corresponding command-line parameter when starting an application.
Deployment Guide 65
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Solution Availability
Application Failures
A complete application failure may be a result of either an internal defect (for example, an infinite loop) or an external event (for example, a power failure).
It may manifest as either a process nonresponse or termination. Typically, if a solution component stops working, the solution is no longer available to process customer interactions.
Because the application that fails cannot perform any functions, you must use an external mechanism for both detection and correction of faults of this type.
In Framework, the Management Layer is this mechanism.
For information about the architecture and components in the Management
Layer, see the Framework Management Layer User’s Guide.
Database Failures
Starting in release 8.0, any DB Server can detect a connection failure with the corresponding database and attempt to reconnect. To detect the failure, DB
Server clients monitor the responses they receive from the DBMS. If a response is not received within the interval specified by the configuration option db-request-timeout
, the client process stops executing. This is understood by DB Server as a failure of the DBMS, and it tries to reconnect.
The option db-request-timeout
is configured in the DB Server
Application object via the
Query Timeout
field for Database Access Point (DAP)
Application
objects for the database. The timeout set in the DAP overrides the timeout set in DB Server, but applies only to client processes that connect to the database through this DAP.
Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for more information about using the option db-request-timeout
to implement this feature.
Failure of an Oracle 11g RAC Database
The Oracle 11g Real Application Cluster (RAC) DBMS includes a client-side feature called Transparent Application Failover (TAF). If an instance of a database fails, TAF automatically reconnects to a surviving database instance
(node).
However, TAF only restores the connection; it is the responsibility of the application to restart on the new node any operations that were in process on the failed node. These operations could be any of the following:
•
Individual Data Manipulation Language (DML) statements, such as
INSERT
,
UPDATE
, and
DELETE
.
•
Active transaction involving DML statements, issuing
ROLLBACK instructions to these transactions first.
•
Active binding packages.
66 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Security Considerations
To support Oracle 11g RAC in TAF mode, Configuration Server can optionally resubmit DML statements (DML transactions or binding package execution) when the appropriate error messages are received from the DBMS.
This is implemented using the configuration option dml-retry.
Refer to the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for the full description of this option.
Remote Site Failures
Starting in release 8.0, each Solution Control Server in a Distributed Solution
Controls Server environment can detect the failure of a remote site controlled by another Solution Control Server. Refer to the Framework Management
Layer User’s Guide for more information.
Common Log Options
Local Control Agent supports the unified set of log options (common log
options) to allow precise configuration of log output. For a complete list of unified log options and their descriptions, see the “Common Log Options” chapter of the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
Security Considerations
This section outlines some of the security capabilities provided in
Configuration Layer for your data, both from access by unauthorized users and during its transfer between components.
For more information about these and other security features, and for full implementation instructions, refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide.
Access to Hosts File at Start-up
By default, Genesys components try to read from the hosts
file at startup to enable them to resolve host names. If an organization has a security policy against this, they can configure the environment variable
GCTI_DNS_USE_HOSTSFILE=0 to disable this access.
User Authentication
User authentication refers to ensuring that the user is actually who he or she claims to be. In Genesys software, this is implemented by the Configuration
Server. The data that a Genesys solution requires for operating in a particular environment, as well as the applications and the solutions, is represented as
Configuration Database objects. Any person who needs access to this data or these applications must have an account in this database.
Deployment Guide 67
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Security Considerations
Logging In
At startup, every Genesys GUI application opens a
Login
dialog box for users to supply a
User Name
and
Password,
which are used for authentication. The authentication procedure succeeds only if a
User
with the specified
User Name and
Password
is registered in the Configuration Database. Otherwise, the working session is stopped.
Last Logged In
Starting in release 8.0, you can configure Configuration Server so that some
Genesys GUI applications display the date and time of the previous login for the currently logged-in user. Each user can then detect if someone else had accessed the system using their credentials.
Forced Re-Login for Inactivity
You can configure some Genesys GUIs, including Configuration Manager,
Solution Control Interface, and Wizard Manager, to automatically force a logged-in user to log in again if he or she has not interacted with any element of the interface for a set period of time. In some interfaces, open windows are also minimized, and are restored only when the user logs back in.
This functionality is configured in each interface, and is therefore specific to that interface. By default, this functionality is not active, and must be activated on an instance-by-instance basis for those GUI applications that are to use the feature.
Note:
The inactivity feature survives reconnection timeouts. In other words, if the interface application becomes disconnected from Configuration
Server after the forced re-login timeout has expired but before the user has logged in again, the user must still log in before he or she can access the system.
User Authorization
User authorization refers to ensuring that an authenticated user is entitled to access the system, either all or parts thereof, and defines what the user can do to or with the data that they can access.
The security mechanism implemented in Configuration Server allows the system administrator to define, for each valid user account, a level of access to sets of objects. The access privileges of valid user accounts define what the user can and cannot do within the corresponding set of objects.
Starting in release 8.0, an additional layer of security is available through
Genesys Administrator, called Role-Based Access Control. This enables the
68 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Security Considerations system administrator (or a designated individual) to define access to objects based on what is to be done (viewed, modified, deleted) to the objects.
This section provides an overview of the various mechanisms in place to ensure data is accessed by only authorized users. For detailed information about how Genesys software implements user authorization, refer to the
Genesys Security Deployment Guide.
Access Permissions
The level of access to sets of objects granted by the system administrator is defined by a combination of elementary permissions. Each user must be assigned at least one permission; without it, the user has no access to any data.
Access control for daemon applications is different from that for GUI applications. Access permissions for GUI applications are determined by the profile of the person who is currently logged in.
Access Groups
Access Groups are groups of Users who need to have the same set of permissions for Configuration Database objects. By adding individuals to
Access Groups—and then setting permissions for those groups—access control is greatly simplified.
Genesys provides preconfigured default Access Groups. You can also create your own Access Groups to customize your own security environment.
Master Account and Super Administrators
The Configuration Database contains a predefined User object, otherwise known as the Master Account or Default User. The Default User, named default
and with a password of password,
is not associated with any Access
Group. The Master Account always exists in the system and has a full set of permissions with respect to all objects in the Configuration Database. You must use this account when you log in to the Configuration Layer for the first time since the Configuration Database initialization. Genesys recommends changing the default name and password of the Master Account, storing them securely, and using this account only for emergency purposes or whenever it is specifically required.
Changing Default Permissions
The default permissions that the Configuration Layer sets provide users with a broad range of access privileges. You can always change those default settings to match the access needs of a particular contact center environment.
Deployment Guide 69
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Security Considerations
Note:
Genesys does not recommend changing the default access control setting unless absolutely necessary. Remember, the more complex the security system is, the more difficult it becomes to manage the data and the more it affects the performance of the Configuration Layer software.
Genesys provides two mechanisms to help you manage changes to your permissions—propagation and recursion. Refer to the Genesys Security
Deployment Guide for details about these mechanisms and how to use them.
New Users
Starting with release 7.6, Configuration Server does not assign a new user to an
Access Group when the user is created. In effect, the new user has no privileges, and cannot log in to any interface or use a daemon application. The new user must be explicitly added to appropriate Access Groups by an
Administrator or by existing users with access rights to modify the user’s account. Refer to Framework Configuration Manager Help for more information about adding a user to an Access Group.
By default, this behavior applies to all new users added by Configuration
Server release 7.6 or later. Users created before release 7.6 keep their existing set of permissions and Access Group assignments. If you want new users to be added automatically to pre-defined Access Groups, as was the behavior prior to release 7.6, you must manually disable this feature by using the
Configuration Server configuration option no-default-access.
For more information about this feature, including how it works and how to modify it, refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide.
Login Security Banner
Starting in release 7.6, you can create your own security banner to be displayed to a user logging in to Configuration Manager, Solution Control Interface, or any Framework Wizard. You define the content of the banner, typically the terms of use of the application. Users must accept the terms to proceed, or they can reject the terms to close the application without access.
The user-defined security banner is specified during the installation of each instance of a GUI application, such as Configuration Manager and Solution
Control Interface, and during the installation of any Framework Wizard.
Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for more details about the security banner.
70 Framework 8.1
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Security Considerations
Genesys Security Using the TLS Protocol
Starting with release 7.5, Genesys supports the optional use of the Transport
Layer Security (TLS) protocol to secure data transfer between its components.
TLS is supported on Windows and UNIX platforms.
To enable secure data transfer between Genesys components that support this functionality, you must configure additional parameters in the
Host
objects and
Application
objects that represent these components. Certificates and corresponding private keys are generated using standard Public Key
Infrastructure (PKI) tools, such as OpenSSL and Windows Certification services.
For detailed information about Genesys Security Using the TLS Protocol, refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide.
Multiple Ports
To provide flexibility in configuring a system with the Genesys Security using the TLS Protocol feature, you can configure multiple ports on a given server with either secure or unsecured connections. You specify the additional ports in the
Server Info
of the server’s
Application
object.
Each port can have one of the following listening modes:
•
unsecured
—The port is not secured by TLS. This is the default status of a port.
•
secured
—The port is secured by TLS.
•
auto-detect
—This status applies only to ports on the Configuration
Server, and is used only when configuring secure connections to the
Configuration Server. If an application that is trying to connect to an auto-detect
port has security settings specified in its configuration,
Configuration Server checks the validity of those settings. Depending on the results, the client will be connected in secure or unsecured mode.
Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide and Framework
Configuration Manager Help for more information about multiple ports.
Multiple Ports on Configuration Server
When you install Configuration Server, the listening port that you specify during installation is stored in the configuration file as the port
option. When
Configuration Server first starts with an initialized database, it reads the port option in the configuration file. The value of the
port
option is also propagated to the Configuration Database, where it is stored as part of the Configuration
Server
Application
object. As additional ports are configured, they are also stored in the Configuration Database as part of the Configuration Server
Application
object. On subsequent startups of Configuration Server— that is, on all startups after the first—Configuration Server reads the port information
Deployment Guide 71
Chapter 3: Planning the Installation Security Considerations from the Configuration Server
Application
object, ignoring the port
option in the configuration file.
If necessary, you can specify an additional unsecured listening port in the
Configuration Server command line during subsequent startups. This additional port is not written to the Configuration Server
Application
object, and does not survive a restart of Configuration Server. Use this option only when regular ports cannot be opened. See
-cfglib_port
information about this option.
Secure Connections
In addition to configuring secure ports on your server applications, you must configure your client applications, both server and user interface types, to connect to these ports. Use Genesys Administrator or Configuration Manager to configure these connections.
There are only two exceptions to this standard procedure, as follows:
•
Configuring secure connections to the Configuration Server—You must configure a Configuration Server port as an auto-detect
port.
•
Configuring a secure connection between DB Server and Configuration
Server—You must configure the secure connection in the configuration files of the two components.
Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for detailed instructions for configuring secure connections.
European Data Protection Directive Disclaimer
The Genesys suite of products is designed to make up part of a fully functioning contact center solution, which may include certain non-Genesys components and customer systems. Genesys products are intended to provide customers with reasonable flexibility in designing their own contact center solutions. As such, it is possible for a customer to use the Genesys suite of products in a manner that complies with the European Data Protection
Directive (EDPD). However, the Genesys products are merely tools to be used by the customer and cannot ensure or enforce compliance with the EDPD. It is solely the customer’s responsibility to ensure that any use of the Genesys suite of products complies with the EDPD. Genesys recommends that the customer take steps to ensure compliance with the EDPD as well as any other applicable local security requirements.
72 Framework 8.1
Chapter
4
Deployment Overview
This chapter lists the prerequisites for installing the Genesys Framework, and prescribes the deployment order. This chapter also describes the Genesys
Installation Wizard and the Genesys Configuration Wizards, and how to access them.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Deployment Using Genesys Administrator, page 78
Prerequisites
Before you deploy Framework, investigate aspects of its size, security, availability and performance, as applied to the specific environment of your
contact center. See Chapter 3 on page 39
for recommendations on these issues.
Ensure that applications that require licenses are licensed properly (see the
Genesys Licensing Guide).
Review the prerequisites for your Framework installation as described in this section. For prerequisites for Genesys Administrator, refer to the Framework
Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide.
Databases
Genesys recommends that you or your database administrator create database(s) in your database management system (DBMS) before you start
Genesys installation. For the Framework installation, you must create two databases:
•
Configuration Database—Mandatory for any Genesys installation.
Deployment Guide 73
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Prerequisites
•
Centralized Log Database—Required only if you are using the
Management Layer’s centralized-logging function.
Genesys also recommends that you or your database administrator back up your Genesys database(s) on a regular basis.
Refer to “Network Locations for Framework Components” on page 46
for recommendations on database sizing. Refer to your DBMS documentation for instructions on how to create a new database.
If your system will be configured in a multi-language environment, or at least be required to handle data encoded in UTF-8 format, you may have to take special steps when creating your database, depending on the DBMS you will
be using, as listed in Table 3
.
Warning!
Databases not listed in the table are not supported for multi-language environments.
Table 3: Creating Databases for Multi-language Environments
DBMS
MS SQL 2008
Requirements or Special Steps
Requires DB Server 8.1.2 or later.
Oracle 11g or later Create a database instance with the AL32UTF8 character set. For example:
CREATE DATABASE db utf8 CHARACTER SET AL32UTF8
DB2 9.7 or later Create a database instance with the UNICODE format, and with a default page size of 16 KB. For example:
CREATE DATABASE db utf8 USING CODESET UTF-8
TERRITORY US PAGESIZE 16 K
PostgreSQL 9 or later
Create a database instance with the UTF-8 format. For example:
CREATE DATABASE db config ENCODING UTF8
Refer to appendix G on page 341
for the list of database parameters you must use in Genesys installation.
Note:
Consider using the Genesys Database Initialization Wizard when creating database structures for the Configuration Database and
Centralized Log Database during the Framework deployment process.
74 Framework 8.1
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Prerequisites
Hardware and Network Environment
Genesys recommends that you or your IT specialist assign host computers to
Genesys software before you start Genesys installation. Keep in mind the following restrictions:
•
Do not install all the Genesys server applications on the same host computer.
•
When installing a few server applications on the same host computer, prevent them (except for Configuration Server and Configuration Server
Proxy) from using the swap area.
Refer to “Network Locations for Framework Components” on page 46
for recommendations on server locations.
Refer to the Genesys Supported Operating Environment Reference Guide for the list of operating systems and database systems supported in Genesys releases 7.x. Refer to the Genesys Supported Media Interfaces Reference
Manual for the list of supported switch and PBX versions. For the location of
both of these documents, refer to “Related Documentation Resources” on page 351
.
For UNIX operating systems, also review the list of patches Genesys uses for software product builds and upgrade your patch configuration if necessary. A description of patch configuration is linked to installation read_me.html
files for the Genesys applications that operate on UNIX.
Internet Browsers
To view all elements of the Configuration Manager interface, you need
Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later.
To view all elements of Genesys Administrator, you need any combination of
Internet Explorer 6.x or 7.x and Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or 3.0. Refer to the
Framework Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide for information about requirements for the Genesys Administrator web server.
Licensing
Before configuring and installing Framework components, note that Genesys applications require licenses. Genesys recommends that you configure and install License Manager and license files at this point. For information about which products require what types of licenses and on the installation procedure for License Manager, refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide document available on the Genesys Documentation Library DVD.
If you are planning to deploy redundant configurations for any Genesys servers, you must have a special high-availability (HA) license. Otherwise, the
Management Layer does not perform a switchover between the primary and backup servers.
Deployment Guide 75
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Deployment Sequence
Deployment Sequence
The various Framework components are distributed on a number of product
CDs. This document covers the deployment of Framework components shipped on the following CDs:
•
Management Framework
•
Media
•
HA Proxy
•
Real-Time Metrics Engine
The Framework deployment process involves the configuration and installation of one or more components of the same type within each architecture layer, as outlined here.
1. Configuration Layer:
DB Server (providing access to the Configuration Database)
Configuration Database
Configuration Server
Configuration Manager
Configuration Server Proxy (optional)
Wizard Manager (optional; no configuration is required)
Database Initialization Wizard (optional; no configuration is required)
Configuration Import Wizard (optional; no configuration is required)
2. User Interaction Layer:
Genesys Administrator
Note:
Genesys Administrator can be installed at any time, so long as the the Configuration Layer is installed. Placing Genesys
Administrator at this point in the sequence is only a suggestion.
3. Management Layer:
DB Server (as a client of Configuration Server, providing access to the
Centralized Log Database and other databases)
Message Server
Centralized Log Database
Local Control Agent (required for each computer running Genesys server applications or monitored third-party server applications)
Solution Control Server (SCS)
Solution Control Interface (SCI)
Genesys SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) required to support Microsoft Operational Manager (MOM) technology and optional to support Master Agent or a third-party AgentX protocol-compliant SNMP master agent
76 Framework 8.1
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Deployment Sequence
4. Media Layer:
T-Server
HA Proxy for a specific type of T-Server (if applicable)
Note:
Configuration and installation instructions for T-Servers apply to
Network T-Servers as well. You can find detailed deployment information about T-Server and HA Proxy in the latest version of
the Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific
T-Server.
5. Services Layer
DB Server
Stat Server
Use the sample worksheet in appendix 21, “Installation Worksheet” on page 341
as you prepare for and perform the Framework installation.
Note:
Although Interaction Server, SMCP (Simple Media Control Protocol)
T-Server, and Services Layer components are all parts of the
Framework architecture, configuring them directly depends on their usage in a Genesys solution. Therefore, you must install them during deployment of a specific solution.
In addition to installed Framework components, the following resources must be registered as Configuration Database objects (or configuration objects) at the time of the Framework deployment:
•
Hosts
•
Switching Offices
•
Switches
•
Agent Logins
•
DNs
•
Access Groups
•
Skills
•
Persons
•
Agent Groups
•
Places
•
Place Groups
Note:
You will find detailed information about configuring telephony objects in the latest version of the Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific server.
Deployment Guide 77
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Deployment Using Genesys Administrator
The configuration and installation procedures depend on whether you employ
Wizard Manager for configuration. Whichever method you choose, you must first install and configure components of the Configuration Layer, as described
You can choose the manual installation procedure or use the Deployment Tool introduced in release 8.0 to install Configuration and Management Layer components.
Warning!
Never add, delete, or modify any data in the Configuration
Database except through applications developed by Genesys or those instrumented with Genesys Configuration Server API. If you have compelling reasons for accessing the database directly, consult Genesys Technical Support before you do so.
Deployment Using Genesys Administrator
Genesys Administrator contains deployment functionality to help users deploy
Genesys applications and solutions to any host in their network. This functionality replaces Framework Management Deployment Manager.
The deployment functionality in Genesys Administrator copies all of the necessary software components to the target host, and installs them. If a corresponding object does not already exist on that host, Genesys
Administrator creates a new one during the installation.
For information about using Genesys Administrator to deploy Management
Layer components, see “Deploying the Management Layer Using Genesys
.
For information about using Genesys Administrator to deploy other Genesys applications and solutions, refer to the on-line Framework Genesys
Administrator Help file and your product-specific documentation.
Genesys Wizards
You can deploy Genesys Framework in one of two ways, but both use Genesys wizards. You can manually install Framework with help from the Genesys
Installation Wizard, or you can use the Genesys Configuration Wizards to help you install it.
This section describes the Genesys Installation Wizard and the Genesys
Configuration Wizards, and how to access them.
78 Framework 8.1
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Genesys Wizards
Genesys Installation Wizard
The Genesys Installation Wizard is the standard interface for manually installing all components on Windows platforms, with the exception of
Genesys Configuration Wizards. When you install a component from the appropriate setup.exe
file, the Installation Wizard is automatically invoked to guide you through the process.
Warning!
If you are using Genesys Configuration Wizards to deploy a component, do not use the Genesys Installation Wizard.
Genesys Installation Wizard uses a standard design for installation pages and provides a consistent look across all installations for Genesys products.
Names of all components start with the word Genesys in both
Add or Remove
Programs
and Windows
Services
windows; also, the Genesys logo appears next to components names in these windows. In the Windows
Registry
, Services names are nicknames.
Uninstalling Genesys Components
There are no uninstall shortcuts in the
Start > Programs
menu; instead, uninstall components from the standard Windows
Add or Remove Programs window.
Genesys Configuration Wizards
Genesys product CDs that contain installation packages for a set of Genesys components also contain Configuration Wizards that facilitate component deployment. Genesys Configuration Wizards help users set up Genesys products, including the configuration of solutions, applications, and options required to provide desired functionality.
From a security standpoint, Configuration Server treats Configuration Wizards as regular graphical user interface (GUI) applications. When Configuration
Wizards are invoked from a GUI application, the account that you used to log in to that application controls your actions in the wizards. Since the wizards are designed to change configuration, rather than to review existing configuration, you must have modification-level permissions (create, change, delete) with respect to the configuration objects that need to be created or configured through the wizards.
Wizard Manager
The primary application that invokes Configuration Wizards for Genesys
Framework and Genesys solutions is Wizard Manager. This application is designed solely for deployment and upgrade tasks. Wizard Manager launches
Deployment Guide 79
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Genesys Wizards
Configuration Wizards in the order required for the requested task. Some
Genesys GUI applications can also invoke wizards designed to facilitate elementary configuration tasks. For example, the wizards invoked from
Solution Control Interface (SCI) allow a user to define a new alarm condition or modify the logging process of a specific application. All applications from which you can launch Configuration Wizards are clients of Configuration
Server. Therefore, the computers on which such applications are installed must have network connectivity with the computer on which Configuration Server runs.
Wizard Manager does not operate on UNIX, only on Windows. However, you must use this tool to configure the Framework components, regardless of whether the components are run on UNIX or Windows.
To install all the wizards that are on a particular CD, run the setup.exe
program located in the root directory of the CD. This also installs the Wizard
Manager. Only one instance of Wizard Manager is installed on your computer, even though you install wizards from multiple applications. You can access all installed Configuration Wizards from this single instance of Wizard Manager.
To install Wizard Manager and the Management Framework Configuration
Wizard, run setup.exe
from the root directory of the Management Framework
CD. Wizards that you invoke from other Genesys graphical user interface
(GUI) applications are installed during the installation of those applications.
Warning!
When you install wizards on a given computer, close all Genesys
GUI applications that run on it.
Configuration Wizard Tasks
Genesys Configuration Wizards do not physically install applications on computers, but they do accomplish two tasks:
1. Prepare the configuration data for the Genesys environment and store the prepared data in the Configuration Database.
2. Customize the installation package to the environment, so that the installation script does not ask for parameters you have already submitted during the configuration process. To achieve this, wizards record all required data into an INI file, which becomes a part of the customized installation. This data is then used during the actual setup process to correctly install the application on a desired computer.
Warning!
It is your responsibility to provide wizards with correct
directories for installations. See “Specifying Directories for
for recommendations.
Configuration Wizards configure both Windows and UNIX applications, and prepare installation packages for these operating systems. After a wizard
80 Framework 8.1
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Genesys Wizards creates a customized installation package, the user has to run setup manually on a computer designated for a particular application.
Specifying Directories for Installations
After you have entered all required data about an application, the wizard prompts you to insert the CD where the installation package can be found and to specify a location to which the wizard should copy the customized installation. Keep in mind that when you are specifying:
1. The CD drive where the product CD is inserted, type or select only the first letter of the CD drive as opposed to the full path to the product installation on the CD.
2. A destination location to copy the installation package for an application installation on another computer than the computer running the wizard, specify a disk location accessible from a remote computer.
General
Recommendations for UNIX
Using FTP Servers
Running on UNIX
Copying Installations to Remote Computers
Often an application should be installed on another computer than the computer running the wizard. If this is the case, specify a temporary folder on the wizard’s host computer as the destination location and then copy the customized installation package from this folder to a temporary directory on the host computer for the application.
When the application’s future host computer is a UNIX box, follow the recommendations in this section for copying the customized installation packages from the wizard’s Windows computer to the target UNIX computer.
When copying to a UNIX box, note the following:
•
Use a sharing application, such as
Samba,
to make disks on computers running UNIX visible from computers running Windows.
•
Use an ftp server.
To use an FTP Server running on UNIX:
1. Using the command prompt, locate the folder on the Windows-based computer to which the wizard copied the customized installation package.
2. Run the ftp client on Windows.
Type the ftp
command, followed by the actual host name of the
UNIX-based computer in the command prompt: ftp <server_host_name>
3. Define the
BIN
mode of transfer.
Type the following command in the command prompt: bin
4. Define the folder on the remote UNIX-based computer to which the package is to be copied.
Deployment Guide 81
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Genesys Wizards
Using FTP Servers
Running on
Windows
Type the cd
command followed by the actual folder name in the command prompt: cd <folder_name>
5. To avoid a request for transfer confirmation for each file in the package, turn off the Interactive mode.
Type the following command in the command prompt: prompt
6. Transfer the files.
Type the following command in the command prompt: mput *
After the customized installation package is transferred, manually run the setup. The instructions for installing Framework components begin on
To use an FTP Server running on Windows:
1. Locate the folder on the UNIX-based computer to which the package is to be copied.
2. Run the ftp client on UNIX. Type the ftp
command followed by the actual host name of the Windows-based computer in the command prompt: ftp <server_host_name>
3. Define BIN mode of transfer.
Type the following command in the command prompt: bin
4. Define the folder on the remote Windows-based computer from which the package is to be copied.
Type the cd
command, followed by the actual folder name in the command prompt: cd <folder_name>
5. To avoid a request for transfer confirmation for each file in the package, turn off Interactive mode.
Type the following command in the command prompt: prompt
6. Transfer the files.
Type the following command in the command prompt: mget *
After the customized installation package is transferred, manually run the setup. The instructions for installing Framework components begin on
Application State Disabled
An application prepared by wizards but not yet physically installed is marked as disabled in Configuration Manager. Disabled means that the application has been created and configured as an object in the Configuration Layer, that its
82 Framework 8.1
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Genesys Wizards installation package has been customized and copied over to a location on the wizard’s host computer, but that the application has not been physically set up on the computer on which it is to run. When a user runs the actual setup using the customized installation package, the corresponding
Application
object in the Configuration Layer is automatically enabled.
Preparing Installations for Redundant Applications
Warning!
When configuring redundant applications, do not select the redundancy type
Not Specified
unless using a switchover mechanism other than that provided by the Management Layer. It is acceptable, however, to leave the redundancy type
Not Specified for nonredundant applications (that is, applications that do not have backup servers associated with them).
When you choose to install redundant applications, two possibilities exist. If the host computers on which redundant applications are to run have operating systems of the same type, the wizard copies one installation package, which can be used to install both primary and backup applications. If the host computers have operating systems of different types, the wizard prepares a separate installation package for each application in the redundant pair.
Installing and Starting Configuration Wizards
Notes:
• Do not use Configuration Wizards on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
5 (64-bit), HP-UX 11i v3 Integrity (Itanium), and Windows Server
2008 (64-bit) operating systems.
• If you are going to use the Configuration Wizards, install them from every product CD before you deploy the Genesys components from those CDs.
• Genesys recommends that you install wizards on the same host computer on which Configuration Manager is installed.
To configure Genesys components through Configuration Wizards, install the wizards directly from your Genesys product CD. This will also install the
Wizard Manager, or add the new wizards to an already existing Wizard
Manager. Wizard Manager operates only on Windows.
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
To install Management Framework wizards:
1. In the root directory of either the Management Framework, double-click setup.exe
to start the installation.
Deployment Guide 83
Chapter 4: Deployment Overview Genesys Wizards
2. Specify the destination directory in which you want to install the wizards.
3. Specify the
Program Folder
to which you want to add the wizards.
When the setup program is finished, Wizard Manager is ready to run.
Note:
Before starting Wizard Manager, make sure that the Configuration
Layer components are installed, configured, and running. (See
.)
Now start Wizard Manager from the Windows
Start > Programs
menu. Click log into the Configuration Layer,
and specify the necessary parameters in the
Login
dialog box as described in “Login Procedure” on page 317
. Provide the same application name as if you were logging in to Configuration Manager.
Using Wizard Manager on Windows
Wizard Manager guides you through the deployment process for Genesys components, and the configuration process for Configuration Database objects.
When you start Wizard Manager, the Framework page opens. The left panel in
Wizard Manager contains links to the configuration wizards for specific solutions. Before you deploy any solutions with Wizard Manager, click
Framework
in the left panel to run the Management Framework Configuration
Manager, and configure the Framework as follows:
1. Configure the Management Layer.
2. Create Tenants, if you are setting up a multi-tenant environment.
3. Create Switch objects and deploy the T-Servers associated with them.
4. Configure the Switch objects— DNs and Places.
5. Create other required Framework configuration objects, such as Agent
Logins, Agents, and Place Groups.
After this configuration process is complete, the Framework instance is configured and registered in the Configuration Database. You can now use
Wizard Manager to deploy any solution by using the appropriate Configuration
Wizard.
84 Framework 8.1
Chapter
5
Setting Up the
Configuration Layer
This chapter describes how to set up the Framework Configuration Layer, which is a mandatory part of any Genesys installation and the first step of the
Framework deployment. Before deploying other Framework components manually, follow the steps described in the following topics:
Configuring DB Server, page 91
Starting Configuration DB Server, page 93
Installing Configuration Server, page 94
Initializing the Configuration Database, page 99
Configuring Configuration Server, page 103
Encrypting the Configuration Database Password, page 106
Starting Configuration Server, page 106
Installing an Interface to Deploy Your System, page 107
Starting the Interface, page 109
Changing Configuration Server Port Assignments, page 110
Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer, page 114
Before you install Framework components:
•
Consult “Network Locations for Framework Components” on page 46 for
recommendations on the network locations of these components.
•
Create a new database following the instructions in your DBMS documentation.
Deployment Guide 85
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Task Summary
Warning!
During installation on UNIX, all files are copied into a user-specified directory. The installation creates no subdirectories within this directory, so be careful not to install different products into the same directory.
Task Summary
The following table summarizes the steps for setting up the Configuration
Layer.
Task Summary: Setting Up the Configuration Layer
Task
1. Set up the Configuration
DB Server.
2. Install Configuration
Server.
Related Procedure and Information
NOTE: If you will be operating in a multi-language environment, and you are using MS SQL 2008 or later for your Configuration Database, you must use DB Server 8.1.2 or later.
1. To install DB Server, use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Installing Configuration
.
To install on Windows, use the procedure “Installing
Configuration DB Server on Windows” on page 90
.
2. To configure DB Server, see “Configuring DB Server” on page 91 .
3. Start DB Server, using the procedure “Starting Configuration DB
.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Installing Configuration
Server in Master mode on UNIX” on page 95 .
• To install on Windows, use the procedure “Installing Configuration
Server in Master mode on Windows” on page 97
.
3. Initialize the Configuration
Database.
See “Initializing the Configuration Database” on page 99 .
4. Configure Configuration
Server.
See “Configuring Configuration Server” on page 103
.
If you will be operating in a multi-language environment, also see
“Configuring Configuration Server for Multi-language Environment
. This step can be completed at any time after
Configuration Server is installed but before Configuration Server is started for the first time.
86 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing DB Server
Task Summary: Setting Up the Configuration Layer (Continued)
Task Related Procedure and Information
5. (Optional) Encrypt the password for the
Configuration Database.
Note: This task can be carried out now or at a later time, as required.
See “Encrypting the Configuration Database Password” on page 106
.
6. Start Configuration Server. Use the procedure “Starting Configuration Server” on page 106 .
7. Setup and start an interface to deploy the rest of your system.
You can use Genesys Administrator, Configuration Manager or both.
You must install at least one GUI at this stage.
To setup and start Genesys Administrator, use the procedures in the
Framework Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide.
To setup and start Configuration Manager, use the following procedures:
1. “Installing Configuration Manager on Windows” on page 108
2. “Starting Configuration Manager” on page 109
8. Change the listening port of
Configuration Server in the
Configuration Database.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Changing the Configuration Server listening port using
Genesys Administrator” on page 110
• “Changing the Configuration Server listening port using
Configuration Manager” on page 111 .
9. Create Hosts for each computer in your network.
10.(Optional) Enable the
Management Layer to control the Configuration
Layer.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Creating a Host object using Genesys Administrator” on page 112
• “Creating a Host object in Configuration Manager” on page 113
.
See “Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer” on page 114
.
Installing DB Server
Note:
If you will be using this DB Server in a multi-language environment, and you are using MS SQL 2008 or later for your
Configuration Database, you must use DB Server 8.1.2.
This section describes the installation of the DB Server that serves the
Configuration Layer. This DB Server provides Configuration Server with
Deployment Guide 87
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing DB Server access to the Configuration Database, and is often referred to as the
Configuration DB Server. Consequently, this DB Server must start before any other component does, meaning that you must configure it through a local configuration file.
Although DB Server is installed before Configuration Server, decide on the host and port for Configuration Server prior to DB Server installation.
Warning!
Do not use the DB Server that provides access to the Configuration
Database for access to any other database.
Procedure:
Installing Configuration DB Server on UNIX
Purpose: To install the DB Server that will provide access to the
Configuration Database.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate services_layer/dbserver/<operating_system>
directory, locate a shell script called install.sh.
2. Run this script from the command prompt by typing sh
and the file name.
For example: sh install.sh.
Then, press
Enter.
3. To specify the hostname
for this DB Server, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the current host.
4. Type y
to specify that this DB Server will be dedicated to providing access to the Configuration Database, and press
Enter.
Warning!
Do not use the DB Server that provides access to the
Configuration Database for access to any other database.
5. Specify the full path of the destination directory, and press
Enter.
6. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to which you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
88 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing DB Server
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then, type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
7. Do one of the following:
•
Type y
to configure DB Server (during installation), and press
Enter.
Go to
Step 8 to specify values for the configuration file. For
information about the DB Server configuration options and their values, refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference
Manual.
•
Type n
to not configure DB Server (during installation), and press
Enter.
In this case, you have finished installing DB Server—do not continue to the next step in this procedure. Before you can start
DB Server, however, you must create a configuration file and set the
configuration options in it. That procedure is described in “Configuring
.
8. Enter the Configuration Server hostname
, and press
Enter.
9. Enter the Configuration Server network port,
and press
Enter.
10. To specify the hostname
for this DB Server, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the default, which is the host selected in Step 3
.
11. (Optional) The default port of DB Server is 4040. To specify a different network port for this DB Server, do one of the following:
•
Type the number of the network port, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the default port (
4040
).
12. To specify the management network port for this DB Server, do one of the following:
•
Type the number of the management port, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the default port (
4041
).
The installation extracts the files from the package and displays the names of the database client processes for different types of SQL servers.
13. Type the number corresponding to the database type
and the database client bit-type
(if applicable), and press
Enter.
If you do not know the bit-type, you can configure it later using the appropriate
<DBMS type>_name
configuration option. Refer to the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for more information about these options.
When the installation process is finished, a message indicates that installation was successful. The process places DB Server in the directory specified during the installation process. The installation script also writes a sample configuration file, dbserver.conf.sample, in the directory in which DB Server is installed.
Deployment Guide 89
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing DB Server
If you chose to configure DB Server during installation, a copy of the sample configuration file, dbserver.conf.sample,
is created and saved as dbserver.conf,
and the parameters specified in
are written to this file.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
If you chose to configure DB Server after installation, you must manually rename the sample file as dbserver.conf
, and modify the configuration
values, refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
Procedure:
Installing Configuration DB Server on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Purpose: To install the DB Server that will provide access to the Configuration
Database.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the services_layer/dbserver/windows
directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
2. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
3. On the
Welcome
page, click
Next
to start the installation.
4. On the
DB Server Run Mode
page, select
DB Server as an independent server
to install DB Server so it runs independently of Configuration
Server so that it provides access to the Configuration Database. Click
Next.
5. On the
Database Engine Option
page, select the appropriate database engine, and then click
Next
.
6. On the
DB Server Parameters
page, specify the DB Server Host,
DB Server Port, and
Management Port,
and then click
Next
.
7. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the
Host name and
Port of Configuration Server,
and then click
Next
.
90 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Configuring DB Server
Even if DB Server will be running independent of Configuration Server, these parameters are required to start DB Server via the Management
Layer.
8. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory, as specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object. If the path configured as
Working Directory
is invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory
in the
Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in
Working Directory.
Click
Next
to proceed.
9. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
Installation Status
displays the installation progress.
10. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Framework.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
For information about the DB Server configuration file, see the following
section, “Configuring DB Server”
. For information about DB Server configuration options and their values, refer to the Framework Configuration
Options Reference Manual.
Configuring DB Server
DB Server can run either as an independent server or as a client of
Configuration Server. The DB Server dedicated to the Configuration Database must run as an independent server and reads its configuration settings from a local configuration file. Any DB Server used for handling data other than configuration data must run as a client of Configuration Server and reads its configuration settings from the Configuration Database.
Deployment Guide 91
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Configuring DB Server
DB Server Configuration File
The configuration file contains the DB Server, Log, and Local Control Agent
(LCA) sections. It can also contain additional DB Server sections for any additional ports.
The name of the DB Server section is dbserver
. This section contains configuration information about DB Server, including settings and the type of
DBMS with which DB Server operates.
The dbserver
section contains configuration options for one port. If there is more than one port configured for DB Server, configuration options for the additional ports is contained in additional DB Server sections called dbserver-n,
where n
is a nonzero consecutive integer. Each dbserver-n
section contains the configuration options for one port.
The name of the Log section is log.
This section contains configuration information about the log.
The name of the LCA section is lca
. If configured, this section contains an option that enables the Management Layer to control the DB Server dedicated to the Configuration Database.
You can find a sample DB Server configuration file in the Framework
Configuration Options Reference Manual.
Configuring DB Server on UNIX
Procedure:
Configuring Configuration DB Server on UNIX
Purpose: To configure the DB Server providing access to the Configuration
Database.
Prerequisites
•
You manually installed DB Server on UNIX, as described in the procedure
“Installing Configuration DB Server on UNIX” on page 88
.
•
You chose not to configure DB Server during the installation process (that is, you entered n
in
Start of procedure
1. From the directory in which DB Server is installed, open the sample configuration file ( dbserver.conf.sample
) in a text editor.
2. Set the configuration options to work with the Configuration Database.
Consult the relevant chapters in the Framework Configuration Options
Reference Manual for option descriptions and values. See “DB Server
92 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Starting Configuration DB Server
Configuration File” on page 92
for a description of the DB Server configuration file.
3. Save the sample configuration file as dbserver.conf.
End of procedure
Configuring DB Server Logging
If you plan to use the centralized logging and auditing functionality of the
Management Layer, be sure to specify appropriate log options in the
DB Server configuration file before you start using DB Server. Most importantly, enable the network log output (for example, create a new option in the log
section called standard
and set its value to network
). See the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for more information.
Starting Configuration DB Server
Although DB Server is started before Configuration Server, you must specify the host
and port
parameters of Configuration Server in the command line for
DB Server to start. Specify cfg_dbserver
as a value for the
-app
command-line parameter (the DB Server application name).
Notes:
If you will be using this DB Server in a multi-language environment and you are using Oracle 11g or later, you must insert the set variable
NLS_LANG
, with the character set of
UTF8
, in your environment. For example:
NLS_LANG=AMERICAN.AMERICA.UTF8
or at least:
NLS_LANG=.UTF8
Note:
For information about starting DB Server as a client of Configuration
Server, see Chapter 7, “Starting and Stopping Framework
. That chapter also provides a complete description of the command-line parameters used for startup.
Procedure:
Starting Configuration DB Server
Prerequisites
•
DB Server is installed.
Deployment Guide 93
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing Configuration Server
•
The DB Server configuration file is configured. DB Server uses this file for startup.
Start of procedure
1. To start DB Server on UNIX, go to the directory in which DB Server is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: multiserver -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app cfg_dbserver
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start DB Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the Windows
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which DB Server is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which DB Server is installed, and type the following command line: multiserver.exe -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app <DB Server Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
•
Use Windows Service Manager. Refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
for more information.
End of procedure
Installing Configuration Server
If you want Configuration Server to operate with the Configuration Database, you must install Configuration Server in Master mode. This Configuration
Server must be configured through a local configuration file.
Notes:
The procedures given in this section are for installing a primary
Configuration Server. To install a Proxy Configuration Server, refer to
“Setting Up Configuration Server Proxy” on page 263
for relevant installation instructions. To install a backup Configuration Server, refer
to “Redundant Configuration Servers” on page 203 .
94 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing Configuration Server
Refer to the Framework External Authentication Reference Manual for information about Configuration Server’s External Authentication feature and for relevant installation instructions.
Deployment Guide
Procedure:
Installing Configuration Server in Master mode on
UNIX
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, locate and open the installation directory appropriate for your environment:
•
For an enterprise (single-tenant) environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/single/<operating_system>
•
For a multi-tenant environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/multi/<operating_system>
The installation script, called install.sh,
is located in the appropriate directory.
2. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
3. For the installation type, type
1
to select
Configuration Server Master
Primary, and press
Enter.
4. For the external authentication option, type the number corresponding to the type of external authentication that will be used (LDAP, Radius, both, or neither), and press
Enter.
Tip: If you select LDAP, be prepared with the URL to access the LDAP
Server. For more information about LDAP configuration, see the
Framework External Authentication Reference Manual.
5. Specify the full path of the destination directory, and press
Enter.
6. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to where you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as the files are copied to the destination directory.
95
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing Configuration Server
7. For the product version to install, do one of the following:
•
Type
32
to select the 32-bit version, and press
Enter.
•
Type
64
to select the 64-bit version, and press
Enter.
8. To configure the Configuration Server during, or after, installation, do one of the following:
•
Type y to configure Configuration Server during installation ( now
), and press
Enter.
Go to
Step 9 to specify values for the configuration file.
For information about the Configuration Server configuration options and their values, refer to the Framework Configuration Options
Reference Manual.
•
Type n to not configure Configuration Server during installation. In this case, you have finished installing Configuration Server—do not continue to the next step in this procedure. Before you can start
Configuration Server, however, you must create a configuration file
and set the configuration options in it. Go to “Configuring
Configuration Server” on page 103 .
9. For the
[confserv]
section:
a. Specify a value for the Configuration Server port,
and press
Enter.
b. Specify a value for the Configuration Server management port, and press
Enter.
10. For the
[soap]
section, do one of the following:
•
Specify a value for the SOAP port,
and press
Enter.
•
If you are not using SOAP functionality, press
Enter
to leave this field blank.
11. For the
[dbserver]
section:
a. Specify the name of the DB Server host
, and press
Enter.
b. Specify a value for the DB Server port, and press
Enter.
c. Type the number corresponding to the database engine that this
Configuration Server uses ( dbengine
), and press
Enter.
d. Specify the name or alias of the DBMS that handles Configuration
Database ( dbserver
), and press
Enter.
e. To specify the name of the Configuration Database ( dbname
), do one of the following:
•
If you are using an Oracle database engine (that is, you typed 3 in
Enter.
This value is not required for Oracle.
•
If you are using any other database engine, specify the name of the
Configuration Database, and press
Enter.
f. Specify the Configuration Database username,
and press
Enter.
g. To specify the Configuration Database password,
do one of the following:
•
Specify the password, and press
Enter.
96 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing Configuration Server
•
Press
Enter
if there is no password; that is, the password is empty, with no spaces.
When the installation process is finished, a message indicates that installation was successful. The process places Configuration Server in the directory specified during the installation process. The installation script also writes a sample configuration file, confserv.sample, in the directory in which
Configuration Server is installed.
If you chose to configure the Configuration Server during installation, the sample configuration file, confserv.sample
, is renamed confserv.conf, and
the parameters specified in Steps 9 through 11 are written to this file.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
If you chose to configure the Configuration Server after installation, you must manually rename the sample file as confserv.conf
and modify the configuration options before you start Configuration Server. See
“Configuring Configuration Server” on page 103
.
Procedure:
Installing Configuration Server in Master mode on
Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, locate and open the installation directory appropriate for your environment:
•
For an enterprise (single-tenant) environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/single/windows
•
For a multi-tenant environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/multi/windows
2. Locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
3. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
4. On the
Welcome
page, click
Next
.
5. On the
Configuration Server Run Mode page, select
Configuration Server
Master Primary.
Deployment Guide 97
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing Configuration Server
6. On the
Configuration Server Parameters
page:
a. Specify the
Server Port
and
Management Port
for Configuration Server.
b. Click
Next.
7. On the
Database Engine Option
page, select the database engine that the
Configuration Server uses, and click
Next.
8. On the
DB Server Parameters
page:
a. Specify the
DB Server Host
name and
DB Server Port.
b. Specify the Database
Server Name
and
Database Name.
c. Specify the Database
User Name
and
Password.
9. On the
Configuration Server External Authentication
page, select the type of external authentication that the Configuration Server uses, or select
None
if Configuration Server is not using external authentication.
10. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object. If the path configured as
Working Directory
is invalid, the wizard generates a path to
C:\Program Files\GCTI\
<Singletenant or Multitenant> Configuration Server
.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory
in the
Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in
Working Directory.
Click
Next
to proceed.
11. On the
Ready to Install
information page, click one of the following:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
12. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Framework.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
For more information about the Configuration Server configuration file, see
“Configuring Configuration Server” on page 103
. For information about
Configuration Server configuration options and their values, refer to the relevant chapters in the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
98 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Initializing the Configuration Database
Procedure:
Populating History Change Adapter tables
Note:
HCA tables are applicable only if you are using Genesys Info Mart 7.2 or earlier. Users of Genesys Info Mart 7.5 or later do not require HCA.
Purpose: To populate HCA tables with Virtual Agent Group information immediately after database migration.
Prerequisites
•
You have Genesys Info Mart 7.2 or earlier installed in your environment.
•
You have activated the History of Changes Adapter functionality in
Configuration Server.
•
You have created Virtual Agent Groups in Configuration Server.
Start of procedure
1. Stop the Primary Configuration Server.
2. Start Configuration Server using these command line options:
-hca -s mm/dd/yyyy where mm/dd/yyyy
is the creation date that you are setting for the records in the HCA tables. The format is month/day/year.
Starting Configuration Server with these command line options will refresh data about existing configuration objects in HCA tables and add data about
Virtual Agent Groups. It will not affect historic data already stored in HCA tables. See the Genesys Info Mart Deployment Guide for your version of
Genesys Info Mart.
3. After the HCA tables are populated and Configuration Server has exited
(automatically), restart Configuration Server in normal operational mode.
End of procedure
Initializing the Configuration Database
After you created a database in your DBMS (see “Prerequisites” on page 73
), you can populate the tables of the Configuration Database manually (using your DBMS tools) or using the Database Initialization Wizard.
Deployment Guide 99
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Initializing the Configuration Database
DBMS Adjustment
If you install DB Server and Configuration Database separately, you must install and configure an SQL Server client for your database type. Please refer to the Framework DB Server User's Guide for recommendations on environment settings for your database client.
Procedure:
Initializing the Configuration Database
Warning!
Configuration Server treats its information and checks integrity constraints in a case-sensitive manner. Therefore, your SQL database must be installed and configured in case-sensitive mode.
Refer to your SQL Server Administrator documentation for additional information.
Start of procedure
1. In the directory in which Configuration Server is installed, open the sql_scripts
folder.
2. Open the folder that matches your database type.
3. Load and execute the initialization script that corresponds to your DBMS.
Table 4 lists the DBMS and their corresponding initialization script names
for an enterprise or multi-tenant environment.
Tip: Genesys recommends using the DB2 Command-Line Processor to
.
Table 4: Configuration Database Initialization Scripts
DBMS Enterprise Script
Name
DB2
Informix init_single_db2.sql
init_single_ifx.sql
Microsoft SQL init_single_mssql.sql
Multi-Tenant Script
Name
init_multi_db2.sql
init_multi_ifx.sql
init_multi_mssql.sql
Multi-language Script Name
(see Note)
init_multi_multilang_db2.sql
Not supported
Enterprise: init_single_multilang_mssql.sql
Multi-tenant: init_multi_multilang_mssql.sql
Oracle init_single_ora.sql
init_multi_ora.sql
init_multi_multilang_ora.sql
PostgreSQL init_single_postgre.sql
init_multi_postgre.sql
init_multi_multilang_postgre.sql
100 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Initializing the Configuration Database
Table 4: Configuration Database Initialization Scripts (Continued)
DBMS Enterprise Script
Name
init_single_syb.sql
Multi-Tenant Script
Name
init_multi_syb.sql
Multi-language Script Name
(see Note)
Not supported Sybase
Note: Use the multi-language scripts if you are setting up Configuration Server in multi-language mode.
The scripts for DB2, Oracle, and PostgreSQL can be used for both enterprise and multi-tenant multi-language environments.
4. Load and execute the script that loads the CfgLocale table into the initialized database, depending on your database type.
Table 5 lists DBMS and their corresponding localization data script names
for an enterprise or multi-tenant environment.
Tip: Genesys recommends using the DB2 Command-Line Processor to
Note:
If you are using this database in a multi-language environment, you must use the English (ENU) version of the CfgLocale script.
Table 5: Configuration Database CfgLocale Scripts
DB2
Informix
Microsoft SQL
Oracle
PostgreSQL
Sybase
DBMS Script Name
CfgLocale_db2.sql
CfgLocale_ifx.sql
CfgLocale_mssql.sql
CfgLocale_ora.sql
CfgLocale_postgre.sql
CfgLocale_syb.sql
Warning!
Never add, delete, or modify any data in the Configuration
Database except through applications developed by Genesys, or through applications instrumented with the Genesys Configuration
Server application programming interface (API). If you have compelling reasons for accessing the database directly, consult
Genesys Technical Support before you do so.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 101
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Initializing the Configuration Database
Procedure:
Running Genesys SQL scripts using the DB2
Command-Line Processor
Start of procedure
1. Start the Command-Line Processor.
2. Type quit
at the DB2 prompt to exit the
DB2.exe
process.
3. Specify the database connection parameters by typing the following command line, substituting values in brackets with the actual values: db2 connect to <database name> user <user> using <password>
4. Execute the script by typing the following command line, substituting the value in brackets with the actual value: db2 -f <script name including full path>
For example, to execute the initialization script for the enterprise version of the Configuration Database, type (all on one line): db2 -f
C:\GCTI\ConfigurationServer\sql_scripts\db2\init_single_db2.sql
End of procedure
About the Initialized Configuration Database
The Configuration Database contains the following predefined objects, which allow initial access to the database through Configuration Manager:
•
A
User
object with user name
set to default,
and password
set to password
.
Use this Master Account to log in to the Configuration Layer for the first time. A user logged on through this Master Account has all possible privileges with respect to objects in the Configuration Database.
The Master Account is not alterable in any way, and you should not use it to perform regular contact center administrative tasks. Rather, it exists as a guarantee that, no matter what happens to the regular accounts, you will always be able to access the Configuration Database.
Genesys recommends changing the default user name and password of the
Master Account during the first session, securing these login parameters, and using the Master Account for emergency purposes only. For regular operations, create a real working account and add it to the access group
Super Administrators. (By default, this Access Group has the same privileges as the Master Account.) Use this real working account for any subsequent sessions.
102 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Configuring Configuration Server
Note:
For instructions on creating new configuration objects, and working with existing configuration objects, refer to Framework
Configuration Manager Help or Framework Genesys
Administrator Help
.
•
An application template object for Configuration Manager.
•
An application template object for Configuration Server.
•
A Configuration Manager
Application
object with the name set to default
.
When you run Configuration Manager for the first time, you must specify this name in the
Application
property under
Details
in the
Login
dialog box. Consider changing the name of this application during the first session.
•
A Configuration Server
Application
object with the name set to confserv
.
•
The default Access Groups objects: Users, Administrators, and Super
Administrators. For more information, refer to “Security Considerations” on page 67
.
•
Folders for all types of objects managed by the Configuration Layer.
•
An Installation Configuration Utility
Application
object with the name set to
ITCUtility
. This utility supports configuration updates during installation processes for Genesys components. No additional configuration is needed.
The Configuration Database also contains a number of other predefined objects (for example, Alarm Conditions) that help you set up some Genesys functionality as you deploy other Framework and solution components.
Configuring Configuration Server
Configuration Server Configuration File
At a minimum, the configuration file contains the Configuration Server,
Configuration Database, Log, and History of Changes Adapter sections, and possibly an additional section called SOAP.
The Configuration Server section contains the configuration options that define
Configuration Server. The name of the section corresponds to the name of the
Configuration Server
Application
object. For the initial installation of
Configuration Server, it is called confserv
by default. You can choose to rename this Configuration Server later. In all other cases, or if you rename the initial Configuration Server, the name of this section will be different. The server
configuration option in this section specifies the name of the
Configuration Database section.
Deployment Guide 103
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Configuring Configuration Server
By default, the Configuration Database section does not have a name. The section name must be the same as the value of the server
configuration option that you specified in the Configuration Server section. The Configuration
Database section contains information about the Configuration Database and about the DB Server used to access this database.
Note:
If you plan to use one or more DB Servers as a backup, you must also configure the same number of Configuration Database sections in the configuration file. The server
configuration option within a given
Configuration Database section must specify the name for the subsequent Configuration Database section.
The name of the Log section is log
. This section contains configuration information about the log.
The name of the History of Changes Adapter (change tracking) section is hca.
This section controls Configuration Server’s change-tracking functionality.
The name of the SOAP section is soap.
This section contains information about the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) port that clients can use to access Configuration Server. If you work with SOAP, you must add a
[soap] section to the Configuration Server configuration file before you start
Configuration Server.
You can find a sample Configuration Server configuration file in the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
Procedure:
Configuring Configuration Server on UNIX
Prerequisites
•
You manually installed Configuration Server on UNIX, as described in
“Installing Configuration Server in Master mode on UNIX” on page 95 .
•
You chose not to configure Configuration Server during the installation process (that is, you entered n
Start of procedure
1. From the directory in which Configuration Server is installed, open the sample configuration file ( confserv.sample
) in a text editor.
2. Set the configuration options to work with the Configuration Database and
DB Server. Consult the relevant chapters in the Framework Configuration
Options Reference Manual for option descriptions and values. See
“Configuring Configuration Server” on page 103
for a description of the
Configuration Server configuration file.
104 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Configuring Configuration Server
3. Save the configuration file as confserv.conf.
End of procedure
Configuring Configuration Server Logging
If you plan to use the centralized logging and auditing functionality of the
Management Layer, specify appropriate log options in the Configuration
Server configuration file before you start using Configuration Server. Most importantly, enable the network log output (for example, create a new option called standard
and set its value to network
). See the Framework
Configuration Options Reference Manual for more information.
Configuring Configuration Server for Multi-language
Environment Support
Warning!
If you want to support multi-language environments, you must enable Configuration Server to handle UTF-8 data in the following time frame:
• After the database has been initialized.
• Before you start Configuration Server for the first time. Trying to enable a Configuration Server for UTF-8 that has already been started at least once will result in a warning message being logged.
To enable Configuration Server to support UTF-8 encoding in multi-language environments, add the following options to the configuration file:
•
In Configuration Server (section confserv
) or Configuration Server Proxy
(section csproxy
):
Set the locale
option to the value corresponding to English (US). The database against which a UTF-8 enabled Configuration Server or
Configuration Server Proxy is launched must be initialized using
English locale scripts.
Set the encoding
option to utf-8
.
Set the multi-languages
option to true
. You must set this option after initializing the database and before you start Configuration Server against the UTF-8 enabled database.
For more information about these options, refer to the Framework 8.1
Configuration Options Reference Manual.
Deployment Guide 105
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Encrypting the Configuration Database Password
Encrypting the Configuration Database
Password
You can use Configuration Server to encrypt your password for accessing the
Configuration Database so that it does not appear in plain text in the
Configuration Server logs. This improves the security of your configuration data.
You can encrypt the password at any time, either during installation, or later.
However, keep in mind that the Configuration Server must be stopped during the encryption process.
For detailed information about encrypting the Configuration Database password, refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide.
Starting Configuration Server
For descriptions of the command-line parameters specific to Configuration
Server, refer to “Configuration Server” on page 178 .
Note:
Use the
-c
command line option to point Configuration Server to a configuration file with the name other than the default name
( confserv.conf
on UNIX or confserv.cfg
on Windows). For example, confserv -c <configuration file name>.
Procedure:
Starting Configuration Server
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Database is initialized.
•
DB Server is installed and running.
•
Configuration Server is installed.
•
The Configuration Server configuration file is configured. Configuration
Server uses this file for startup.
Start of procedure
1. To start Configuration Server on UNIX, go to the directory in which
Configuration Server is installed and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
106 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing an Interface to Deploy Your System
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: confserv [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start Configuration Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which Configuration Server is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which Configuration Server is installed, and type the following command line: confserv.exe [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
•
Use Windows Services Manager. Refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
for more information.
End of procedure
Installing an Interface to Deploy Your
System
You must install Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator before you can deploy the rest of your system. You can use one or both of them, depending on your operating environment. Refer to the Genesys Supported
Operating Environment Reference Guide for more information.
Installing Genesys Administrator
Genesys Administrator is a web-based GUI application that provides the same functionality as Configuration Manager and Solution Control Interface. If you are deploying Management Framework 8.1 or later, you can use Genesys
Administrator in place of both Configuration Manager and Solution Control
Interface.
Refer to the detailed instructions in Framework Genesys Administrator
Deployment Guide to deploy Genesys Administrator in your system.
Installing Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager is a GUI application and operates only on Windows.
Deployment Guide 107
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Installing an Interface to Deploy Your System
Procedure:
Installing Configuration Manager on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Server is installed and running.
•
If you want to implement a security banner with Configuration Manager, make sure that you have the necessary files prepared before you start installing Configuration Manager. Refer to the Genesys Security
Deployment Guide for detailed information about the security banner.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, locate and open the installation directory configuration_layer_interfaces/configmanager/windows
2. Locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation
Wizard.
3. On the
Welcome
page, click
About
to review the read_me
file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
4. On the
Welcome
page, click
Next
to continue with the installation.
5. On the
Security Banner Configuration
page, choose whether you want to configure a security banner for this Configuration Manager application.
Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for detailed information about the security banner. Do one of the following:
•
If you do not want to configure a security banner for this application, clear the
Enable Security Banner
check box, and click
Next.
•
If you want to configure a security banner for this application:
i. Select
Enable Security Banner
.
ii. Follow the instructions in the procedure “Installing and configuring the Security Banner” in the Genesys Security
Deployment Guide. When you are finished that procedure, return here and finish this procedure.
6. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory.
If necessary, click:
•
Browse
to select another destination folder.
•
Default
to reinstate that selection
.
108 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Starting the Interface
Click
Next
to proceed.
7. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
Installation Status
displays the installation progress.
8. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Framework.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys application.
End of procedure
Starting the Interface
The first time you run the interface, either Genesys Administrator or
Configuration Manager, some objects already defined in the Configuration
Database will appear. At a minimum, the following objects will appear:
•
The user name used to log in to Genesys Administrator or Configuration
Manager will be visible under the Persons folder.
•
A default instance of Configuration Manager will appear under the
Applications folder, and the application template used to create this instance will appear under Application Templates.
Starting Genesys Administrator
To start Genesys Administrator, refer to the Framework Genesys
Administrator Deployment Guide.
Starting Configuration Manager
To start Configuration Manager, use the procedure “Starting Configuration
.
Procedure:
Starting Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Server is installed and running.
•
Configuration Manager is installed.
Deployment Guide 109
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Changing Configuration Server Port Assignments
Start of procedure
1. In Windows, do one of the following:
•
In Windows
Start
menu, select
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Framework > Configuration Manager > Start Configuration Manager.
•
Go to the directory in which Configuration Manager is installed and click
Sce.exe.
2. Enter information in the
Login
dialog box as described in Appendix D on page 317
.
End of procedure
Changing Configuration Server Port
Assignments
When you install Configuration Server, you specify values for the listening port and management port, and specify the SOAP port in the configuration file.
Changing these port assignments depends on the type of port. To change the value of the management port or SOAP ports, you must update the configuration file with the revised information, and restart Configuration
Server.
Changing the value of the listening port is more complex. As described in
“Multiple Ports on Configuration Server” on page 71 , Configuration Server
reads its listening port assignment from the configuration file once, at initial start. For subsequent starts, it reads the port value from the Configuration
Database. Therefore, you must change the value in the Configuration Database by modifying the
Port
property of the Configuration Server
Application object.
Procedure:
Changing the Configuration Server listening port using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To change the listening port for a Configuration Server that has been started once.
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
110 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Changing Configuration Server Port Assignments
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, select the
Provisioning
tab, go to
Environment >
Applications
, and double-click the Configuration Server
Application object for which you want to change the listening port.
2. On the
Configuration tab, open the
Server Info section.
3. In the list of
Listening Ports
, do one of the following:
•
Click the port number that you want to change, enter the new port number, and either click outside of the edit box or press
Enter
.
•
Highlight the port that you want to change and click
Edit
. On the
General
tab of the
Port Info dialog box, enter the new port number in the
Port text box. Then click
OK
to close the
Port Info
dialog box.
4. Click
Save
or
Save & Close in the toolbar to save your configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Changing the Configuration Server listening port using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To change the listening port for a Configuration Server that has been started once.
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, go to
Environment > Applications, and double-click the Configuration Server
Application
object for which you want to change the listening port. The
Properties
dialog box for that
Configuration Server
Application
object appears.
2. On the
Server Info
tab, in the
Ports
section, highlight the port number that you want to change and click
Edit Port.
3. On the
Port Info
tab of the
Port Properties
dialog box, enter the new port number in the
Communication Port
text box. If necessary, use the
Browse button beside the text box to identify an available port number or verify that the new port number is available.
4. Click
OK
to close the
Port Properties
dialog box to save the configuration changes.
Deployment Guide 111
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Configuring Hosts
5. Click
OK
to close the Configuration Server
Application
object
Properties dialog box.
End of procedure
Configuring Hosts
Host
objects represent computers in a network. Before you set up the
Management Layer (see Chapter 6 on page 121
), you must configure a
Host object for each computer on the data network on which you are going to run the Genesys daemon processes (usually server applications).
You can create and configure Host objects using Genesys Administrator or
Configuration Manager.
Procedure:
Creating a Host object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Hosts
.
2. Click
New
.
3. On the
Configuration tab:
a. Enter the name of the host, exactly as it is defined in the system configuration.
Warning!
The host
Name
must be exactly the same as the host name defined in the system configuration.
b. Enter the IP address of the host.
c. Select the type of operating system from the
OS Type
drop-down list, and enter its version, if known.
d. Enter the Local Control Agent (LCA) port number, or accept the default (
4999
), to enable the Management Layer to control applications running on this host. This is also the port that applications installed on
this host use to connect to LCA. Refer to “Notes on Configuring the
for additional information about configuring the LCA port value.
112 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Configuring Hosts
4. To customize the Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP) functionality that will be enabled between Solution Control Server (SCS) and LCA, on the
Options tab:
a. In the
View
drop-down list, select
Advanced View (Annex)
.
b. To specify the ADDP timeout between LCA and SCS, add a section addp
, add the option addp-timeout
, and specify a value.
c. To enable LCA polling messages to SCS, in the section addp
, add the option addp-remote-timeout
, and specify a value.
Refer to “Configuring ADDP Between Solution Control Server and
Local Control Agent” on page 126
for more information. For detailed information about the configuration options themselves, refer to the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
5. Click
Save and Close
.
For more information about setting configuration options using Genesys
Administrator, refer to Framework Genesys Administrator Help. For more information about specific configuration options, refer to the Framework
Configuration Options Reference Manual.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Creating a Host object in Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Hosts
folder and select
New > Host
.
2. On the
General
tab:
a. Enter the name of the host, exactly as it is defined in the system configuration.
Warning!
The host
Name
must be exactly the same as the host name defined in the system configuration.
b. Enter the IP address of the host.
c. Select the type of operating system from the
OS Type
drop-down list, and enter its version, if known.
d. Enter the Local Control Agent (LCA) port number, or accept the default (
4999
), to enable the Management Layer to control applications
Deployment Guide 113
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer running on this host. This is also the port that applications installed on
this host use to connect to LCA. Refer to “Notes on Configuring the
for additional information about configuring the LCA port value.
3. To customize the Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP) functionality that will be enabled between Solution Control Server (SCS) and LCA, on the
Annex
tab in the addp
section:
•
To change the ADDP timeout between LCA and SCS, specify the addp-timeout
parameter.
•
To enable LCA polling messages to SCS, specify the addp-remote-timeout
parameter.
Refer to “Configuring ADDP Between Solution Control Server and
Local Control Agent” on page 126
for more information. For detailed information about the configuration options themselves, refer to the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
4. Click
OK.
End of procedure
Enabling Management Layer Control of
Configuration Layer
To enable the Management Layer to control (start, stop, and monitor)
Configuration Server and DB Server, you must modify the respective applications. The procedures in this section describe how to do this.
The following task summary summarizes the steps required to enable
Management Layer control of Configuration Layer.
Task Summary: Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. Modify the Configuration
Server
Application
object.
The Configuration Server
Application
object is preconfigured in the
Configuration Database.
Use one of the following procedures, as applicable:
• “Modifying a Configuration Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 115
• “Modifying a Configuration Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 116
114 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer
Task Summary: Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer
Task Related Procedures and Information
2. Create an
Application object for the
Configuration DB Server
Application
object, if one does not already exist.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Configuring a DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 116
• “Configuring a DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 117
3. In the Configuration DB
Server
Application configuration file, specify the DB Server port through which LCA will communicate with DB
Server.
Specify the lcaport
option in the lca
section of the DB Server configuration file. Refer to the Framework Configuration Options
Reference Manual.
4. Modify the DB Server
Application
object.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Modifying a DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 118
• “Modifying a DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 119
.
Procedure:
Modifying a Configuration Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable Management Layer control of Configuration Server.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Server is installed and running, and its
Application
object is created.
•
A
Host
object exists for the computer on which this Configuration Server
will be running. See “Configuring Hosts” on page 112 .
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and click the Configuration Server
Application
object
(named confserv)
to open its properties.
2. On the
Configuration
tab, open the
Server Info
section.
3. Select the host on which this Configuration Server runs.
Deployment Guide 115
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer
4. Define the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
properties for the primary
Configuration Server, if not already entered.
5. Click
Save and Close to save the changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a Configuration Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable Management Layer control of Configuration Server.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Server is installed and running, and its
Application
object is created.
•
A
Host
object exists for the computer on which this Configuration Server
will be running. See “Configuring Hosts” on page 112 .
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the
Configuration Server
Application
object (named confserv)
.
2. Select the
Server Info
tab.
3. Click
Browse
to select the host on which this Configuration Server runs.
4. On the
Start Info
tab, define the
Working Directory
and
Command Line properties for the primary Configuration Server, if not already entered.
5. Click
OK
to save the changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
A
Host
object exists for the computer on which this Configuration DB
Server will be running. See “Configuring Hosts” on page 112
.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
116 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and click
New
.
2. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
a. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box. If you later want
Management Layer to control this DB Server, use the name cfg_dbserver
.
b. Select the appropriate template, as follows:
i. Click the search icon in the
Application Template
field to open a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a
DB Server template file is not listed, close the dialog box and either import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
file from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD or use the procedure
“Creating a new application template using Genesys
to create a new template, and repeat this step.
ii. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file.
iii. Click
OK
.
3. In the
Server Info
section:
a. Select the
Host
object on which this DB Server runs.
b. Specify the
Listening Port
that DB Server clients must use to connect to this DB Server.
c. Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command line arguments
text box blank.
d. Enter appropriate values for the other mandatory fields (those indicated by red asterisks).
e. Select
Auto-Restart
, if required.
4. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
A
Host
object exists for the computer on which this Configuration DB
Server will be running. See “Configuring Hosts” on page 112
.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Deployment Guide 117
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a DB Server template file is not listed, either import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
file from the
to create a new template, and repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new DB Server
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box. If you later want Management Layer to control this DB Server, use the name cfg_dbserver.
4. On the
Server Info
tab:
•
Specify the
Host
object on which this DB Server runs.
•
Specify the port that DB Server clients must use to connect to
DB Server.
•
Leave the rest of the fields at their default values.
5. On the
Start Info
tab, type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank.
6. On the
Start Info
tab, select
Auto-Restart
if required.
7. Click
OK
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable Management Layer to control DB Server.
Prerequisites
•
DB Server is installed and running, and its
Application
object (called cfg_dbserver
) exists.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
118 Framework 8.1
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Next Steps
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and double-click the DB Server
Application
object cfg_dbserver
to open its properties.
2. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration tab, enter the appropriate information in the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
text boxes. For information about command-line parameters, see
3. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable Management Layer to control DB Server.
Prerequisites
•
DB Server is installed and running, and its
Application
object (called cfg_dbserver
) exists.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box for the cfg_dbserver Application
object.
2. On the
Start Info
tab, enter the appropriate information in the
Working
Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line Arguments
text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
3. Click
OK
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Next Steps
After you have successfully installed and configured the Configuration Layer components as described in this chapter, consider whether you would like to do the following:
•
Configure a user inactivity timeout to disable logged-in users after a period of inactivity. Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide.
Deployment Guide 119
Chapter 5: Setting Up the Configuration Layer Next Steps
•
Configure redundant DB Servers or Configuration Servers. Refer to
•
Configure one or more Configuration Server Proxies. Refer to Chapter 10 on page 259 .
Continuing the Installation of Your System
If you plan to use Genesys Administrator but have not already installed it, you can do so now, following the instructions in the Framework Genesys
Administrator Deployment Guide. Then, you can deploy the Management
Layer, as described in Chapter 6 on page 121
.
120 Framework 8.1
Chapter
6
Setting Up the
Management Layer
This chapter describes how to configure and install components of the
Management Layer.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Deploying Local Control Agent, page 122
Deploying the Management Layer Using Genesys Administrator, page 127
Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager, page 128
Manually Deploying the Management Layer, page 134
Installing Solution Control Server Utilities Separately, page 168
Overview
The Management Layer controls the startup and status of solutions, logging of maintenance events, generation and processing of alarms, and management of application failures.
To enable the Management Layer’s solution-control and fault-management capabilities, you must install Local Control Agent (LCA) on each host running a Genesys server application.
Note:
An application started by LCA inherits the environment variables from
LCA. Therefore, when an application (such as DB Server) requires that particular environment variables be set, the same environment variables must be set for the account that runs LCA.
Deployment Guide 121
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying Local Control Agent
To enable the Management Layer’s centralized-logging and alarm-signaling capabilities, you must configure a connection to Message Server for each
Genesys server application.
You can deploy Management Layer in one of three ways:
•
Use Genesys Administrator, as described in “Deploying the Management
Layer Using Genesys Administrator” on page 127
.
•
Use Wizard Manager, as described in “Deploying the Management Layer
Using Wizard Manager” on page 128 . Wizard Manager assists you in
deploying all the required Management Layer components in the proper order.
•
Manually, as described in “Manually Deploying the Management Layer” on page 134 .
Note:
The Local Control Agent can only be installed manually.
Deploying Local Control Agent
To enable the Management Layer to control the startup and status of applications and solutions, and manage application failures, you must install an instance of Local Control Agent on every computer that is to run either
Genesys server applications or third-party server applications you want to control with Management Layer.
Installing LCA also installs and activates a remote deployment agent, called
the Genesys Deployment Agent, on that computer. See “Deployment Using
Genesys Administrator” on page 78 for more information.
Warning!
When setting up the Genesys Deployment Agent, set up the
Service under an account with administrative privileges. This will ensure that it is able to properly deploy applications on its Host.
Notes on Configuring the LCA Port
1. The LCA port must be set to a value of
2000
or greater. When the LCA port is specified within the range of
1-1999
, LCA starts on port number
4999
(default value).
2. If the LCA port value is changed in the Host configuration while Solution
Control Server (SCS) is connected to LCA, SCS does not disconnect from and reconnect to LCA; instead, the new LCA port value takes effect after
LCA restarts.
122 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying Local Control Agent
3. If you change the LCA port value for the LCA installed as a Windows
Service, you must also change the LCA port number in the LCA startup parameters in the Registry Editor. The LCA Registry Key is located at:
(HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\ lca_service\ImagePath).
The value must have the following format:
“<full path>\lca.exe” <LCA port number> -service <lca_service_name>
Change the LCA port number to the current value.
Specifying the Genesys Deployment Agent Port
When you install LCA, the Installation Wizard configures the port used by the
Genesys Deployment Agent as follows:
•
On UNIX, you are prompted to provide a port number, in the same way
that you are prompted for other parameters during installation. See Step 10 on page 124 .
•
On Windows, the port number
5000
is automatically assigned.
If the port number was already specified during a previous installation of LCA on this host, it is not prompted for again or changed during LCA installation.
You can change this value at any time. Refer to Framework Genesys
Administrator Deployment Guide for more information about remote deployment using Genesys Administrator, including instructions for changing the port number.
Installing Local Control Agent
This section describes how to install LCA on UNIX or on Windows.
Note:
All running LCA processes must be stopped before installing another
LCA.
Procedure:
Manually Installing Local Control Agent on UNIX
Start of procedure
1. Stop all LCA processes that are running. If there are any LCA processes that are running when you begin the installation, the installation process will stop, and not restart until you have stopped those processes (see
Deployment Guide 123
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying Local Control Agent
2. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer/lca/<operating_system>
directory, locate a shell script called install.sh.
3. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
4. Type
Enter
. This action will have one of the two following results.
•
If there are any LCA processes still running, you will exit from the installation and have to stop these processes before you can restart it.
•
Otherwise, you will continue with the installation.
5. To specify the hostname for this LCA, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the current host.
6. Enter the Configuration Server host name, and press
Enter.
7. Enter the Configuration Server network port, and press
Enter.
8. Enter the Configuration Server user name, and press
Enter.
9. Enter the Configuration Server password, and press
Enter.
10. To specify the destination directory, do one of the following:
•
Press
Enter
to accept the default.
•
Enter the full path of the directory, and press
Enter
.
11. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to which you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as the files are copied to the destination directory.
12. For the product version to install, do one of the following:
•
Type
32
to select the 32-bit version, and press
Enter.
•
Type
64
to select the 64-bit version, and press
Enter.
13. If prompted, enter the number of the port used by the Genesys Deployment
Agent, and press
Enter.
Note:
This prompt appears only if the port for the Genesys Deployment
Agent is not already configured
124 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying Local Control Agent
14. If you are authorized to modify startup (RC) files, you are prompted to add
LCA to the startup files. Do one of the following:
•
Press
Enter
to add LCA to the startup files.
•
Type n
to leave LCA out of the startup files, and press
Enter.
Note:
On UNIX systems, LCA 8.1.0 and earlier is installed with the autostart capability created automatically for run level 3. If you are using another run level, you must modify your operating system startup scripts by adding the startup of LCA.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually Installing Local Control Agent on Windows
Start of procedure
1. Stop all LCA processes that are running.
2. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer\lca\windows directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
3. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
4. Click
Next
to start the installation.
5. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the host name, port, user name, and password for
Configuration Server, and then click
Next.
6. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the default folder
C:\Program Files\GCTI\Local Control Agent.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder.
•
Default
button to reinstate the default folder,
C:\Program
Files\GCTI\Local Control Agent.
7. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
8. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Management Layer.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
Deployment Guide 125
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying Local Control Agent
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
Notes:
• Because the Management Layer functionality requires LCA to be always running while its host computer is up, LCA is installed as a Windows Service with the autostart capability.
• In addition, if the port used by the Genesys Deployment Agent was not previously configured, it is set to
5000
automatically.
See “Specifying the Genesys Deployment Agent Port” on page 123 .
End of procedure
LCA Log Options
If you do not specify any log options for LCA, the default values apply. To specify log options for LCA, create the lca.cfg
configuration file and locate it in the same directory as the LCA executable. The LCA configuration file must have the following format:
[log]
< log option name
> = < log option value
>
< log option name
> = < log option value
>
...
A sample LCA configuration file is available in the Framework Configuration
Options Reference Manual.
Configuring ADDP Between Solution Control Server and
Local Control Agent
Advanced Disconnection Detection Protocol (ADDP) is enabled automatically between Solution Control Server (SCS) and Local Control Agent (LCA). By default, SCS generates polling messages to LCA. If SCS does not receive messages from LCA within this interval, SCS sends a polling message. A lack of response to the polling message from LCA within the same time period is interpreted as a loss of connection.
If you want to change the ADDP timeout between SCS and LCA, configure the addp-timeout
option. If you also want to enable LCA polling messages to
SCS, configure the addp-remote-timeout
option. Both of these options are set in the
Annex
of the
Host
object configured for the computer on which LCA runs. For detailed instructions on specifying these options, refer to the
procedures “Creating a Host object using Genesys Administrator” on page 112
or “Creating a Host object in Configuration Manager” on page 113
, or to the
Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
126 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying the Management Layer Using Genesys Administrator
To avoid false disconnect states that might occur because of delays in the data network, Genesys recommends setting the ADDP timeouts to values equal to or greater than ten seconds.
Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for detailed descriptions of these options.
Deploying the Management Layer Using
Genesys Administrator
You can deploy the Management Layer to any host on your network using the
Deployment Wizard in Genesys Administrator. Genesys Administrator copies all of the necessary software components to the host, and installs them. For each component to be installed, Genesys Administrator uses a corresponding
Application
object of the specified name, or if one does not exist, creates a new object. You can then configure the object as required.
Note:
To use the Deployment Wizard, you must deploy LCA to all target hosts, which also installs the Genesys Deployment Agent on those hosts. You then must start the Genesys Deployment Agent on each of those hosts.
Procedure:
Deploying Management Layer components using
Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To install Log DB Server, Message Server, Solution Control Server, and Genesys SNMP Master Agent on specified hosts in the network, using existing corresponding
Application
objects or creating new ones as required.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer must be installed and running.
•
Each destination location must have a
Host
object configured in the
Configuration Database.
•
The latest LCA Installation Package (IP) and Genesys Deployment Agent must be deployed and running on the target host. This installs the Genesys
Deployment Agent at that location. See “Specifying the Genesys
Deployment Agent Port” on page 123 .
•
The IPs to be installed must be located on an Installation CD or in a shareable folder in your network.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Deployment Guide 127
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager
Start of procedure
1. Go to
Deployment
>
Repository
>
Installation Packages
.
2. Do one of the following, as appropriate:
•
If the IP has been imported into an IP Repository, navigate to that repository, using the
Repository
drop-down list if necessary.
•
Otherwise, import the component IP into an IP Repository, following the detailed instructions in Framework.Genesys Administrator Help.
Note:
If you are deploying more than one component, you can continue with this procedure in one of the following ways:
•
Proceed to the next step and complete the procedure for this component, and then return and repeat both steps for each component.
•
Repeat this step for all components and then proceed to the next step, repeating it for all components.
3. Install the IP on the specified Host. Refer to Framework Genesys
Administrator Help for detailed instructions.
End of procedure
Next Steps
Complete the configuration of the deployed components. In addition to what was configured during deployment, you must also, for example, do the following:
•
In your DBMS, create a database which will serve as the Log Database.
•
Configure at least one Database Access Point for the Log Database.
•
Initialize the Log Database.
•
Configure connections between components, and between components and the Log Database, as required.
Review the section “Manually Deploying the Management Layer” on page 134
to ensure that you have completed all necessary configuration and initialization tasks for each deployed component
Deploying the Management Layer Using
Wizard Manager
You can deploy the Management Layer using Wizard Manager. Wizard
Manager helps you deploy all the required Management Layer components in the proper order.
128 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager
Wizard Manager does not operate on UNIX, only on Windows. However, you can use this tool to configure the Framework components, regardless of whether the components are run on UNIX or Windows.
Deploying Management Layer Components on Windows
When you deploy Management Layer components on Windows, Wizard
Manager configures and installs the necessary components. The components are set up and ready to run.
Deploying Management Layer Components on UNIX
When you deploy Management Layer components on UNIX, Wizard Manager configures the components but does not physically install them. Instead,
Wizard Manager prepares a customized installation package for each component. You must copy the appropriate package to the host computer for each component, and then manually install each component on its host computer using the customized installation package.
This section describes how to install Management Layer components on
UNIX.
Procedure:
Wizard Manager—Installing Log DB Server on UNIX
Purpose: To install the Log DB Server corresponding to the
Application object configured in Wizard Manager.
Prerequisites
•
The Log DB Server installation package has been created using Wizard
Manager.
•
The Configuration Layer components are installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. Copy the Log DB Server installation package from the location you specified in Wizard Manager to the host computer for Log DB Server.
2. In the directory to which the DB Server installation package was copied, locate a shell script called install.sh
.
3. Run this script from the command prompt by typing the file name.
4. When prompted, specify the
Host Name
of the computer on which
DB Server is to be installed.
5. Type n
when asked whether this DB Server will provide access to the
Configuration Database.
Deployment Guide 129
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager
6. Specify the destination directory into which DB Server is to be installed, with the full path to it.
7. The installation displays the names of the DB client processes for different types of SQL servers. Type the number of the DB client process name that should be configured.
Note:
Message Server can only write logs to a PostgreSQL DBMS if the corresponding DB Server also supports PostgreSQL.
8. If asked which version of the product to install, either the 32- or the 64-bit, choose the one appropriate to your environment.
As soon as the installation process is finished, a message appears announcing that installation was successful. The process places DB Server in the directory specified during the installation.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Wizard Manager—Installing Message Server on UNIX
Purpose: To install the Message Server corresponding to the
Application object configured in Wizard Manager.
Prerequisites
•
The Message Server installation package has been created using Wizard
Manager.
•
The Configuration Layer components are installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. Copy the Message Server installation package from the location you specified in Wizard Manager to the host computer for Message Server.
2. In the directory to which the Message Server installation package was copied, locate a shell script called install.sh.
3. Run this script from the command prompt by typing the file name.
4. When prompted, specify the
Host Name
of the computer on which Message
Server is to be installed.
5. Specify the destination directory into which Message Server is to be installed, with the full path to it.
6. If asked which version of the product to install, either the 32-bit or the
64-bit, choose the one appropriate to your environment.
130 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager
As soon as the installation process is finished, a message appears announcing that installation was successful. The process places Message Server in the directory specified during the installation.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Initializing the Log Database
Purpose: Enable a newly created database to serve as the Centralized Log
Database. You can also use the Database Initialization Wizard for this purpose.
Notes:
• Message Server can only write logs to a PostgreSQL DBMS if the corresponding DB Server also supports PostgreSQL.
• If you are using the Oracle DBMS, Genesys strongly recommends that you use the SQL Plus command line utility initializing the Log
Database.
Prerequisites
•
A DBMS is installed, and a blank database has been created.
•
Message Server is installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. In your DBMS interface, go to the directory in which Message Server is installed and open the scripts
folder.
2. Open the folder that matches your database type.
3. Load and execute the script that corresponds to your DBMS.
Table 6 lists database types and their corresponding script names.
Table 6: Log Database Initialization Scripts
DBMS Script Name
DB2
Informix
Microsoft SQL
Oracle
PostgreSQL init_db2.sql
init_informix.sql
init_mssql.sql
init_oracle.sql
init_postgre.sql
Multi-language Script Name a
(see Note)
init_multilang_db2.sql
Not supported init_multilang_mssql.sql
b init_multilang_oracle.sql
Not required
Deployment Guide 131
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager
Table 6: Log Database Initialization Scripts (Continued)
DBMS
Sybase
Script Name
init_sybase.sql
Multi-language Script Name a
(see Note)
Not supported a. Use the multi-language scripts if you are setting up your Centralized Log system in multi-language mode.
b. A multi-language MS SQL database uses UCS-2 encoding instead of UTF-8 encoding. You must set the option utf8-ucs2=true
in the
[dbclient]
section in the annex of the corresponding
Database Access Point
.
4. Save the initialized database.
End of procedure
DBMS Adjustment
You must install and configure an SQL Server client for your database type.
Refer to the Framework DB Server User's Guide for recommendations on environment settings for your database client.
Procedure:
Wizard Manager—Installing Solution Control Server on
UNIX
Purpose: To install the Solution Control Server corresponding to the
Application
object configured in Wizard Manager.
Prerequisites
•
The Solution Control Server installation package has been created using
Wizard Manager.
•
The Configuration Layer components are installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. Copy the SCS installation package from the location you specified in
Wizard Manager to the host computer for SCS.
2. In the directory to which the SCS installation package was copied, locate a shell script called install.sh.
3. Run this script from the command prompt by typing the file name.
132 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Deploying the Management Layer Using Wizard Manager
4. When prompted, specify the
Host Name
of the computer on which Solution
Control Server is to be installed.
5. Specify the destination directory into which SCS is to be installed, with the full path to it.
6. If asked which version of the product to install, either the 32-bit or the
64-bit, choose the one appropriate to your environment.
7. If you plan to use functionality that requires a license, answer y
when asked that question, and then be prepared to give either the full path to the license file or the License Manager port and host.
As soon as the installation process is finished, a message appears announcing that installation was successful. The process places Solution Control Server in the directory with the name specified during the installation.
End of procedure
Installing SNMP Master Agent
If you agreed to configure Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support while running the Management Layer Wizard, the wizard creates an application of the
SNMP Master Agent
type in the Configuration Database. With current implementation, you may use either Genesys SNMP Master Agent or a third-party SNMP master agent that is compliant with the AgentX protocol.
In the first case, the Management Framework CD contains the installation package; in the second case, you must obtain the installation package from a third-party vendor. Therefore, the wizard does not suggest that you copy an installation package to the SNMP Master Agent host computer. Instead, manually install the SNMP master agent of your choice:
•
If installing Genesys SNMP Master Agent, follow the instructions for
“Deploying SNMP Master Agent” on page 162
.
•
If installing a third-party SNMP master agent, follow the instructions in the relevant third-party documentation.
Regardless of your choice, review the Framework Configuration Options
Reference Manual to decide whether your environment requires configuring any configuration options for your SNMP master agent application.
For more information about SNMP functionality built into the Management
Layer and on Genesys SNMP Master Agent, see the Framework Management
Layer User’s Guide.
Note:
You must have a special license to enable the SNMP functionality.
Refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for more information.
Deployment Guide 133
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Manually Deploying the Management
Layer
This sections contains instructions describing how to manually deploy
Management Layer.
Task Summary
The following task table summarizes the steps for manually deploying
Management Layer using Genesys Administrator or Configuration Manager.
Note:
Message Server can only write logs to a PostgreSQL DBMS if the corresponding DB Server also supports PostgreSQL.
Task Summary: Manually Deploying Management Layer
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. Deploy a DB Server for the
Log Database.
1. Configure a Client DB Server
Application
object for the Log
Database using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Configuring a Log DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 137
“Configuring a Log DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 138
2. Install the DB Server Application using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Manually installing Log DB Server on UNIX” on page 139
“Manually installing Log DB Server on Windows” on page 141
2. Configure a Database
Access Point (DAP) for the
Log DB Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Configuring a Database Access Point for the Log DB Server using
Genesys Administrator” on page 143
• “Configuring a Database Access Point for the Log DB Server using
Configuration Manager” on page 145
134 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Task Summary: Manually Deploying Management Layer (Continued)
Task
3. Deploy Message Server.
4. Create and initialize the
Log Database.
5. Deploy Solution Control
Server.
Related Procedures and Information
1. Configure a Message Server
Application
object using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Configuring a Message Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 148
“Configuring a Message Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 149
2. Install the Message Server Application using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Manually installing Message Server on UNIX” on page 151
“Manually installing Message Server on Windows” on page 152
1. Create an empty database in your DBMS.
2. Initialize the empty database so that it can be used as the Log
Database. Use the procedure “Initializing the Log Database” on page 131
.
1. Configure a Solution Control Server
Application
object using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Configuring a Solution Control Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 153
“Configuring a Solution Control Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 154
2. Install the Solution Control Server Application using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Manually installing Solution Control Server on UNIX” on page 156
“Manually installing Solution Control Server on Windows” on page 157
Deployment Guide 135
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Task Summary: Manually Deploying Management Layer (Continued)
Task
6. Deploy Solution Control
Interface, if required.
7. Deploy Genesys SNMP
Master Agent
Related Procedures and Information
Starting in release 8.1, Genesys Administrator can be used in place of
Solution Control Interface, if required. If you have not yet installed
Genesys Administrator, refer to the Framework Genesys Deployment
Guide for instructions to install it.
If you still want to use Solution Control Interface, deploy it as follows:
1. Configure a Solution Control Interface
Application
object using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
2. Install the Solution Control Interface Application using the
procedure “Manually installing Solution Control Interface” on page 161
.
1. Configure a Genesys SNMP Master Agent
Application
object using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Configuring an SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 163
“Configuring an SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 164
2. Install the Genesys SNMP Master Agent Application using one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
“Manually installing SNMP Master Agent on UNIX” on page 166
“Manually installing SNMP Master Agent on Windows” on page 167
Deploying Log DB Server
Log DB Server runs as a client of Configuration Server. You must also configure a corresponding Database Access Point through which Log
DB Server accesses the Log Database. For other applications to access the Log
Database, you must configure both DB Server and Database Access Points as
Application
objects. For Database Access Point configuration instructions, see
“Configuring Database Access Points” on page 142 .
136 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Procedure:
Configuring a Log DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To configure a Log DB Server to access the Log Database.
Prerequisites
•
A database must exist to which Log DB Server will provide access.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar. This opens a
Browse
dialog box that lists available application templates. If a DB Server template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management
Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file. The
Configuration
tab for the new DB Server
Application
object appears in the
Details panel.
3. In the
General
section, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
field—for example,
LogDBServer.
4. In the
Server Info
section:
a. In the
Host
field, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host object on which this DB Server is running.
b. For each listening port that an application must use to connect to Log
DB Server:
i. In the Connections filed, click
Add.
ii. Enter the port properties in the
Port Info
dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
c. For the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
fields, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in the three text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install Log
Deployment Guide 137
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
DB Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
5. On the
Options
tab:
a. In the drop-down list in the top-right corner, select
Options
if not already selected.
b. In the dbserver
section:
i. Change the value of the dbprocess_name
option to the value of the option
<DBMS you are using)_name.
For example, if you are using
Microsoft SQL Server DBMS, set the value of dbprocess_name
to
./dbclient_msql.
ii. Change the value of the management-port
option to the management port number for this DB Server.
6. Click
Save
or
Apply
in the toolbar to save the new object. The new object will appear in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a Log DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager
Purpose: To configure a Log DB Server to access the Log Database
Prerequisites
•
A database must exist to which Log DB Server will provide access.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a DB Server template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management
Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
, and repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new DB Server
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box—for example,
LogDBServer.
138 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
4. On the
Server Info
tab:
a. Click the
Browse
button next to the
Host
drop-down list, and select the host on which this DB Server will run.
b. Specify the listening port(s) and select whether or not each is secure.
Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for detailed information about specifying ports and securing connections to them.
c. Leave the rest of the fields at their default values.
5. On the
Start Info
tab, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in the
Working Directory, Command
Line,
and
Command Line Arguments
text boxes. For information about
command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install Log
DB Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
6. On the
Options
tab, in the dbserver
section:
•
Change the value of the dbprocess_name
option to the value corresponding to the
<DBMS you are using>_name
option. For example, if you are using Microsoft SQL Server DBMS, set the value dbprocess_name to
./dblient_msql.
•
Change the value of the management-port
option to the number of the management port for this DB Server.
7. Click
OK.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually installing Log DB Server on UNIX
Warning!
During installation on UNIX, all files are copied into the directory you specify. The install process does not create any subdirectories within this directory, so do not install different products into the same directory.
Prerequisites
•
The Log DB Server
Application
object exists.
Deployment Guide 139
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate services_layer/dbserver/<operating_system>
directory, locate a shell script called install.sh.
2. Run this script from the command prompt by typing sh
and the file name—for example, sh install.sh
. Then, press
Enter.
3. To specify the host name for this DB Server, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the current host.
4. Type n
to specify that this DB Server will provide access to databases other than the Configuration Database (in this case, the Log Database), and press
Enter.
5. When prompted, specify the:
•
Host name of the computer on which Configuration Server is running.
•
Network port used by client applications to connect to Configuration
Server.
•
User name used to log in to the Configuration Layer.
•
Password used to log in to the Configuration Layer.
6. The installation displays the list of
Application
objects of the specified type configured on this
Host
object. Type the number corresponding to the
DB Server
Application
object you configured in the procedure
“Configuring a Log DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 138
.
7. Specify the destination directory into which this server is to be installed, with the full path to it.
8. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to which you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
9. The installation displays a list of database types. Type the number corresponding to the database you are using.
140 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Note:
Some items in the list have
_32
or _
64
at the end of the name, indicating a 32-bit or 64-bit database. Make sure to choose the one appropriate to your environment.
As soon as the installation process is finished, a message appears indicating that installation was successful. The process places the DB Server application in the directory specified during the installation.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually installing Log DB Server on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Prerequisites
•
The Log DB Server
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate services_layer\dbserver\windows directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
2. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
3. Click
Next
to start the installation.
4. On the
Maintenance Setup Type
page, select
Install new instance of the application.
5. On the
DB Server Run Mode
page, select
DB Server as a client of
Configuration Server to install DB Server as a client, so that it provides access to the Log Database. Click
Next.
6. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the host name, port, user name, and password of
Configuration Server, and then click
Next.
7. On the
Select Application
page, select the name of the DB Server
Application
object that you configured on page 138 , and click
Next.
8. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory if you specified one in the
Working Directory property of the server’s
Application
object during configuration. If you
Deployment Guide 141
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer entered a period (
.
) in this property field when configuring the object, or if the path that you specified in this property is invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Product
Name>
format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory property in the Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in the
Working Directory property.
Click
Next
to proceed.
9. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
10. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Framework.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
Configuring Database Access Points
Most Genesys applications access various databases through a daemon process called DB Server. For example, the Log Database Access Point (DAP) provides the connection to the Log Database through the Log DB Server. Some
Genesys applications use Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) to access databases. To cover the variety of ways the applications in the Genesys installation can be interfaced with databases, the Configuration Layer uses the concept of a Database Access Point.
A Database Access Point (DAP) is an object of the
Application
type that describes both the parameters required for communication with a particular database—either DB Server or JDBC parameters—and the parameters of the database itself. The DAP application you configure for the Management Layer uses DB Server to connect to the Log Database. If, according to your configuration, a database can be accessed through multiple DB Servers simultaneously, register as many DAPS as there are DB Servers.
142 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Procedure:
Configuring a Database Access Point for the Log
DB Server using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Log DB Server is installed and running.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar. This opens a
Browse
dialog box that lists available application templates. If a Database Access Point template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
Database_Access_Point_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DAP template file. The
Configuration tab for the new DAP
Application
object appears in the Details panel.
3. In the
General
section, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
field—for example,
LogDAP.
A DAP can have the same name as the database itself. However, it is recommended that you make their names unique if you are using multiple access points for the same database.
4. In
Host
field of the
Server Info
section, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host
object to which this DAP is assigned.
5. In the
DB Info section, provide the following information about the Log
Database:
•
Connection Type
—The type of connection to the DBMS. Select
Default
.
Note:
Do not select a
Connection Type
of
JDBC
for Database Access
Points.
•
Query Timeout
—The period of time for which client processes using this DAP expect a response from the DBMS. If they do not receive a response within this period, they stop executing. DB Server interprets this as a failure of the DBMS and tries to reconnect to the DBMS. The timeout set in this DAP overrides that set in the DB Server
Application object, but applies only to client processes using this DAP.
Deployment Guide 143
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
For more information about how DB Server uses this value, see
“Database Failures” on page 66 .
Note:
The option db-request-timeout and stores it in the Annex of the
DAP.
Query Timeout
field sets the value of the configuration
•
DB Server
—The
Application
object corresponding to the database to which this DAP will provide access.
Note:
A DAP has the same listening ports as the DB Server to which it provides access.
•
DBMS Name
—The name or alias identifying the DBMS that handles the database. The value of this option is communicated to DB Server so that it connects to the correct DBMS:
— For DB2, set this value to the name or alias-name of the database specified in the db2 client configuration.
— For Informix, this value is the name of SQL server, specified in the sqlhosts
file.
— For Microsoft SQL, set this value to the SQL server name (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which Microsoft
SQL runs).
— For Oracle, the value is the name of the Listener service.
— For PostgreSQL, set this value to the SQL server name (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which PostgreSQL runs).
— For Sybase, this value is the server name stored in the Sybase interface file.
•
DBMS Type
—The type of DBMS that handles the database. You must set a value for this property.
•
Database Name
—The name of the database to be accessed, as it is specified in the DBMS that handles this database. You must set a value for this property unless oracle
or db2 is specified as the
DBMS Type
. For
Sybase, Informix, Microsoft SQL, and PostgreSQL, this value is the name of the database where the client will connect.
•
User Name
—The user name established in the SQL server to access the database. You must set a value for this property.
•
User Password
—The password established in the SQL server to access the database.
•
Re-enter Password
—Confirmation for the value entered for
Password
.
•
Case Conversion
—Case conversion method for key names of key-value lists coming from DB Server. This value specifies whether and how a client application converts the field names of a database table when receiving data from DB Server. If you select upper,
field names are converted into uppercase; if you select lower,
field names are
144 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer converted into lowercase; and if you select any,
field names are not converted. This setting does not affect the values of key-value lists coming from DB Server. That is, actual data is being presented exactly as in the database tables.
Note:
For the Case Conversion option, use the default value ( any
) unless directed to do otherwise by Genesys Technical Support.
6. If the Log Database is an MS SQL database, and has been initialized for
use in multi-language environments (see the procedure “Initializing the
), set the option utf8-ucs2=true
in the
[dbclient] section on the
Options
tab, in the
Annex
of the DAP.
7. Click
Save
or
Apply
in the toolbar to save the new object. The new object will appear in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a Database Access Point for the Log
DB Server using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Log DB Server is installed and running.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a DAP template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
Database_Access_Point_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework product CD.
•
, and then repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DAP template file, and click
OK
, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new DAP
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab:
•
Enter a descriptive name—for example,
LogDAP.
A DAP can have the same name as the database itself. However, it is recommended that you make their names unique if you are using multiple access points for the same database.
Deployment Guide 145
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
•
In the
DB Server
field, use the
Browse
button to select the
Application object corresponding to the Log DB Server that you just installed.
Note:
Do not select the
JDBC Connection
check box when you configure
Database Access Points.
4. On the
DB Info
tab, specify information about the database as follows:
•
DBMS Name
—The name or alias identifying the DBMS that handles the database. The value of this option is communicated to DB Server so that it connects to the correct DBMS:
— For DB2, set this value to the name or alias-name of the database specified in the db2 client configuration.
— For Informix, this value is the name of SQL server, specified in the sqlhosts
file.
— For Microsoft SQL, set this value to the SQL server name (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which Microsoft
SQL runs).
— For Oracle, the value is the name of the Listener service.
— For PostgreSQL, set this value to the SQL server name (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which PostgreSQL runs).
— For Sybase, this value is the server name stored in the Sybase interface file.
•
DBMS Type
—The type of DBMS that handles the database. You must set a value for this property.
•
Database Name
—The name of the database to be accessed, as it is specified in the DBMS that handles this database. You must set a value for this property unless oracle
or db2 is specified as the
DBMS Type
. For
Sybase, Informix, Microsoft SQL, and PostgreSQL, this value is the name of the database where the client will connect.
•
User Name
—The user name established in the SQL server to access the database. You must set a value for this property.
•
Password
—The password established in the SQL server to access the database.
•
Re-enter Password
—Confirmation for the value entered for
Password
.
•
Case Conversion
—Case conversion method for key names of key-value lists coming from DB Server. This value specifies whether and how a client application converts the field names of a database table when receiving data from DB Server. If you select upper,
field names are converted into uppercase; if you select lower,
field names are converted into lowercase; and if you select any,
field names are not converted. This setting does not affect the values of key-value lists coming from DB Server. That is, actual data is being presented exactly as in the database tables.
146 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Note:
For the Case Conversion field, use the default value ( any
) unless directed to do otherwise by Genesys Technical Support.
•
Query Timeout
—The period of time for which client processes using this DAP expect a response from the DBMS. If they do not receive a response within this period, they stop executing. DB Server interprets this as a failure of the DBMS and tries to reconnect to the DBMS. The timeout set in this DAP overrides that set in the DB Server
Application object, but applies only to client processes using this DAP.
For more information about how DB Server uses this value, see
“Database Failures” on page 66 .
Notes:
The Query Timeout field sets the value of the configuration option db-request-timeout and stores it in the Annex of the DAP.
The DAP Annex is not visible in Configuration Manager.
Note:
Do not configure any properties on the
JDBC Info
tab when configuring a DAP application for the Management Layer.
5. On the
Server Info
tab:
•
Click the
Browse
button next to the
Host
drop-down list, and select the host on which this Log DB Server will run.
•
Specify the listening port(s) and select whether or not each is secure.
Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for detailed information on specifying ports and securing connections to them.
6. If the Log Database is an MS SQL database, and has been initialized for
use in multi-language environments (see the procedure “Initializing the
), set the option utf8-ucs2=true
in the
[dbclient] section on the
Annex
tab of this DAP.
End of procedure
To interface an
Application
object with a database through a certain Database
Access Point, add this access point to the list of the application’s Connections.
Deploying Message Server
This section describes how to configure and install a Message Server
Application
object.
Deployment Guide 147
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Procedure:
Configuring a Message Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
A Database Access Point for the Log DB Server is configured.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar. This opens a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Message Server template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
Message_Server_<current-version>.apd
file from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Message Server template file. The
Configuration
tab for the new Message Server
Application
object appears in the Details panel.
3. In the
General
section:
a. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
field—for example,
MsgServer.
b. Add a connection to the Log Database DAP. In the
Connections
field:
i. Click
Add.
ii. Enter the properties of the connection in the
Connection Info dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
4. In the
Server Info
section:
a. In the
Host
field, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host object on which this Message Server is running.
b. For each listening port that an application must use to connect to
Message Server:
i. In the
Listening Ports
field, click
Add.
ii. Enter the port properties in the
Port Info
dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
148 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
c. For the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
fields, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in the three text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install
Message Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
5. If you want Message Server to direct log events to the Log Database, on the
Options
tab:
a. In the drop-down list in the top-right corner, select
Options
if not already selected.
b. In the dbserver
section, change the value of the db_storage option to true
.
Note:
Message Server can only write logs to a PostgreSQL DBMS if the corresponding DB Server also supports PostgreSQL.
6. Click
Save
or
Apply
in the toolbar to save the new object. The new object will appear in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a Message Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
A Database Access Point for the Log DB Server is configured.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Message Server template is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
Message_Server_<current-version>.apd
file from the
Management Framework product CD.
Deployment Guide 149
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
•
, and then repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Message Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new Message Server
Application object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box.
4. On the
Server Info
tab:
•
Click the
Browse
button next to the
Host
drop-down list, and select the host on which this Message Server will run.
•
Specify the listening port(s).
•
Leave the rest of the fields at their default values.
5. On the
Start Info
tab, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the
Working Directory,
Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install Message
Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
6. On the
Connections
tab, add a connection to the Database Access Point for the Log Database.
7. If you want Message Server to direct log events to the Log Database, do the following:
a. On the
Options
tab, double-click the messages
section.
b. Change the value of db_storage
to true.
c. Click
OK.
Note:
Message Server can only write logs to a PostgreSQL DBMS if the corresponding DB Server also supports PostgreSQL.
8. Click
OK.
End of procedure
If you want to use centralized logging and alarm signaling for Configuration
Server, Configuration Server Proxy, and the Configuration DB Server, add a connection to the Message Server
Application
object to the
Connections
tab of the respective
Application
objects.
150 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Procedure:
Manually installing Message Server on UNIX
Prerequisites
•
A Message Server
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer/message_server/<operating_system>
directory, locate a shell script called install.sh
.
2. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
3. To specify the host name for this Message Server, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the current host.
4. Enter the Configuration Server host name, and press
Enter.
5. Enter the Configuration Server network port, and press
Enter.
6. Enter the Configuration Server user name, and press
Enter.
7. Enter the Configuration Server password, and press
Enter.
8. The installation displays the list of
Application
objects of the specified type configured on this
Host
object. Type the number corresponding to the
Message Server
Application
object you configured on page 149 , and press
Enter.
9. To specify the destination directory, do one of the following:
•
Press
Enter
to accept the default.
•
Enter the full path of the directory, and press
Enter.
10. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to which you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as the files are copied to the destination directory.
Deployment Guide 151
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
11. For the product version to install, do one of the following:
•
Type
32
to select the 32-bit version, and press
Enter.
•
Type
64
to select the 64-bit version, and press
Enter.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually installing Message Server on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Prerequisites
•
A Message Server
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer\message_server\windows directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
2. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
3. Click
Next
to start the installation.
4. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the host name, port, user name, and password of
Configuration Server, and then click
Next.
5. On the
Select Application
page, select the name of the Message Server
Application
object that you configured on page 149 , and then click
Next.
6. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory if specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object during configuration. If you entered a period
(
.
) in this field when configuring the object, or if the path specified in this property is invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory property in the Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in the
Working Directory property.
152 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Click
Next
to proceed.
7. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
8. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Management Layer.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
Initializing the Log Database
Use the procedure “Initializing the Log Database” on page 131 for full
instructions on how to initialize a newly created database so that it can serve as the Log Database.
Deploying Solution Control Server
This section describes how to configure and install Solution Control Server.
Procedure:
Configuring a Solution Control Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar. This opens a
Browse
dialog box that lists available application templates. If a Solution Control Server template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
Solution_Control_Server_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
step.
Deployment Guide 153
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Solution Control Server template file.
The
Configuration
tab for the new Solution Control Server
Application object appears in the Details panel.
3. In the
General
section:
a. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
field—for example,
SCS.
b. If you want to enable alarm signaling, add a connection to the Message
Server. In the
Connections
field:
i. Click
Add.
ii. Enter the properties of the connection in the
Connection Info dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
4. In the
Server Info
section:
a. In the
Host
field, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host object on which this Solution Control Server is running.
b. For each listening port that an application must use to connect to
Solution Control Server:
i. In the
Listening Ports
field, click
Add.
ii. Enter the port properties in the
Port Info
dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
c. For the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
fields, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in the three text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install
Solution Control Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to Configuration Server.
5. Click
Save
or
Apply
in the toolbar to save the new object. The new object will appear in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a Solution Control Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
154 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Solution Control Server template is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the solution_Control_Server_<current-version>.apd
template file from the Management Framework CD.
•
, and then repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Solution Control Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new Solution Control,
Server
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box.
4. On the
Server Info
tab:
•
Click the
Browse
button next to the
Host
drop-down list, and select the host on which Solution Control Server will run.
•
Specify the listening port(s), and select whether or not each is secure.
Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for detailed information on specifying ports and securing them.
•
Leave the rest of the fields at their default values.
5. On the
Start Info
tab, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the
Working Directory,
Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install Solution
Control Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
6. If you want to enable alarm signaling, on the
Connections
tab, add a connection to the Message Server.
7. Click
OK.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 155
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Procedure:
Manually installing Solution Control Server on UNIX
Prerequisites
•
A Solution Control Server
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer/solution_control_server/<operating_system> directory, locate a shell script called install.sh.
2. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
3. When prompted to install only the utilities, type n
to install Solution
Control Server and its utilities, and press
Enter
.
4. To specify the host name for this SCS, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the current host.
5. Enter the Configuration Server host name, and press
Enter.
6. Enter the Configuration Server network port, and press
Enter.
7. Enter the Configuration Server user name, and press
Enter.
8. Enter the Configuration Server password, and press
Enter.
9. The installation displays the list of
Application
objects of the specified type configured on this
Host
object. Type the number corresponding to the
SCS
Application
object you just configured, and press
Enter.
10. To specify the destination directory, do one of the following:
•
Press
Enter
to accept the default.
•
Enter the full path of the directory, and press
Enter.
11. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to which you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as the files are copied to the destination directory.
156 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
12. For the product version to install, do one of the following:
•
Type
32
to select the 32-bit version, and press
Enter.
•
Type
64
to select the 64-bit version, and press
Enter.
13. To decide whether you require a license, refer to the Genesys Licensing
Guide for information about licensing requirements. Then, do one of the following:
•
Type y
if you require a license, and press
Enter.
•
Type n
if you do not require a license, and press
Enter.
14. If you typed y in the previous step, enter the license location format, press
Enter,
and enter the required parameters.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually installing Solution Control Server on
Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Prerequisites
•
A Solution Control Server
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer\solution_control_server\windows directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
2. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
3. Click
Next
to start the installation.
4. On the
Solution Control Server Installation Mode
page, select
Solution
Control Server and Utilities
, and then click
Next
.
5. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the host name, port, user name, and password of
Configuration Server, and then click
Next.
6. On the
Select Application
page, select the name of the Solution Control
Server
Application
object that you just configured, and then click
Next.
Deployment Guide 157
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
7. On the
Run-time License Configuration
page, select whether you are using a license. Refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for information about licensing requirements, and then click
Next.
8. If you selected
Use License
in
, on the
Access to License
page, enter the license access type and required parameters.
9. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory if specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object during configuration. If you entered a period
(
.
) in this field when configuring the object, or if the path specified in the
Working Directory
property is invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory property in the Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in the
Working Directory property
.
Click
Next
to proceed.
10. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
11. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Management Layer.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
If you plan to use SNMP functionality, deploy SNMP Master Agent (see
“Deploying SNMP Master Agent” on page 162 ). For information about SNMP
functionality built into the Management Layer, refer to the Framework
Management Layer User’s Guide.
Deploying Solution Control Interface
This section describes how to configure and install Solution Control Interface
(SCI).
158 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Note:
If you configure more than one instance of Solution Control Server, and/or more than one Log Database exist in your system, you can configure SCI connections to any combination of these instances.
However, note that at runtime, SCI works with only one Solution
Control Server and one Log Database. If you have defined connections to more than one SCS and/or Log Database, then at startup SCI prompts you to select the SCS and the Log Database for the current working session.
Procedure:
Configuring a Solution Control Interface Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
At least one Solution Control Server is installed.
•
If you want to display log messages, a DAP
Application
object for the Log
Database exists.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar. This opens a
Browse
dialog box that lists available application templates. If a Solution Control Interface template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
Solution_Control_Interface_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Solution Control Interface template file. The
Configuration
tab for the new Solution Control Interface
Application
object appears in the Details panel.
3. In the
General
section:
a. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
field—for example,
SCI.
b. In the
Connections
field:
i. Add a connection to the Solution Control Server
Application object that you just created.
ii. If you want to display log messages in SCI, add a connection to the
Log Database Access Point
Application
object configured on
.
Deployment Guide 159
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
As you add server applications to your system, you can add connections to them as required.
Note:
You can enable the ADDP protocol for SCI connections to SCS.
Use the procedure “Configuring Advanced Disconnect Detection
Protocol using Genesys Administrator” on page 300 . Enable
ADDP-related logging on the server side.
4. Click
Save
or
Apply
in the toolbar to save the new object. The new object will appear in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a Solution Control Interface Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
At least one Solution Control Server is installed.
•
If you want to display log messages, a DAP
Application
object for the Log
Database exists.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application,
which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If an SCI template is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the solution_Control_Interface_<current-version>.apd
template file from the Management Framework product CD.
•
, and then repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the SCI template file and click
OK, which opens the
Properties
window for the SCI
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name.
Note:
You can enable the ADDP protocol for SCI connections to SCS.
Use the procedure “Configuring Advanced Disconnect Detection
Protocol using Configuration Manager” on page 303
. Enable
ADDP-related logging on the server side.
160 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
4. On the
Connections
tab:
•
Add a connection to the Solution Control Server
Application
object
•
If you want to display log messages in SCI, add a connection to the
Log Database Access Point
Application
object configured on
.
As you add server applications to your system, you can add connections to them as required.
5. Click
OK
to save your changes and close the
Properties
dialog box.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually installing Solution Control Interface
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Note:
Solution Control Interface operates only on Windows.
Prerequisites
•
The Solution Control Interface
Application
object exists.
•
If you want to implement a security banner with SCI, make sure that you have the necessary files prepared before you start installing SCI. Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for detailed information about the security banner.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, in the appropriate management_layer\solution_control_interface\windows directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
2. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
3. Click
Next
to start the installation.
Deployment Guide 161
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
4. On the
Security Banner Configuration
page, choose whether you want to configure a security banner for this SCI application. Refer to the Genesys
Security Deployment Guide for detailed information about the security banner. Do one of the following:
•
If you do not want to configure a security banner for this application, clear the
Enable Security Banner
checkbox, and click
Next.
•
If you want to configure a security banner for this application:
i. Select
Enable Security Banner
.
ii. Follow the instructions in the procedure “Installing and configuring the Security Banner” in the Genesys Security
Deployment Guide. When you are finished that procedure, return here and finish this procedure.
5. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory, as specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object. If the specified path is invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program
Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory property in the Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in the
Working Directory property.
Click
Next
to proceed.
6. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
7. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Management Layer.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys application.
End of procedure
Deploying SNMP Master Agent
For the Management Layer to communicate with an SNMP master agent, provided by either a third-party or Genesys, you must configure an
Application
object of the SNMP Agent type in the Configuration Database, and configure a connection to this
Application
object in Solution Control
Server.
162 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
If you do not want to use a redundant configuration or your SNMP master agent application does not support redundant configuration, configure your
SNMP master agent as a stand-alone application. This section provides instructions for deploying a stand-alone SNMP Master Agent application.
Note:
Depending on the solutions for which you want to enable SNMP monitoring, you may need to install several instances of SNMP
Master Agent, using the same approach given in this section.
Generally, you have to install and configure one instance of Genesys
SNMP Master Agent on each computer on which you will be using
SMNP functionality.
For more information about Genesys SNMP Master Agent, refer to the
Framework Management Layer User’s Guide.
Procedure:
Configuring an SNMP Master Agent Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable SNMP functionality.
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar. This opens a
Browse
dialog box that lists available application templates. If an SNMP Master Agent template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
SNMP_Master_Agent_<current-version>.apd
file from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the SNMP Master Agent template file. The
Configuration
tab for the new SNMP Master Agent
Application
object appears in the Details panel.
3. In the
General
section, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
field—for example,
SNMP_MA.
4. In the
Server Info
section:
a. In the
Host
field, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host object on which this SNMP Master Agent is running.
Deployment Guide 163
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
b. For each listening port that an application must use to connect to
SNMP Master Agent:
i. In the
Listening Ports
field, click
Add.
ii. Enter the port properties in the
Port Info
dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
c. For the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
fields, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in the three text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install SNMP
Master Agent, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
5. Click
Save
or
Apply
in the toolbar to save the new object. The new object will appear in the list of applications.
6. Add a connection from Solution Control Server to this SNMP Master
Agent, as follows:
a. Open the Solution Control Server
Application
object
Configuration tab.
b. In the
General
section, add the connection to the SNMP Master Agent object just created. In the
Connections
field:
i. Click
Add
to open the
Connection Info dialog box.
ii. Enter the properties of the connection.
iii. Click
OK.
c. Click
Save
or
Apply
in the toolbar to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring an SNMP Master Agent Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable SNMP functionality.
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
164 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If an SNMP Master Agent template is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
SNMP_Master_Agent_<current-version>.apd
template file from the Management Framework product CD.
•
, and then repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the SNMP Master Agent template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new SNMP Master Agent
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name.
4. On the
Server Info
tab:
•
Click the
Browse
button next to the
Host
drop-down list, and select the host on which this SNMP Master Agent will run.
•
Specify the listening port(s) that SNMP Master Agent must use for communications with NMS.
•
Leave the rest of the fields at their default values.
5. On the
Start Info
tab, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the
Working Directory,
Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see Chapter 7 on page 171
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install SNMP
Master Agent, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
6. Click
OK
to save the configuration.
7. Add a connection from Solution Control Server to this SNMP Master
Agent, as follows:
a. Open the Solution Control Server
Application
object
Properties dialog box.
b. Select the
Connections
tab and click
Add
to open the
Connection Info
Properties
dialog box.
c. Use the
Browse
button next to the
Server
field to select the SNMP
Master Agent object just created.
d. Click
OK
to save the connection and close the
Connection Info
Properties
dialog box.
Deployment Guide 165
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
e. Click
OK
to close the Solution Control Server
Properties
dialog box.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually installing SNMP Master Agent on UNIX
Purpose: To enable SNMP functionality.
Prerequisites
•
An SNMP Master Agent
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, in the appropriate management_layer/snmp_master_agent/<operating_system>
directory, locate a shell script called install.sh.
2. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
3. To specify the host name for this SMNP Master Agent, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the current host.
4. Enter the Configuration Server host name, and press
Enter.
5. Enter the Configuration Server network port, and press
Enter.
6. Enter the Configuration Server user name, and press
Enter.
7. Enter the Configuration Server password, and press
Enter.
8. The installation displays the list of
Application
objects of the specified type configured on this
Host
object. Type the number corresponding to the
SNMP Master Agent
Application
object you configured on
press
Enter.
9. To specify the destination directory, do one of the following:
•
Press
Enter
to accept the default.
•
Enter the full path of the directory, and press
Enter.
10. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to which you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
166 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Manually Deploying the Management Layer
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as the files are copied to the destination directory.
11. For the product version to install, do one of the following:
•
Type
32
to select the 32-bit version, and press
Enter.
•
Type
64
to select the 64-bit version, and press
Enter.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Manually installing SNMP Master Agent on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Purpose: To enable SNMP functionality.
Prerequisites
•
An SNMP Master Agent
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer\snmp_master_agent\windows directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
2. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
3. Click
Next
to start the installation.
4. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the host name, port, user name, and password of
Configuration Server, and then click
Next.
5. On the
Select Application
page, select the name of the SNMP Master
Application
object that you configured on page 164 , and then click
Next.
6. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory if specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object during configuration. If you entered a period
(
.
) in this field when configuring the object, or if the specified path is
Deployment Guide 167
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Installing Solution Control Server Utilities Separately invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory property in the Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in the
Working Directory property.
Click
Next
to proceed.
7. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
8. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions >
Management Layer.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
Installing Solution Control Server Utilities
Separately
Starting in release 8.1, you can install the following Solution Control Server utilities without installing Solution Control Server itself:
•
ccgs.pl—Graceful Call Center T-Servers stop script.
•
gstuckcalls utility and Stuck Calls detection and deletion scripts—To handle T-Server stuck calls and raise alarms.
•
logmsg utility—To send log messages on behalf of applications.
•
mlcmd utility—To send and receive information to and from Solution
Control Server.
Note:
Genesys recommends that the utilities be used with the same version of Solution Control Server with which they were shipped.
Use one of the procedures in this section to install the utilities. Refer to the
Framework 8.1 Management Layer User’s Guide for more information about these utilities.
168 Framework 8.1
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Installing Solution Control Server Utilities Separately
Procedure:
Installing only Solution Control Server utilities on
UNIX
Purpose: To install Solution Control Server utilities on UNIX without installing Solution Control Server.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer/solution_control_server/<operating_system> directory, locate a shell script called install.sh.
2. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
3. Type y
to specify that you want to install only the utilities, and press
Enter
.
4. Enter the full path of the directory in which you want to install the utilities. for example,
/opt/genesys/scsutil
, and press
Enter
. The installation displays the list of files being extracted and copied to the destination directory.
5. Enter the bit version of the system on which you are installing the utilities, either
32
or
64
, and press
Enter
.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Installing only Solution Control Server utilities on
Windows
Purpose: To install Solution Control Server utilities on Windows without installing Solution Control Server.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD in the appropriate management_layer\solution_control_server\windows directory, locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
2. On the wizard’s
Welcome
page, click
Next
to start the installation.
3. On the
Solution Control Server Installation Mode
page, select
Solution
Control Server Utilities
, and then click
Next
.
4. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, do one of the following to specify the directory where the utilities will be installed:
•
Click Next to accept the default directory.
Deployment Guide 169
Chapter 6: Setting Up the Management Layer Next Steps
•
Specify a different path and directory by entering it in the text box or using the
Browse
button. If necessary, use the
Default
button to reinstate the original default. Click
Next
to proceed.
5. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
6. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
End of procedure
Next Steps
After you successfully install and configure the Management Layer components as described in this chapter, consider whether you would like to configure the following:
•
Force logged-in users to log in again after a period of inactivity. Refer to
“Forced Re-Login for Inactivity” on page 68 .
•
Redundant Message Servers, Solution Control Servers, or SNMP Master
Agents. Refer to chapter 8 on page 193 .
•
Distributed Solution Control Servers. Refer to Chapter 10 on page 259 .
Continuing the Installation of Your System
Once the Management Layer is set up, you can then deployed:
•
Genesys Administrator, if you are going to use it and you have not deployed it already. To do so, use the instructions in the Framework
Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide.
•
The rest of the Framework components and the contact center
environment, as described in Chapter 9 on page 253
.
170 Framework 8.1
Chapter
7
Starting and Stopping
Framework Components
This chapter provides instructions on how to start and stop most Framework components by using either the Management Layer or manual procedures.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Starting and Stopping with the Management Layer, page 173
Starting with Startup Files, page 175
Starting and Stopping with Windows Services Manager, page 191
Note:
This chapter applies to all Framework components except Genesys
Administrator. For information about this component, refer to the
Framework Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide.
Introduction
You can start and stop most Framework components by using the Management
Layer, a startup file, a manual procedure, or the Services Manager.
With all these methods, command-line parameters are usually required for a server application in addition to an executable file name.
Common command-line parameters are as follows:
-host
-port
The name of the host on which Configuration Server is running.
The communication port that client applications must use to connect to Configuration Server.
Deployment Guide 171
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Introduction
-app
-l
-v
-nco X/Y
-lmspath
The exact name of an application as configured in the
Configuration Database.
The license address. Use for the server applications that check out technical licenses. Can be either of the following:
Full path to and the exact name of the license file used by an application. For example,
-l
/opt/mlink/license/license.dat.
The host name and port of the license server, as specified in the
SERVER
line of the license file, in the port@host
format. For example,
-l 7260@ctiserver.
The version of a Framework component.
Note that specifying this parameter does not start an application, but returns its version number instead. Either uppercase (
V
) or lowercase ( v
) letter can be used.
The Nonstop Operation feature is activated;
X
exceptions occurring within
Y
seconds do not cause an application to exit. If the specified number of exceptions is exceeded within the specified number of seconds, the application exits or, if so configured, the Management Layer restarts the application. If you do not specify a value for the
-nco parameter, the default value (6 exceptions handled in 10 seconds) applies. To disable the Nonstop Operation feature, specify
-nco 0
when starting the application.
The full path to log messages files (the common file named common.lms
and the application-specific file with the extension
*.lms
) that an application uses to generate log events. This parameter is used when the common and application-specific log message files are located in a directory other than the application’s working directory, for example, when the application’s working directory differs from the directory to which the application is originally installed. Note that if the full path to the executable file is specified in the startup command line (for instance, c:\gcti\multiserver.exe
), the path specified for the executable file is used for locating the
*.lms
files, and the value of the lmspath
parameter is ignored.
Warning!
An application that does not find its
*.lms
file at startup cannot generate application-specific log events and send them to
Message Server.
Note:
In the command-line examples in this document, angle brackets indicate variables that you must replace with appropriate values.
172 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting and Stopping with the Management Layer
Logging In to Interface Components
Some Genesys interface components require that you log in to them using
preassigned login credentials. Use the procedure “Logging in to a Framework
.
Starting and Stopping with the
Management Layer
You can use Genesys Administrator or Solution Control Interface (SCI) to start and stop applications via the Management Layer.
Note:
To operate with the Management Layer, Genesys Administrator must be configured as described in the Framework Genesys Administrator
Deployment Guide.
Before starting an
Application
with the Management Layer, make sure the
Application’s
startup parameters are correctly specified in the
Application’s properties. In the
Server Info
section of the
Application’s Configuration
tab
(in Genesys Administrator), or on the
Start Info
tab (in Configuration
Manager), check that the following entries are correct:
•
Working Directory
—The directory in which the application is installed and/or is to run
•
Command Line
—The name of the executable file
•
Command Line Arguments
—The command-line parameters
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
.
After you correctly specify the command-line parameters, you can start and stop the following Framework components from Genesys Administrator or
SCI:
•
Configuration Server (the
Command Line Arguments
are not required for the primary Configuration Server)
Note:
For the Management Layer to start Configuration Server, you must modify the Configuration Server application in the Configuration
Database, using the procedure “Modifying a Configuration Server
Application object using Configuration Manager” on page 116
.
•
Configuration Server Proxy
•
DB Server
Deployment Guide 173
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting and Stopping with the Management Layer
Note:
For the Management Layer to start the DB Server dedicated to the
Configuration Database, you must create and modify a DB Server
Application object in the Configuration Database, as described in
“Enabling Management Layer Control of Configuration Layer” on page 114 .
•
Message Server
•
SNMP Master Agent
•
T-Server
•
HA Proxy
•
Stat Server
The Management Layer can also restart failed applications; to enable the autorestart functionality for a particular application, select the corresponding check box in the applications’s properties.
Note that when an application is started (or restarted) via the Management
Layer, it inherits environment variables from Local Control Agent (LCA), which executes the startup command. Therefore, you must also set the environment variables required for the application (such as DB Server) for the account that runs LCA.
Warning!
Stopping an application via the Management Layer is not considered an application failure. Therefore, the Management
Layer does not restart applications that it has stopped unless you have configured an appropriate alarm condition and alarm reaction for them.
Stop vs. Graceful Shutdown
When you stop an application or a solution, the application or solution shuts down, ceasing all processing immediately. This may have a detrimental effect on the rest of the system.
Starting in release 8.0, you can stop an application or a solution gracefully, known as a graceful shutdown or graceful stop. Applications refuse any new requests, but continue to process their current requests. A solution gracefully shuts down all of its composite applications, then stops.
Note:
Because a number of solutions can share the same applications, some solution components may continue to have Started status after you stop the solution.
Only applications and solutions that support the graceful stop functionality can be stopped gracefully. Applications and solutions that do not support this functionality shut down ungracefully.
174 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting with Startup Files
If you are unsure if the application supports graceful shutdown, you can use the configuration option suspending-wait-timeout
to configure a timeout. If the status of the application changes to Suspending within this time, the application supports graceful shutdown. If the status does not change to
Suspending within the timeout, the application does not support graceful shutdown, and the application will then stop ungracefully after the timeout expires. Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for a detailed description of this configuration option and how to use it.
Refer to Framework Genesys Administrator Help Framework or Solution
Control Interface Help for more information about stopping gracefully, and about configuring the timeout.
Starting with Startup Files
Startup files are files named (or have an extension of) run.sh
(on UNIX) or startServer.bat
(on Windows) and which installation scripts create and place into the applications’ directories during installation. For additional information about how to use startup files, refer to the Framework Management Layer
User’s Guide.
Note:
You must manually modify the run.sh
file created for a redundant
server before you can use it to start the server. Refer to chapter 8 on page 193
for more information.
Procedure:
Starting an application using its startup file
Prerequisites
•
The startup parameters in the startup file are correct.
•
The required applications that should be running for this application to
start are installed and running. See the appropriate sections in “Starting
Manually” on page 176 to identify which applications should be running
for a particular application to start.
Start of procedure
1. To start the application on UNIX, go to the directory in which the application is installed and type the following command line: sh run.sh
2. To start the application on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Double-click the startServer.bat
icon in the directory in which the application is installed.
Deployment Guide 175
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
•
From the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which the application is installed and type startServer.bat
at the command line.
End of procedure
Starting Manually
When using a manual procedure to start an application, specify the startup parameters in the command prompt, whether starting on UNIX or Windows. In the command prompt, command-line parameters must follow the name of the executable file. On the
Shortcut
tab of the
Program Properties
dialog box, command-line parameters must also follow the name of the executable file.
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
.
General Limitation
When an application is installed on a UNIX operating system and the application name, as configured in the Configuration Database, contains spaces
(for example, T-Server Avaya), you must surround the application name by quotation marks (
“ ”
) in the command line, as follows:
-app “T-Server Avaya”
Specify the rest of the command-line parameters as for any other application.
DB Server
The DB Server startup procedure depends on the database to which this
DB Server provides access. If DB Server provides access to the Configuration
Database, it must operate as an independent server; that is, DB Server must read all configuration information from its configuration file. When you start
DB Server with the application name cfg_dbserver
, DB Server reads all configuration information from its configuration file.
If DB Server provides access to a database other than the Configuration
Database—for example, to the Log Database—it must operate as a client of
Configuration Server; that is, DB Server must be started with an application name other than cfg_dbserver ,
as configured in the Configuration Database.
When you start DB Server with an application name specified in the
Configuration Database, DB Server reads all configuration information from
Configuration Database. During operation, DB Server constantly receives updates on configuration changes from Configuration Server.
Whether you start DB Server as an independent server or as a client of
Configuration Server, DB Server requires that you specify the Configuration
Server host and port in the startup command line.
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
.
176 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
In addition, you can use these command-line parameters when starting
DB Server:
-c
-cfg
DB Server reads its configuration settings from a configuration file with the specified name. If you set this parameter, its value overrides the default name of the configuration file ( dbserver.conf
on UNIX or dbserver.cfg
on Windows).
DB Server for the Configuration Database starts with an application name other than cfg_dbserver,
but still reads its configuration from a configuration file. When you specify this parameter, the Management Layer can restart
DB Server that is configured as an application even when
Configuration Server is not available. Use this parameter for starting a backup DB Server for the Configuration
Database. This parameter does not require any value. For
more information, see chapter 8 on page 193 .
Procedure:
Starting DB Server manually
Prerequisites
•
The DBMS server is running.
Start of procedure
1. To start DB Server on UNIX, go to the directory in which DB Server is installed and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: multiserver -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <DB Server Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start DB Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which DB Server is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the
Deployment Guide 177
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually directory in which DB Server is installed, and type the following command line: multiserver.exe -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app <DB Server Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Configuration Server
Configuration Server does not require any of the common command-line parameters for startup. To verify the database object integrity, you can specify the following additional command-line parameters that are specific to
Configuration Server:
-checkdb
-checkerrors
An instance of Configuration Server starts, verifies the database object integrity, and terminates; all log messages are written in the log output.
An instance of Configuration Server starts, verifies the database object integrity, and terminates; error log messages are written in the log output.
You can also use the following command-line parameters when starting
Configuration Server:
-c
Configuration Server reads its configuration settings from a configuration file with the specified name. If you set this parameter, its value overrides the default name of the configuration file ( confserv.conf
on UNIX or confserv.cfg
on Windows).
-s
-p
-cfglib_port
Configuration Server reads its configuration settings from a configuration section with the specified name. The section must be configured within Configuration Server’s configuration file; the section name must be the same as the name of the Configuration Server application configured in the Configuration Database. Use this parameter to start a backup Configuration Server.
Forces an instance of Configuration Server to start, encrypt the database password in the configuration file, and
terminate. Refer to “Encrypting the Configuration
Database Password” on page 106
for instructions on encrypting the Configuration Database password.
Configuration Server opens the listening port specified in the command line. The port is opened in unsecured mode.
This port is not written to the Configuration Server
Application
object, and does not survive a restart of
Configuration Server. Do not use this option as a part of normal startup. Use it only as a last resort when regular
178 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually secure ports cannot be accessed because of a configuration problem, such as incorrect or expired certificates, or when a duplicate port (not necessarily secure) is specified in the configuration and therefore cannot be opened.
Procedure:
Starting Configuration Server manually
Prerequisites
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database is installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. To start Configuration Server on UNIX, go to the directory in which
Configuration Server is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: confserv [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start Configuration Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which Configuration Server is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which Configuration Server is installed, and type the following command line: confserv.exe [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Configuration Server Proxy
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
.
Note:
Configuration Server Proxy does not support additional command-line parameters specific to Configuration Server.
Deployment Guide 179
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
Procedure:
Starting Configuration Server Proxy manually
Prerequisites
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database is installed and running.
•
The Master Configuration Server is installed and running.
•
License Manager is installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. To start Configuration Server Proxy on UNIX, go to the directory in which
Configuration Server Proxy is installed and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: confserv [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start Configuration Server Proxy on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which Configuration Server Proxy is installed and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which Configuration Server Proxy is installed, and type the following command line: confserv.exe [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Configuration Manager
Procedure:
Starting Configuration Manager manually
Prerequisites
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database is installing and running.
•
Configuration Server is installed and running.
180 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
Note:
Configuration Manager runs only on Windows.
Start of procedure
1. To start Configuration Manager on Windows, do one of the following:
•
From the Windows
Start
menu, select
Programs > Genesys Solutions
> Framework > Configuration Manager > Start Configuration
Manager.
•
Go to the directory in which Configuration Manager is installed and double-click the
Sce.exe
icon.
2. If prompted, log in to Configuration Manager as described in Appendix D on page 317 .
End of procedure
License Manager
For information about starting License Manager, see the Genesys Licensing
Guide, which is available on the Genesys Documentation Library DVD.
Message Server
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
.
Procedure:
Starting Message Server manually
Prerequisites
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database is installed and running.
•
If you plan to use centralized logging, the DB Server that provides access to the Log Database must be installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. To start Message Server on UNIX, go to the directory in which Message
Server is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
Deployment Guide 181
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line:
MessageServer -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <Message Server Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start Message Server on UNIX, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which Message Server is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which Message Server is installed, and type the following command line:
MessageServer.exe -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <Message Server Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Local Control Agent
With default settings, Local Control Agent starts automatically every time a computer is started or rebooted. You can start LCA from the
Start > Programs menu on Windows.
For instructions on changing the default LCA port value, refer to
Step 2 in the procedure “Creating a Host object in Configuration Manager” on page 113 .
Configuring runlevel
Starting LCA on Linux Without Root Privileges
On Red Hat Enterprise Linux systems, you can configure LCA to start automatically when the Host starts, and without root privileges.
To configure the runlevel for LCA and Genesys Deployment Agent (GDA) on
Linux, do one of the following:
•
For runlevel 3:
LCA: ln -s /etc/init.d/gctilca /etc/rc3.d/S99gctilca
GDA: ln -s /etc/init.d/gctigda /etc/rc3.d/S98gctigda
•
For runlevel 5
LCA: ln -s /etc/init.d/gctilca /etc/rc5.d/S99gctilca
GDA: ln -s /etc/init.d/gctigda /etc/rc5.d/S98gctigda
Note:
Do not use
/etc/rc.local
, which will cause LCA and GDA to start at run levels 2, 3, 4, and 5, which you do not need.
182 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
Linux
Run Levels
There are various run levels available for Linux, and some of them are listed here. Refer to the Linux website for a complete list of run levels.
Table 7: Some Linux Run Levels
4
5
1
2
3
Run Level Description
0 System halt; no activity, the system can be safely powered down.
Single user; rarely used.
Multiple users, no Network File System (NFS); rarely used.
Multiple users, command-line (all-text mode) interface; the standard runlevel for most Linux-based server hardware.
User-definable.
Multiple users, graphical user interface; the standard runlevel for most Linux-based desktop systems.
Procedure:
Configuring different (but non-root) <user> and
<group> for LCA and GDA on Linux
Start of procedure
1. Install the LCA as root.
2. Select the <user> and <group> that you want to use as a replacement for the user “root” and the group “root”.
3. Ensure that the <user> and <group> each have the adequate privileges for the folders/directories in which LCA is installed, and for the other applications and modules that will be controlled/managed by LCA.
4. Change the owner and group for LCA:
a. Set the current working directory to the location where LCA is installed.
b. Enter the following commands and press
Enter
after each:
• chown <user> lca
• chgrp <group> lca
5. Change the current user from root to <user>.
6. On the command line, enter su - <user>
, and press
Enter
.
7. Set the setUID
and setGID
attributes for LCA. On the command line, enter chmod ug+s lca
, and press
Enter
.
This essentially equates the user/group ID to
<user>/<group>
when LCA is launched by another user.
Deployment Guide 183
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
8. Change the current user from <user> to root, and check how LCA will be launched using the root account, by entering the following command on the command line, pressing
Enter
after each:
• su -
• ./lca &
• ps -ef | grep lca
You should see something like this:
UID process
<user> ./lca
This indicates that the effective user for LCA is <user> and all applications launched by LCA should have the same effective user id <user>. Normally, this approach of setting UID and GID is used to elevate privileges, but in this case, it is used to downgrade privileges.
End of procedure
Genesys Deployment Agent
Genesys Deployment Agent is installed automatically with Local Control
Agent. Use one of the following procedures to start it.
Procedure:
Starting Genesys Deployment Agent on UNIX
Prerequisites
•
LCA is installed
Start of procedure
1. Open the directory in which Genesys Deployment Agent is installed.
2. Do one of the following:
•
To use the default port (5000), enter the following at the command line:
/etc/init.d/gctigda start
•
To use a different port:
a. In a text editor, open the script file
/etc/init.d/gctigda
that was created by the IP when Genesys Deployment Agent was installed.
b. Edit the following line in the script, entering the desired port:
/tmp/lcainst/gda <new port number>
>
/dev/null &
184 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
Note:
The port number entered in the command line must be the same value as the port
option configured in the rdm
section of the corresponding
Host
object. Refer to the Framework
Configuration Options Manual for information about this option.
c. Save the script.
d. Enter the following at the command line:
/etc/init.d/gctigda start
End of procedure
Procedure:
Starting Genesys Deployment Agent on Windows
Prerequisites
•
LCA is installed
Start of procedure
1. Open the directory in which Genesys Deployment Agent is installed.
2. Do one of the following:
•
To use the default port (
5000
), run the gda.exe
file.
•
To use a different port, enter the following command at the command line, with the desired port as the parameter of the command: gda.exe <new port number>
Note:
The port number entered in the command line must be the same value as the port
option configured in the rdm
section of the corresponding
Host
object. Refer to the Framework
Configuration Options Manual for information about this option.
End of procedure
Solution Control Server
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
.
Deployment Guide 185
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
Procedure:
Starting Solution Control Server manually
Prerequisites
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database is installed and running.
•
Configuration Server is installed and running.
•
If you are starting SCS in Distributed mode, or if HA support or SNMP functionality is required, License Manager must be installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. To start SCS on UNIX, go to the directory in which SCS is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: scs -host <Configuration Server host> -port <Configuration
Server port> -app <Solution Control Server Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
Note:
If you are operating on a dual-stack machine, and dual stack is enabled, add the following start-up parameter on the command line:
-transport-ip-version 6,4
This specifies what internet protocol versions you are using, in this case IPv4 and IPv6.
2. To start SCS on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which SCS is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which SCS is installed, and type the following command line: scs.exe -host <Configuration Server host> -port <Configuration
Server port> -app <Solution Control Server Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
186 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
Note:
If you are operating on a dual-stack machine, and dual stack is enabled, add the following start-up parameter on the command line:
-transport-ip-version 6,4
This specifies what internet protocol versions you are using, in this case IPv4 and IPv6.
End of procedure
Optional Command-line Parameter
This parameter can be used on UNIX or on Windows:
-f <SCS Configuration file>
SCS gets Configuration Server's settings from the SCS configuration file. Because the SCS configuration file contains a list of Configuration Servers to which it should try to connect, this option allows SCS to connect to
Configuration Server which is running in the Primary mode.
SCS Configuration File
For Windows, use the filename extension
.cfg
. For UNIX, use the extension
.conf
.
Here is a sample of the contents:
[backup_configserver] host=<backup CS host name> port=<backup CS port> name=<SCS application name> server=primary_configserver
[primary_configserver] host=<primary CS host name> port=<primary CS port> name=<SCS application name> server=backup_configserver
Deployment Guide 187
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components
Solution Control Interface
Starting Manually
Procedure:
Starting Solution Control Interface manually
Prerequisites
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database is installing and running.
•
Configuration Server is installed and running.
•
Solution Control Server is installed and running.
•
If you plan to use centralized logging, the DB Server that provides access to the Log Database must be installed and running.
Note:
SCI runs only on Windows.
Start of procedure
1. To start SCI on Windows, do one of the following:
•
From the Windows
Start
menu, select
Programs > Genesys Solutions
> Management Layer > Solution Control Interface Manager > Start
Solution Control Interface.
•
Go to the directory in which SCI is installed and double-click the
Sci.exe
icon.
2. If prompted, log in to SCI as described in Appendix D on page 317
.
End of procedure
SNMP Master Agent
The command-line parameters common to Framework server components are
.
Procedure:
Starting Genesys SNMP Master Agent manually
Prerequisites
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database is installing and running.
•
Configuration Server is installed and running.
188 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
•
If you plan to use SNMP alarm signaling, Message Server must be installed and running.
Start of procedure
1. To install SNMP Master Agent on UNIX, go to the directory in which
SNMP Master Agent is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: gsnmpmasteragent -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <SNMP Master Agent Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To install SNMP Master Agent on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which SNMP Master Agent is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which SNMP Master Agent is installed, and type the following command line: gsnmpmasteragent.exe -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <SNMP Master Agent Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Genesys Administrator
Information about starting and stopping Genesys Administrator is located in the Framework Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide.
Before starting Genesys Administrator, be sure that the following components are running:
•
DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database
•
Configuration Server
HA Proxy
Details on starting and stopping HA Proxy, if applicable, are located in the latest version of the Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific
T-Server.
Deployment Guide 189
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting Manually
If one or more HA Proxy components are required for T-Server connection to its switch, start HA Proxy before starting T-Server.
Before starting HA Proxy, be sure that the following components are running:
•
DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database
•
Configuration Server
T-Server
Details on starting and stopping T-Server are located in the latest version of the
Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server.
Before starting T-Server, be sure that the following components are running:
•
DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database
•
Configuration Server
•
License Manager
Note:
If an HA Proxy component is required for T-Server connection to its switch, you must start HA Proxy before starting T-Server.
Stat Server
Details on starting and stopping Stat Server are located in the documentation for your release of Stat Server.
Before starting Stat Server, be sure that the following components are running:
•
The DB Server that provides access to the Configuration Database
•
Configuration Server
Note:
For Stat Server to operate correctly, T-Server must also be running.
190 Framework 8.1
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Stopping Manually
Stopping Manually
Server Applications
Procedure:
Stopping server applications manually
Start of procedure
1. To stop a server application on UNIX, use one of the following commands:
• Ctrl+C
•
kill <process number>
2. To stop a server application on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Type
Ctrl+C
in the application’s console window.
•
Click
End Task
in the Windows Task Manager.
End of procedure
GUI Applications
Procedure:
Stopping GUI applications manually
Start of procedure
1. To stop a Windows-based GUI application, such as Configuration
Manager or Solution Control Interface, select
File > Exit in the main window.
2. To stop a web-based GUI application, such as Genesys Administrator, click
Logout
in the main page.
End of procedure
Starting and Stopping with Windows
Services Manager
The Genesys setup procedures on Windows operating systems automatically install Genesys daemon applications as Windows Services, with the autostart capability.
Deployment Guide 191
Chapter 7: Starting and Stopping Framework Components Starting and Stopping with Windows Services Manager
When starting an application installed as a Windows Service, make sure that the startup parameters of the application are correctly specified in the
ImagePath in the application folder that you can find in the Registry Editor.
The ImagePath must have the following value data:
<full path>\<executable file name> -service <Application Name as
Service> -host <Configuration Server host> -port <Configuration
Server port> -app <Application Name> -l <license address> where the command-line parameters common to Framework server
components are described on page 171
and where
-service
Name of the application running as a Windows service
(typically, it matches the application name specified in the
-app
command-line parameter).
Framework components installed as Windows services with autostart capability are automatically started each time a computer on which they are installed is rebooted.
You can start Framework components installed as Windows Services with manual start capability by clicking on
Start
in Services Manager.
Note:
Use the
Windows Services
window to change the startup mode from
Automatic to Manual and vice versa.
You can stop any Framework components installed as Windows Services, regardless of the start capability, with the
Stop
button in Services Manager.
192 Framework 8.1
chapter
8
Setting Up Redundant
Components
This chapter provides instructions for configuring primary and backup
Framework Servers.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Redundant Configuration DB Servers, page 194
Redundant Configuration Servers, page 203
Redundant Client DB Servers, page 220
Redundant Message Servers, page 227
Redundant Solution Control Servers, page 234
Redundant SNMP Master Agents, page 243
Introduction
The high availability architecture implies the existence of redundant applications, a primary and a backup, monitored by a management application.
The Configuration Layer and Management Layer support the warm standby redundancy type between redundant pairs of components within those layers.
Both components in the pair must be configured with the warm standby redundancy type. The redundant architecture is described in Framework
Architecture Help. Redundancy types are described in the Genesys Security
Deployment Guide.
Configuration Layer and Management Layer also support switchovers between redundant client applications, regardless of the redundancy type specified by those applications.
Deployment Guide 193
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
Notes:
• This chapter assumes that the primary server is already installed and operating. This chapter provides only instructions for installing the backup server and configuring the primary and backup servers to operate as a redundant pair.
• When configuring the backup component in a redundant pair, use the same account as for the primary component. Two applications with different accounts cannot be linked (configured) as a redundant high availability (HA) pair.
• If you need to make changes in the configuration of one or both servers in the HA pair. You must unlink the two servers before any changes are made. They can then be linked together and restarted.
Redundant Configuration DB Servers
This section describes how to set up redundant Configuration DB
Servers—that is, DB Servers that are dedicated to provide access to the
Configuration Database and that are not clients of Configuration Server.
To set up redundant DB Servers that provide access to databases other than the
Configuration Database (such as the Log Database) and that are not clients of
Configuration Server (such as Log DB Server), refer to “Redundant Client
Note:
In this section only, the term DB Server denotes a Configuration
DB Server, not a Client DB Server.
Redundancy
Redundant DB Servers support only the warm standby
redundancy type.
Setting Up Redundant Configuration DB Servers
The procedures in this section describe how to install and set up redundant
Configuration DB Servers.
Installation Recommendations
If you are installing the primary and backup DB Servers on the same host computer, it is recommended that you:
•
Install them in different directories.
•
Specify a different port number for each server.
194 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Once installed, the two Configuration DB Servers must be started from the same account.
Task Summary
The following table summarizes the steps required to set up redundant
Configuration DB Servers.
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Configuration DB Servers
Task
1. Install and configure the backup DB Server.
Related Procedures and Information
To install DB Server, use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Installing Configuration DB Server on UNIX” on page 88
• “Installing Configuration DB Server on Windows” on page 90
To configure DB Server, refer to “Configuring DB Server” on page 91
.
2. Configure an
Application object for the backup
DB Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
3. Create an
Application object for the primary
DB Server if one does not already exist.
4. Modify the
Application object for the primary
DB Server to work with backup DB Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Configuring a DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 116
• “Configuring a DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 117
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
5. Modify the configuration files for the primary
DB Server and the backup
DB Server as described in
Configuration Files” on page 199
.
Use the instructions in “Modifying the Configuration Files” on page 199 .
Deployment Guide 195
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Configuration DB Servers (Continued)
Task
6. Modify the backup DB
Server start file.
7. Synchronize options and ports between the redundant Configuration
DB Servers, if required.
Related Procedures and Information
Use the procedure “Modifying a backup Configuration DB Server start file” on page 201 .
Refer to “Synchronizing Options and Ports Between Primary and
Backup Servers” on page 304 for more information and detailed
instructions.
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Configuration DB Server
Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and click
New
.
2. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
a. Enter a descriptive name other than cfg_dbserver in the
Name
text box.
b. Select the appropriate template, as follows:
i. Click the search icon in the
Application Template
field to open a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a
DB Server template file is not listed, close the dialog box and import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
file from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
ii. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file.
iii. Click
OK
.
3. In the
Server Info
section:
a. Select the
Host
object on which this DB Server runs.
b. Specify the
Listening Port
that DB Server clients must use to connect to this DB Server.
196 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
c. In the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Configuration DB Server” on page 202
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup DB Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
d. Enter appropriate values for the other mandatory fields (those indicated by red asterisks).
e. Select
Auto-Restart
.
4. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Configuration DB Server
Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a DB Server template file is not listed, import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
file from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new DB Server
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, specify an application name other than cfg_dbserver.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, specify:
a. The host on which the backup DB Server is running.
b. The port that DB Server clients must use to connect to DB Server.
Deployment Guide 197
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
5. On the
Start Info
tab:
a. In the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Configuration DB Server” on page 202
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup DB Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
b. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
6. Click
OK
.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Configuration DB Server
Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable the primary Configuration DB Server to work with the backup Configuration DB Server.
Prerequisites
•
The primary and backup Configuration DB Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. Log in to Genesys Administrator.
2. Go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and double-click the
DB Server
Application
object cfg_dbserver
to open its properties.
3. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration tab:
a. Select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup DB Server you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
4. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
198 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Configuration DB Server
Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable the primary Configuration DB Server to work with the backup Configuration DB Server.
Prerequisites
•
The primary and backup Configuration DB Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the
DB Server
Application
object that you want to configure as the primary server.
2. On the
Server Info
tab:
a. Use the
Browse
button to locate and select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup DB Server you want to use as the Backup
Server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
3. On the
Start Info
tab, select
Auto-Restart
if required.
4. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Modifying the Configuration Files
The configuration file for the backup DB Server must be the same as that for the primary DB Server, with the following exceptions:
•
The host
value can be different if the backup DB Server is installed on a different host computer other than the primary server.
•
The port
value must be unique.
The configuration file for the backup DB Server may or may not have been created during installation, depending on the option you chose. In either case,
refer to “Configuring DB Server” on page 91
for instructions on configuring a
DB Server configuration file.
and for switchover to occur when necessary.
Deployment Guide 199
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
Procedure:
Adding LCA port information to the configuration files
Purpose: To allow the Management Layer to control both servers, and to allow switchover to occur when necessary.
Start of procedure
1. Modify the configuration file for the primary DB Server, if necessary.
a. Create the lca
section (if it does not already exist), and configure the lcaport
option in this section.
b. Save and close the file.
2. Modify the configuration file for the backup DB Server.
a. Create the lca
section and configure the lcaport
option in this section.
b. Save and close the file.
End of procedure
Sample configuration files are shown side-by-side in
show the areas affected by the notes in this section.
200 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
Primary DB Server
[dbserver] host=hostA port=4140 management-port =4141 dbprocesses_per_client=1 dbprocess_name=./dbclient_msql
# oracle_name=./dbclient_oracle informix_name=./dbclient_informix msql_name=./dbclient_msql sybase_name=./dbclient_sybase db2_name=./dbclient_db2 postgre_name=./dbclient_postgre
# connect_break_time=1200 tran_batch_mode=off
#
#------ dbserver log options -----
#
[log] verbose=standard all=stderr
#
#------ LCA options ------
#
[lca] lcaport=4999
Figure 8: Sample Configuration Files for Primary and Backup DB Servers.
Backup DB Server
[dbserver] host=hostB port=4150 management-port =4151 dbprocesses_per_client=1 dbprocess_name=./dbclient_msql
# oracle_name=./dbclient_oracle informix_name=./dbclient_informix msql_name=./dbclient_msql sybase_name=./dbclient_sybase db2_name=./dbclient_db2 postgre_name=./dbclient_postgre
# connect_break_time=1200 tran_batch_mode=off
#
#------ dbserver log options ------
#
[log] verbose=standard all=stderr
#
#------ LCA options ------
#
[lca] lcaport=4999
Procedure:
Modifying a backup Configuration DB Server start file
Purpose: To modify the backup Configuration DB Server start file run.sh
(on
UNIX) or startserver.bat
(on Windows) so the application can be started correctly.
Start of procedure
1. In a text editor, open the start file run.sh
(on UNIX) or startserver.bat
(on Windows).
2. Change the argument for the
-app parameter to the correct name of the backup DB Server application.
Deployment Guide 201
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration DB Servers
3. Add the following at the end of the command line:
-cfg -c <backup_db_server_config_file_name>
4. Save and close the file.
End of procedure
Starting a Backup Configuration DB Server
When starting a backup DB Server, use the following command-line parameters:
-c
To specify the name of the configuration file that contains configuration information for the backup DB Server
-app
To specify the name of the backup DB Server application
(see
).
For a description of the command-line parameters specific to DB Server, refer
.
Procedure:
Starting a backup Configuration DB Server
Prerequisites
•
The run.sh
file (on UNIX) or startserver.bat
file (on Windows) of the backup DB Server has been modified accordingly (see the procedure
“Modifying a backup Configuration DB Server start file” on page 201
).
Start of procedure
1. To start the backup DB Server on UNIX, do one of the following:
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, go to the directory in which the backup DB Server is installed, and do one of the following:
— To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: multiserver -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port>
-app <backup DB Server Application> -cfg
-c <backup DB Server configuration file>
202 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
2. To start the backup DB Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
To start as a Windows Service, refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
.
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, do one of the following:
— Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
— To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which the backup DB Server is installed, and double-click the file startServer.bat
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which the backup DB Server is installed, and type the following command line: multiserver.exe -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port>
-app <backup DB Server Application>
-cfg -c <backup DB Server configuration file>
End of procedure
Redundant Configuration Servers
Redundancy
Redundant Configuration Servers support only the warm standby
redundancy type.
Both the primary and backup Configuration Servers operate with the same
Configuration Database. The backup Configuration Server does not accept client connections or make changes to the data until its role is switched to primary. When the backup Configuration Server starts, it establishes a connection to the primary Configuration Server. During the operation, the primary Configuration Server sends notifications about all changes made in the
Configuration Database to the backup Configuration Server.
If there are any Configuration Server Proxies connected to the primary
Configuration Server when it fails, those Proxy servers connect to the backup
Configuration Server when it assumes the primary role.
Setting Up Redundant Configuration Servers
The procedures in this section describe how to install and set up redundant
Configuration Servers.
Deployment Guide 203
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
Warnings!
• To ensure proper redundancy, Genesys recommends running the primary and backup Configuration Servers on separate computers.
• When both the primary and backup Configuration Servers are running, do not remove the backup Configuration Server
Application
object from the configuration.
• You are responsible for ensuring that the configuration options of the primary and backup Configuration Servers are the same, with some exceptions: the log options in the primary
Configuration Server can differ from those in the backup
Configuration Server configuration.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Once installed, the two Configuration Servers must be started from the same account.
Task Summary
The following table summarizes the steps required to set up redundant
Configuration Servers.
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Configuration Servers
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. Configure an
Application object for the backup
Configuration Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
2. Install a backup
Configuration Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Installing a backup
Configuration Server on UNIX” on page 207
.
• To install on Windows, use the procedure “Installing a backup
Configuration Server on Windows” on page 210
.
3. Modify the primary
Configuration Server
Application
object to work with the backup
Configuration Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Modifying a primary Configuration Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 212
• “Modifying a primary Configuration Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 213
204 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Configuration Servers (Continued)
Task Related Procedures and Information
4. If you installed the backup
Configuration Server on
UNIX and chose to configure it after installation, create and modify the configuration file for the backup
Configuration Server.
Use the procedure “Creating the Configuration File for a Backup
Configuration Server” on page 214 .
5. If you installed the backup
Configuration Server on
UNIX, modify the run.sh file.
Use the procedure “Modifying a backup Configuration Server start file” on page 215
.
6. Synchronize options and ports between the redundant Configuration
Servers, if required.
7. Synchronize high-availability (HA) ports between the redundant Configuration
Servers.
Refer to “Synchronizing Options and Ports Between Primary and
Backup Servers” on page 304 for more information and detailed
instructions.
Refer to “Synchronizing HA Ports Between Redundant Configuration
.
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Configuration Server
Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and click
New
.
2. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
a. Enter a descriptive name other than confserv in the
Name
text box.
Deployment Guide 205
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
b. Select the appropriate template, as follows:
i. Click the search icon in the
Application Template
field to open a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a
Configuration Server template file is not listed, close the dialog box and import the
Configuration_Server_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
ii. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Configuration Server template file.
iii. Click
OK
.
3. In the
Server Info section:
a. Select the
Host
object on which this Configuration Server runs.
b. Specify the
Listening Ports
that Configuration Server clients must use to connect to this Configuration Server.
c. In the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Configuration Server” on page 217 .
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup Configuration Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
d. Enter appropriate values for the other mandatory fields (those indicated by red asterisks).
4. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Configuration Server
Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Configuration Server
206 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers template is not listed, import the
Configuration_Server_<current-version>.apd
template file from the
Management Framework product CD.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Configuration Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new backup Configuration
Server
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab of the
Properties
dialog box, enter a name for the backup Configuration Server
Application
object. The application template provides information for the application
Type
and
Version
.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, specify:
a. the host on which the backup Configuration Server is to be installed.
b. the communication ports that clients must use to connect to this
Configuration Server.
5. On the
Start Info
tab, in the
Working Directory, Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments
text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a Backup
Configuration Server” on page 217 .
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup
Configuration Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
6. Click
OK
to create the
Application
object for the backup Configuration
Server.
7. Open the
Properties
dialog box of the backup Configuration Server
Application
object.
8. Click the
Security
tab.
9. In the
Log On As group section, make sure that
This Account
is selected, and that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
10. Click
OK
to save any configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Installing a backup Configuration Server on UNIX
Note:
Refer to “Installing Configuration Server” on page 94 for general
comments about installing Configuration Server.
Deployment Guide 207
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
Prerequisites
•
The backup Configuration Server
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, locate and open the appropriate installation directory for your environment:
•
For an enterprise (single-tenant) environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/single/<operating_system>
•
For a multi-tenant environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/multi/<operating_system>
The installation script, called install.sh,
is located in the appropriate directory.
2. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
3. For the installation type, type
2 to select
Configuration Server Master
Backup, and press
Enter.
4. For the external authentication option, type the number corresponding to the type of External Authentication that will be used (LDAP, Radius, both, or neither), and press
Enter.
Tip: If you select LDAP, be prepared with the URL to access the LDAP
Server. For more information about LDAP configuration, see the
Framework External Authentication Reference Manual.
5. For the host name of this backup Configuration Server, do one of the following:
•
Specify the host name, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the host on which this backup Configuration
Server is being installed.
6. Specify the primary Configuration Server, as follows:
a. Specify the primary
Configuration Server Hostname,
and press
Enter.
b. Specify a value for the port
for the primary Configuration Server, and press
Enter.
c. Specify the
User name
of the primary Configuration Server, and press
Enter.
d. Specify the
Password
for the primary Configuration Server, and press
Enter.
7. Type the number corresponding to the
Application
object for the backup
Configuration Server that you created, and press
Enter.
8. Specify the full path of the destination directory, and press
Enter.
208 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
9. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to where you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then, type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then, type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as they are extracted and written to the destination directory.
10. For the product version to install, do one of the following:
•
Type
32
to select the 32-bit version, and press
Enter.
•
Type
64
to select the 64-bit version, and press
Enter.
11. Do one of the following:
•
Type y to configure the backup Configuration Server during installation ( now
), and press
Enter.
Go to
the configuration file. For information about Configuration Server configuration options and their values, refer to the Framework
Configuration Options Reference Manual.
•
Type n to not configure backup Configuration Server during installation. In this case, you have finished installing Configuration
Server; do not continue to the next step in this procedure. Before you can start Configuration Server, however, you must create a configuration file and set the configuration options in it. See
“Configuring Configuration Server” on page 103
.
12. For the
[confserv]
section:
a. Specify a value for the backup Configuration Server port,
and press
Enter.
b. Specify a value for the backup Configuration Server management port, and press
Enter.
13. For the
[soap]
section, do one of the following:
•
Specify a value for the SOAP port,
and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to leave this field blank if you are not using SOAP functionality.
14. For the
[dbserver]
section:
a. Specify the name of the DB Server host
, and press
Enter.
b. Specify a value for the DB Server port, and press
Enter.
c. Type the number corresponding to the database engine that this
Configuration Server uses ( dbengine
), and press
Enter.
Deployment Guide 209
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
d. Specify the name or alias of the DBMS that handles the Configuration
Database ( dbserver
), and press
Enter.
e. To specify the name of the Configuration Database ( dbname
), do one of the following:
•
If you are using an Oracle database engine (that is, you typed
3
in
Enter.
This value is not required for Oracle.
•
If you are using any other database engine, specify the name of the
Configuration Database, and press
Enter.
f. Specify the Configuration Database username,
and press
Enter.
g. To specify the Configuration Database password,
do one of the following:
•
Specify the password, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
if there is no password; that is, the password is empty, with no spaces.
End of procedure
When the installation process is finished, a message indicates that installation was successful. The process places the backup Configuration Server in the directory specified during the installation process. The installation script also writes a sample configuration file, confserv.sample, in the directory in which the backup Configuration Server is installed.
If you chose to configure the backup Configuration Server during installation, the sample configuration file, confserv.sample
, is renamed confserv.conf,
and the parameters specified in Steps 12 through 14
are written to this file.
Next Steps
If you chose to configure the backup Configuration Server after installation, you must manually rename the sample file as confserv.conf
and modify the configuration options before you start the backup Configuration Server. See
“Configuring Configuration Server” on page 103
.
Procedure:
Installing a backup Configuration Server on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Note:
Refer to “Installing Configuration Server” on page 94 for general
comments about installing Configuration Server.
210 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
Prerequisites
•
The backup Configuration Server
Application
object exists.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, locate and open the appropriate installation directory for your environment:
•
For an enterprise (single-tenant) environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/single/windows
•
For a multi-tenant environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/multi/windows
The installation script, called setup.exe,
is located in the appropriate directory.
2. Double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
3. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
4. Click
Next
on the
Welcome
page to proceed with the installation.
5. On the
Maintenance Setup Type
page, select
Install new instance of the application
and click
Next.
6. On the
Configuration Server Run Mode page, select
Configuration Server
Master Backup
and click
Next.
7. On the
Configuration Server Parameters
page:
a. Specify the
Server Port
and
Management Port
for Configuration Server.
b. Click
Next.
8. On the
Database Engine Option
page, select the database engine used by
Configuration Server, and click
Next.
9. On the
DB Server Parameters
page:
a. Specify the
DB Server Host
name and
DB Server Port.
b. Specify the Database
Server Name
and
Database Name.
c. Specify the Database
User Name
and
Password.
d. Click
Next
.
10. On the
Configuration Server External Authentication
page, select the type of external authentication Configuration Server uses, or select
None
if
Configuration Server is not using external authentication. Click
Next.
11. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page:
a. Specify the
Host name
and
Port
of the primary Configuration Server.
b. Specify the
User name
and
Password
for the primary Configuration
Server.
c. Click
Next.
Deployment Guide 211
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
12. In the upper pane of the
Select Application
page, select the backup
Configuration Server
Application
object that you just configured, and click
Next.
13. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the
destination directory, if specified in Step 5 on page 207
in the
Working
Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object. If you entered a period (
.
) in this property, or if the specified path is invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program
Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
format.
If necessary, click:
•
Browse
to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory
in the
Configuration Database.
•
Default
to reinstate the path specified in the
Working Directory property.
Click
Next
to proceed.
14. On the
Ready to Install
information page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
15. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
For more information about the Configuration Server configuration file, see
“Configuring Configuration Server” on page 103
. For information about
Configuration Server configuration options and their values, refer to the relevant chapters in the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual.
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Configuration Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable the primary Configuration Server to work with the backup
Configuration object.
Prerequisites
•
The primary and backup Configuration Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
212 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and click the Configuration Server
Application
object
(named confserv)
to open its properties.
2. On the
Configuration
tab, open the
Server Info
section.
3. Use the
Browse
button next to the
Backup Server
property to locate the backup Configuration Server
Application
object you want to use as the backup server.
4. Select
Warm Standby
as the
Redundancy Type.
5. Select
Auto-Restart.
6. Click
Save and Close to save the changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Configuration Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable the primary Configuration Server to work with the backup
Configuration object.
Prerequisites
•
The primary and backup Configuration Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the
Configuration Server
Application
object that you want to configure as a primary server.
2. Click the
Server Info
tab.
3. Use the
Browse
button next to the
Backup Server
property to locate the backup Configuration Server
Application
object you want to use as the backup server.
4. Select
Warm Standby
as the
Redundancy Type.
5. Click the
Start Info
tab.
6. Select
Auto-Restart.
7. Click the
Security
tab.
8. In the
Log On As
group section, select
This Account.
Make sure that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
Deployment Guide 213
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
9. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Creating the Configuration File for a Backup
Configuration Server
The configuration file for the backup Configuration Server must be the same as that for the primary Configuration Server with the following exceptions:
•
The name of the section in the backup Configuration Server configuration file must match the name of the backup Configuration Server
Application object.
•
The values for the port
and management-port
options in the backup
Configuration Server configuration file must be those values specified as
Communication Port
and
Management Port
values, respectively, during installation of the backup Configuration Server.
•
The log options can be different.
Specify the same database and the same user account for accessing this database, for both the primary and backup Configuration Servers. Note that specifying multiple DB Server sections that describe backup DB Servers is acceptable for the backup Configuration Server, as long as these sections are identical to similar sections in the configuration file of the primary
Configuration Server.
The No Default Access for New Users feature must be configured the same in both the primary and backup Configuration Servers. In other words, both
Configuration Servers must have the feature either configured or not.
Sample configuration files are shown side-by-side in
show the differences described in this section.
214 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
Primary Configuration Server
[confserv] port =2120 management-port =2121 server = dbserver encryption = false encoding = utf-8
[log] verbose = standard all = stderr
[hca] schema = none
[soap] port = 5001
[dbserver] host =hostA port =4140 dbengine =mssql dbserver =HostB dbname =gcti75 username =sa password =sa server = reconnect-timeout = 10 response-timeout = 600
Backup Configuration Server
[log] verbose = standard all = stderr
[hca] schema = none
[soap] port = 5001
[dbserver] host =hostA port =4140 dbengine =mssql dbserver =hostB dbname =gcti75 username =sa password =sa server = reconnect-timeout = 10 response-timeout = 600
[Backup CS] port=2130 management-port=2131 server=dbserver encryption=false encoding=utf-8
Figure 9: Sample Configuration Files for Primary and Backup Configuration Servers
Procedure:
Modifying a backup Configuration Server start file
Purpose: To enable the backup Configuration Server application to be started.
This procedure is required only for backup Configuration Servers installed on
UNIX platforms.
Start of procedure
1. In a text editor, open the run.sh file.
2. Add the following at the end of the command line in the file:
-s <section name> -c <configuration file name>
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 215
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
Synchronizing HA Ports Between Redundant Configuration
Servers
When Configuration Servers operate in a high-availability (HA) environment, the backup Configuration Server must be ready to take on the primary role when required. This requires that both Configuration Servers are running and that they must have the same information. When you configure redundant
Configuration Servers to operate with the warm standby
redundancy type, the primary Configuration Server uses the connection to the backup to deliver synchronization updates. Genesys recommends that you enable the Advanced
Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP), described on page 303
, for this connection.
Currently, Genesys Administrator does not support this functionality.
Note:
Starting with release 7.5, you can configure multiple ports for any application of type server
. When multiple ports are configured for a server in a warm standby
redundancy pair, the number of ports, their
Port IDs
, and the
Listening Mode
settings of the primary and backup servers must match respectively.
Procedure:
Synchronizing HA ports between redundant
Configuration Servers
Purpose: To enable Configuration Manager to synchronize options between primary and backup Configuration Servers automatically.
Start of procedure
1. Decide in advance what port on the primary Configuration Server you want to use as the port to which the backup Configuration Server connects.
If you want to use a new port, do the following:
a. On the
Server Info
tab of the properties of both the primary and backup servers, create a new port with the same
Port ID
.
b. In the
Port Properties
dialog box of each server, click
OK
to save the new configuration.
c. In the
Application Properties
dialog box of each server, click
Apply
.
2. If you want to use a new or existing port other than the default port of the primary server, do the following:
a. In the
Application Properties dialog box of the primary server, select the port to which the backup server will connect, and click
Edit
.
216 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
b. In the
Port Properties
dialog box, select the
HA sync
check box, and click
OK
. The
Port
section of the
Application Properties
dialog box now displays this port as a port for an HA synchronization connection.
Note:
If the
HA sync
check box is not selected, the backup server will connect to the default port of the primary server.
3. Click
Apply
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Starting a Backup Configuration Server
When starting a backup Configuration Server, specify the following values in the startup command line:
-s
-c
The name of the Configuration Server section within the configuration file for the backup Configuration Server
The name of the configuration file that contains configuration information for the backup Configuration
Server.
Note:
Make sure the name of the Configuration Server section is exactly the same as the name of the
Application
object for the backup
Configuration Server.
For a description of the command-line parameters specific to Configuration
Server, refer to the section “Configuration Server” on page 178
.
Procedure:
Starting a backup Configuration Server
Prerequisites
•
If the backup Configuration Server is installed on UNIX, make sure that the run.sh
file has been modified accordingly (see the procedure
“Modifying a backup Configuration Server start file” on page 215 ).
Start of procedure
1. To start the backup Configuration Server on UNIX, do one of the following:
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
Deployment Guide 217
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers
•
To start manually, go to the directory in which the backup
Configuration Server is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: confserv -s <section name> -c <configuration file name>
[<additional parameters as required>]
Note:
Make sure the name of the Configuration Server section is exactly the same as the name of the
Application
object for the backup
Configuration Server.
2. To start the backup Configuration Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
To start as a Windows Service, refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
.
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which the backup Configuration Server is installed, and double-click the file startServer.bat
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which the backup Configuration Server is installed, and type the following command line: confserv.exe -s <section name> -c <configuration file name>
[<additional parameters as required>]
Note:
Make sure the name of the Configuration Server section is exactly the same as the name of the
Application
object for the backup
Configuration Server.
End of procedure
Configuring ADDP Between Redundant Configuration
Servers
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP) is now supported between primary and backup Configuration Servers. Use the new configuration options protocol
, addp-timeout
, addp-remote-timeout
, and addp-trace
, setting them in
218 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Configuration Servers the configuration server section of the configuration files for both
Configuration Servers. For the primary Configuration Server, this section is called confserv
. For the backup Configuration Server, this section has the same name as the backup Configuration Server Application object.
protocol
Default Value: No default value
Valid Values: addp
Changes Take Effect: After restart
Specifies if ADDP is to be used between the primary and backup
Configuration Servers. If set to addp
, the ADDP protocol is implemented as defined by the ADDP-related configuration options
,
in the same configuration server section
( confserv
, or its equivalent in the backup Configuration Server) of the configuration file. If this option is set to any other value, or if it is not specified at all, ADDP is not used and the ADDP-related configuration options in this section are ignored.
Note:
The three following options below have the same names as other options that already exist in Genesys software. While all are used to implement ADDP, the placement of each option (in configuration section and, in some cases, configuration object) is unique and determines the use thereof. The options described below do not replace these pre-existing options.
addp-timeout
Default Value:
0
Valid Values:
0
–
3600
Changes Take Effect: After restart
Specifies the time interval, in seconds, that Configuration Server in backup mode waits before polling the other Configuration Server in the redundant pair.
If set to zero (
0
), Configuration Server in backup mode does not poll the other
Configuration Server in the redundant pair. This option applies only if the
option is addp
.
Note:
Because any Configuration Server can be in primary or backup mode, regardless of how it is configured, you must set this option to the same value in both the primary and backup Configuration Servers.
addp-remote-timeout
Default Value:
0
Valid Values: Any positive integer
Changes Take Effect: After restart
Specifies the time interval, in seconds, that Configuration Server in backup mode instructs the other Configuration Server in the redundant pair to use
Deployment Guide 219
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Client DB Servers when polling to check the connection between the two servers. If set to zero
(
0
), Configuration Server in backup mode does not send any such instruction.
This option applies only if the value of the
option is addp
.
Note:
Because any Configuration Server can be in primary or backup mode, regardless of how it is configured, you must set this option to the same value in both the primary and backup Configuration Servers.
addp-trace
Default Value: off
Valid Values: false
, no
, off
No ADDP trace occurs.
true
, yes
, on
, local remote both
, full
ADDP trace occurs on the side of the Configuration Server in backup mode.
ADDP trace occurs on the side of the Configuration Server in primary mode.
ADDP trace occurs at both the primary and backup Configuration
Servers.
Changes Take Effect: After restart
Determines whether ADDP messages are written to the primary and backup
Configuration Servers log files. This option applies only if the value of the
addp
.
Example
In the Configuration Server configuration file, the ADDP options would appear as follows:
[confserv]
...
protocol=addp addp-timeout=16 addp-remote-timeout=32 addp-trace=both
...
Redundant Client DB Servers
This section describes how to set up redundant Client DB Servers—that is,
DB Servers that provide access to databases other than the Configuration
Database (such as the Log Database), and that are clients of Configuration
Server (such as Log DB Server).
To set up redundant Configuration DB Servers that are dedicated to provide access to the Configuration Database, and that are not clients of Configuration
Server, refer to “Redundant Configuration DB Servers” on page 194 .
220 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Client DB Servers
Note:
In this section only, the term DB Server denotes a Client DB Server, not a Configuration DB Server.
Redundancy
Redundant DB Servers support only the warm standby
redundancy type.
Setting Up Redundant Client DB Servers
The procedures in this section describe how to install and set up redundant
Client DB Servers.
Installation Recommendations
If you are installing the primary and backup DB Servers on the same host computer:
•
Install them in different directories.
•
Specify a different port number for each server.
Prerequisites
Set up redundant Client DB Servers, such as Log DB Servers, only after you have installed and run the following:
•
Configuration Layer components as described in Chapter 5 on page 85 .
•
Management Layer components as described in Chapter 6 on page 121 .
•
Once installed, the two Client DB Servers must be started from the same account.
Task Summary
The table on the next page summarizes the steps required to install and set up redundant Client DB Servers.
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Client DB Servers
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. If the backup DB Server is to reside on a remote Host, you can deploy it to that
Host using Genesys
Administrator.
Use the procedure “Deploying Management Layer components using
Genesys Administrator” on page 127
.
Deployment Guide 221
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Client DB Servers
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Client DB Servers (Continued)
Task
4. Modify the
Application object for the primary
DB Server.
5. Synchronize options and ports between the redundant Client DB
Servers, if required.
Related Procedures and Information
2. Configure an
Application object for the backup
DB Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Configuring a backup Client DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 222 .
• “Configuring a backup Client DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 224 .
3. If you did not deploy the backup DB Server in
, install the backup
DB Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Manually installing Log
DB Server on UNIX” on page 139
.
• To install on Windows, use the procedure “Manually installing Log
DB Server on Windows” on page 141 .
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Modifying a primary Client DB Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 225 .
• “Modifying a primary Client DB Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 225 .
Refer to “Synchronizing Options and Ports Between Primary and
Backup Servers” on page 304 for more information and detailed
instructions.
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Client DB Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications.
222 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Client DB Servers
2. If the Application object for this backup DB Server does not already exist, create it as follows:
a. Click
New
.
b. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
i. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box.
ii. Select the appropriate template, as follows:
Click the search icon in the
Application Template
field to open a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a DB Server template file is not listed, close the dialog box and import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
file from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file.
Click
OK
.
3. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration
tab, enter the following information as required:
a. Select the
Host
object on which this backup DB Server runs.
b. Specify the
Listening Port
that DB Server clients must use to connect to this DB Server.
c. In the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Client DB Server” on page 226
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when the backup
DB Server starts, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
d. Enter appropriate values for the other mandatory fields (those indicated by red asterisks).
e. Select
Auto-Restart
, if required.
4. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 223
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Client DB Servers
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Client DB Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a DB Server template is not listed, import the
DBServer_<current-version>.apd
template file from the
Management Framework product CD.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the DB Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new DB Server
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box—for example,
LogDBS_backup.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, specify:
a. The host on which the backup DB Server is running.
b. The port that DB Server clients must use to connect to DB Server.
5. On the
Start Info
tab:
a. In the
Working Directory
,
Command Line
, and
Command Line Arguments text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Client DB Server” on page 226
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when the backup
DB Server starts, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
b. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
6. Click
OK
to save the configuration data.
End of procedure
224 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Client DB Servers
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Client DB Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable the primary Client DB Server to work with the backup
Client DB Server.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
The primary and backup Client DB Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications
, and double-click the DB Server
Application
object cfg_dbserver
to open its properties.
2. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration tab:
a. Select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup DB Server you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
c. Select
Auto-Restart
if required.
3. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Client DB Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable the primary Client DB Server to work with the backup
Client DB Server.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
Deployment Guide 225
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Client DB Servers
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
The primary and backup Client DB Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the
DB Server
Application
object that you want to configure as the primary server.
2. On the
Server Info
tab:
a. Use the
Browse
button to locate and select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup DB Server you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
3. On the
Start Info
tab, select
Auto-Restart
if required.
4. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Starting a Backup Client DB Server
When starting a backup Client DB Server, be sure to use the command line parameter
-app
to specify the name of the backup DB Server application. For a description of the command-line parameters specific to DB Server, refer to
Procedure:
Starting a backup Client DB Server
Start of procedure
1. To start the backup DB Server on UNIX, do one of the following:
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, go to the directory in which the backup DB Server is installed, and do one of the following:
— To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
226 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Message Servers
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: multiserver -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port>
-app <DB Server Application>
2. To start the backup DB Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
To start as a Windows Service, refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
.
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, do one of the following:
— Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
— To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which the backup DB Server is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which the backup DB Server is installed, and type the following command line: multiserver.exe -host <Configuration Server host>
-port <Configuration Server port> -app <DB Server
Application>
End of procedure
Redundant Message Servers
Redundancy
Redundant Message Servers support only the warm standby
redundancy type, with the addition that the data is synchronized between the primary and backup servers.
Setting Up Redundant Message Servers
The procedures in this section describe how to install and set up redundant
Message Servers.
Installation Recommendations
If you are installing the primary and backup Message Servers on the same host computer:
•
Install them in different directories.
Deployment Guide 227
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Message Servers
•
Specify a different port number for each server.
Prerequisites
•
Set up redundant Message Servers only after you install and run the
Configuration Layer components as described in Chapter 5 on page 85 .
•
Once installed, the two Message Servers must be started from the same account.
Task Summary
The following table summarizes the steps required to set up redundant
Message Servers.
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Message Servers
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. (Optional) If the backup
Message Server is to reside on a remote Host, you can deploy it to that Host using
Genesys Administrator.
Use the procedure “Deploying Management Layer components using
Genesys Administrator” on page 127
.
2. Configure an
Application object for the backup
Message Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Configuring a backup Message Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 229 .
• “Configuring a backup Message Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 230 .
3. If you did not deploy the backup Message Server in
, install it now.
4. Modify the primary
Message Server
Application
object.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Manually installing Message
.
• To install on Windows, use the procedure “Manually installing
Message Server on Windows” on page 152 .
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Modifying a primary Message Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 231 .
• “Modifying a primary Message Server Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 232 .
5. If you installed the backup
Message Server on UNIX, modify the run.sh file.
Use the procedure “Modifying a backup Message Server start file” on page 233 .
228 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Message Servers
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Message Servers (Continued)
Task
6. Synchronize options and ports between the redundant Message
Servers, if required.
Related Procedures and Information
Refer to “Synchronizing Options and Ports Between Primary and
Backup Servers” on page 304 for more information and detailed
instructions.
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Message Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications
.
2. If the
Application
object for this backup Message Server does not already exist, create it as follows:
a. Click
New
.
b. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
i. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box.
ii. Select the appropriate template, as follows:
Click the search icon in the
Application Template
field to open a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Message Server template file is not listed, close the dialog box and import the
Message_Server_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Message Server template file.
Click
OK
.
3. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration
tab, enter the following information, as required:
a. In the
Host
field, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host object on which this Message Server is running.
b. For each listening port that an application must use to connect to this
Message Server:
i. In the
Listening Ports
field, click
Add.
Deployment Guide 229
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Message Servers
ii. Enter the port properties in the
Port Info
dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
c. For the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
fields, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Message Server” on page 233
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install
Message Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to
Configuration Server.
d. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
4. Click
Save and Close in the toolbar to save the new object.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Message Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Message Server template is not listed, import the
Message_Server_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework product CD.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Message Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new Message Server
Application object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box—for example,
MS_backup.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, specify:
a. The host on which the backup Message Server is to be installed.
b. The communication ports that clients must use to connect to this
Message Server.
230 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Message Servers
5. On the
Start Info
tab:
a. In the
Working Directory, Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Message Server” on page 233
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup Message Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
b. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
6. Click
OK
to create the
Application
object for the backup Message Server.
7. Open the
Properties
dialog box of the backup Message Server
Application
object that you just created.
8. On the
Security
tab, select
This Account,
making sure that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
9. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Message Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable the primary Message Server to work with the backup
Message Server.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
The primary and backup Message Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and double-click the primary Message Server
Application object to open its properties.
Deployment Guide 231
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Message Servers
2. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration tab:
a. Select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup Message
Server you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
c. Select
Auto-Restart
if required.
3. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Message Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable the primary Message Server to work with the backup
Message Server.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
The primary and backup Message Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the Message
Server
Application
object that you want to configure as the primary server.
2. On the
Server Info
tab:
a. Use the
Browse
button to locate and select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup Message Server you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
3. On the
Start Info
tab, select
Auto-Restart
.
4. On the
Security
tab, select
This Account
, making sure that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
5. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
232 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Message Servers
Procedure:
Modifying a backup Message Server start file
Purpose: To enable the backup Message Server application to be started properly. This procedure is required only for backup Message Servers installed on UNIX platforms.
Start of procedure
1. In a text editor, open the run.sh file.
2. Add the following at the end of the command line in the file:
-host <configuration server host> -port <configuration server port>
-app <application object name>
End of procedure
Starting a Backup Message Server
When starting a backup Message Server, be sure to use the following command-line options:
-host
The name of the host on which Configuration Server is running.
-port
-app
The communication port that client applications must use to connect to Configuration Server.
The exact name of the backup Message Server
Application object as configured in the Configuration Database.
If you installed the backup Message Server on UNIX, make sure that you modified the run.sh
file accordingly (see the procedure “Modifying a backup
Message Server start file” on page 233 ). For a description of the command-line
parameters specific to Message Server, refer to “Message Server” on page 181 .
Procedure:
Starting a backup Message Server
Start of procedure
1. To start the backup Message Server on UNIX, do one of the following:
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
Deployment Guide 233
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
•
To start manually, go to the directory in which Message Server is installed, and do one of the following:
— To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line:
MessageServer -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <backup Message Server
Application> [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start the backup Message Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
To start as a Windows Service, refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
.
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, do one of the following:
— Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
— To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which Message Server is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which Message Server is installed, and type the following command line:
MessageServer.exe -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <backup Message Server
Application> [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Redundant Solution Control Servers
Redundancy
Redundant Solution Control Servers support only the warm standby
redundancy type, with the addition that the data is synchronized between the primary and backup servers.
234 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
Setting Up Redundant Solution Control Servers
The procedures in this section describe how to install and set up redundant
Solution Control Servers.
Installation recommendations
If you are installing the primary and backup Solution Control Servers on the same host computer:
•
Install them in different directories.
•
Specify a different port number for each server.
Prerequisites
•
Set up redundant Solution Control Servers only after you install and run
the Configuration Layer components as described in Chapter 5 on page 85
.
•
Once installed, the two Solution Control Servers must be started from the same account.
Task Summary
The following table summarizes the steps required to set up redundant Solution
Control Servers.
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Solution Control Servers
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. (Optional) If the backup
Solution Control Server is to reside on a remote Host, you can deploy it to that
Host using Genesys
Administrator.
Use the procedure “Deploying Management Layer components using
Genesys Administrator” on page 127
.
2. Configure an
Application object for the backup
Solution Control Server.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
3. If you did not deploy the backup Solution Control
now.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Manually installing Solution
Control Server on UNIX” on page 156
.
• To install on Windows, use the procedure “Manually installing
Solution Control Server on Windows” on page 157
.
Deployment Guide 235
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant Solution Control Servers (Continued)
Task Related Procedures and Information
4. Modify the primary
Solution Control Server
Application
object.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
5. If you installed the backup
Solution Control Server on
UNIX, modify the run.sh file.
Use the procedure “Modifying a backup Solution Control Server start file” on page 240 .
6. Synchronize HA ports between the redundant
Solution Control Servers.
Refer to “Synchronizing HA Ports Between Redundant Solution
Control Servers” on page 240 for more information and detailed
instructions.
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Solution Control Server
Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications
.
2. If the
Application
object for this backup Solution Control Server does not already exist, create it as follows:
a. Click
New
.
b. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
i. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box.
ii. Select the appropriate template, as follows:
Click the search icon in the
Application Template
field to open a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Solution Control Server template file is not listed, close the dialog box and import
Solution_Control_Server_<current-version>.apd
from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
236 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Solution Control Server template file.
Click
OK
.
3. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration
tab, enter the following information, as required:
a. In the
Host
field, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host object on which this Solution Control Server is running.
b. For each listening port that an application must use to connect to this
Solution Control Server:
i. In the
Listening Ports
field, click
Add.
ii. Enter the port properties in the
Port Info
dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
c. For the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
fields, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Solution Control Server” on page 242
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install
Solution Control Server, but only if the Installation Package can connect to Configuration Server.
d. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
4. Click
Save and Close in the toolbar to save the new object.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a backup Solution Control Server
Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Solution Control Server
Deployment Guide 237
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers template is not listed, import the
Solution_Control_Server_<current-version>.apd
template file from the
Management Framework CD.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Solution Control Server template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new Solution Control,
Server
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box—for example,
SCS_backup.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, specify:
a. The host on which the backup Solution Control Server is to be installed.
b. The communication ports that clients must use to connect to this
Solution Control Server.
5. On the
Start Info
tab:
a. In the
Working Directory, Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup Solution Control Server” on page 242
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup Solution Control Server, but only if the Installation
Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
b. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
6. Click
OK
to create the
Application
object for the backup Solution Control
Server.
7. Open the
Properties
dialog box of the backup Solution Control Server
Application
object.
8. On the
Security
tab, select
This Account,
making sure that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
9. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Solution Control Server
Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable the primary Solution Control Server to work with the backup Solution Control Server.
238 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
The primary and backup Solution Control Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications
, and double-click the primary Solution Control Server
Application
object to open its properties.
2. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration tab:
a. Select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup Solution
Control Server you want to use as the
Backup Server
.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
c. Select
Auto-Restart
if required.
3. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary Solution Control Server
Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable the primary Solution Control Server to work with the backup Solution Control Server.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
The primary and backup Solution Control Server
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the Solution
Control Server
Application
object that you want to configure as the primary server.
Deployment Guide 239
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
2. On the
Server Info
tab:
a. Use the
Browse
button to locate and select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup Solution Control Server you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
3. On the
Start Info
tab, select
Auto-Restart.
4. On the
Security
tab, select
This Account,
making sure that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
5. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a backup Solution Control Server start file
Purpose: To enable the backup Solution Control Server application to be started properly. This procedure is required only for backup Solution Control
Servers installed on UNIX platforms.
Start of procedure
1. In a text editor, open the run.sh file.
2. Add the following at the end of the command line in the file:
-host <configuration server host> -port <configuration server port>
-app <Solution Control Server application object name>
End of procedure
Synchronizing HA Ports Between Redundant Solution
Control Servers
When Solution Control Servers operate in a high-availability (HA) environment, the backup SCS must be ready to take on the primary role when required. This requires that both Solution Control Servers are running and that they must have the same information. When you configure redundant Solution
Control Servers to operate with the warm standby
redundancy type, the primary
SCS uses the connection to the backup to deliver synchronization updates.
Genesys recommends that you enable the Advanced Disconnect Detection
Protocol (ADDP), described on page 303 , for this connection.
Currently, Genesys Administrator does not support this functionality.
240 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
Note:
Starting with release 7.5, you can configure multiple ports for any application of type server
. When multiple ports are configured for a server in a warm standby
redundancy pair, the number of ports, their
Port IDs
, and the
Listening Mode
settings of the primary and backup servers must match respectively.
Procedure:
Synchronizing HA ports between redundant Solution
Control Servers
Purpose: To enable Configuration Manager to synchronize the options between primary and backup Solution Control Servers automatically.
Start of procedure
1. Decide in advance the port on the primary SCS that you want to use as the port to which the backup SCS connects. If you want to use a new port, do the following:
a. On the
Server Info
tab of the properties of both the primary and backup servers, create a new port with the same
Port ID
.
b. In the
Port Properties
dialog box of each server, click
OK
to save the new configuration.
c. In the
Application Properties
dialog box of each server, click
Apply
.
2. If you want to use a new or existing port other than the default port of the primary server, do the following:
a. In the
Application Properties dialog box of the primary server, select the port to which the backup server will connect, and click
Edit
.
b. In the
Port Properties
dialog box, select the
HA sync
check box, and click
OK
. The
Port
section of the
Application Properties
dialog box now displays this port as a port for an HA synchronization connection.
Note:
If the
HA sync
check box is not selected, the backup server will connect to the default port of the primary server.
3. Click
Apply
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 241
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant Solution Control Servers
Starting a Backup Solution Control Server
When starting a backup SCS, be sure to use the following command-line options:
-host
-port
The name of the host on which Configuration Server is running.
The communication port that client applications must use to connect to Configuration Server.
-app
The exact name of the backup SCS
Application
object as configured in the Configuration Database.
If you installed the backup SCS on UNIX, make sure that you modified the run.sh
file accordingly (see the procedure “Modifying a backup Solution
Control Server start file” on page 240
). For a description of the command-line
parameters specific to SCS, refer to “Solution Control Server” on page 185 .
Procedure:
Starting a backup Solution Control Server
Start of procedure
1. To start the backup SCS on UNIX, do one of the following:
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, go to the directory in which the backup SCS is installed, and do one of the following:
— To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: scs -host <Configuration Server host> -port <Configuration
Server port> -app <backup Solution Control Server
Application> [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start the backup Message Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
To start as a Windows Service, refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
.
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, do one of the following:
— Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
242 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
— To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which the backup SCS is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which the backup SCS is installed, and type the following command line: scs.exe -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <Solution Control Server
Application> [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Redundant SNMP Master Agents
The Management Layer supports configuration with a redundant pair of SNMP master agents. Redundant configuration assumes the presence of two SNMP master agent applications, one primary and one backup. When Solution
Control Server loses a connection with the primary SNMP master agent, SCS switches all NMS communications to the backup SNMP master agent.
If your SNMP master agent application can operate in a redundant mode (as does, for example, Genesys SNMP Master Agent), and you would like to deploy this configuration, follow the instructions in this section.
Redundancy
Redundant SNMP Master Agents support only the warm standby
redundancy type.
Setting Up Redundant SNMP Master Agents
The procedures in this section describe how to install and set up redundant
SNMP Master Agents.
Installation Recommendations
If you are installing the primary and backup SNMP Master Agents on the same host computer:
•
Install them in different directories.
•
Specify a different port number for each server.
Deployment Guide 243
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
The SNMP Master Agent to be designated as primary is deployed as
described in “Deploying SNMP Master Agent” on page 162
.
•
Once installed, the two SNMP Master Agents must be started from the same account.
Task Summary
The table on the next page summarizes the steps required to set up redundant
SNMP Master Agents.
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant SNMP Master Agents
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. (Optional) If the backup
SNMP Master Agent is to reside on a remote Host, you can deploy it to that
Host using Genesys
Administrator.
Use the procedure “Deploying Management Layer components using
Genesys Administrator” on page 127
.
2. Configure an
Application object for the backup
SNMP Master Agent.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
3. If you did not deploy the backup SNMP Master
now.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Manually installing SNMP
Master Agent on UNIX” on page 166 .
• To install on Windows, use the procedure “Manually installing
SNMP Master Agent on Windows” on page 167
.
4. Modify the primary SNMP
Master Agent
Application object.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Modifying a primary SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 248
• “Modifying a primary SNMP Master Agent Application object using
Configuration Manager” on page 248
244 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
Task Summary: Setting Up Redundant SNMP Master Agents (Continued)
Task Related Procedures and Information
5. If you installed the backup
SNMP Master Agent on
UNIX, modify the run.sh file.
Use the procedure “Modifying a backup SNMP Master Agent start file” on page 249
.
6. Synchronize options and ports between the redundant SNMP Master
Agents, if required.
Refer to “Synchronizing Options and Ports Between Primary and
Backup Servers” on page 304 for more information and detailed
instructions.
Procedure:
Configuring a backup SNMP Master Agent Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
The SNMP Master Agent to be designated as primary is deployed as
described in “Deploying SNMP Master Agent” on page 162
.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications
.
2. If the
Application
object for this backup SNMP Master Agent does not already exist, create it as follows:
a. Click
New
.
b. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
i. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box.
ii. Select the appropriate template, as follows:
Click the search icon in the
Application Template
field to open a
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If an SNMP Master Agent template file is not listed, close the dialog box and import the template file
SNMP_Master_Agent_<current-version>.apd
from the
Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
Deployment Guide 245
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
In the
Browse
dialog box, select the SNMP Master Agent template file.
Click
OK
.
3. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration
tab, enter the following information, as required:
a. In the
Host
field, click the magnifying glass icon to select the
Host object on which this SNMP Master Agent is running.
b. For each listening port that an application must use to connect to
SNMP Master Agent:
i. In the
Listening Ports
field, click
Add.
ii. Enter the port properties in the
Port Info
dialog box.
iii. Click
OK.
c. For the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
fields, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup SNMP Master Agent” on page 250
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup SNMP Master Agent, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
d. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
4. Click
Save and Close
in the toolbar to save the new object. The new object will appear in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a backup SNMP Master Agent Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
The SNMP Master Agent to be designated as primary is deployed as
described in “Deploying SNMP Master Agent” on page 162
.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
246 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Environment > Applications folder and select
New > Application
, which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If an SNMP Master Agent template is not listed, import the
SNMP_Master_Agent_<current-version>.apd
template file from the
Management Framework product CD.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the SNMP Master Agent template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new SNMP Master Agent
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box—for example,
SNMP_MA_backup.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, specify:
a. The host on which the backup SNMP Master Agent is to be installed.
b. The communication ports that clients must use to connect to this
SNMP Master Agent.
5. On the
Start Info
tab:
a. In the
Working Directory, Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting a
Backup SNMP Master Agent” on page 250
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory
and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments
text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install the backup SNMP Master Agent, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
b. Select the
Auto-Restart
check box.
6. Click
OK
to create the
Application
object for the backup SNMP Master
Agent.
7. Open the
Properties
dialog box of the backup SNMP Master Agent
Application
object.
8. On the
Security
tab, select
This Account,
making sure that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
9. Click
OK
to save the configuration data.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 247
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
Procedure:
Modifying a primary SNMP Master Agent Application object using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To enable the primary SNMP Master Agent to work with the backup
SNMP Master Agent.
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
The SNMP Master Agent to be designated as primary is deployed as
described in “Deploying SNMP Master Agent” on page 162
.
•
The primary and backup SNMP Master Agent
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications
, and double-click the primary SNMP Master Agent
Application
object to open its properties.
2. In the
Server Info
section of the
Configuration tab:
a. Select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup SNMP
Master Agent you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
c. Select
Auto-Restart
.
3. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a primary SNMP Master Agent Application object using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To enable the primary SNMP Master Agent
Application
object to work with the backup SNMP Master Agent.
248 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components are installed and running as described in
.
•
Management Layer components are installed and running as described in
•
The SNMP Master Agent to be designated as primary is deployed as
described in “Deploying SNMP Master Agent” on page 162
.
•
The primary and backup SNMP Master Agent
Application
objects exist.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the SNMP
Master Agent
Application
object that you want to configure as the primary server.
2. On the
Server Info
tab:
a. Use the
Browse
button to locate and select the
Application
object corresponding to the backup SNMP Master Agent you want to use as the backup server.
b. Select
Warm Standby
as the redundancy type.
3. On the
Start Info
tab, select
Auto-Restart.
4. On the
Security
tab, select
This Account
, making sure that the account name matches the name of the Master Account.
5. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Modifying a backup SNMP Master Agent start file
Purpose: To enable the backup SNMP Master Agent application to be started properly. This procedure is required only for backup Solution Control Servers installed on UNIX platforms.
Start of procedure
1. In a text editor, open the run.sh file.
2. Add the following at the end of the command line in the file:
-host <configuration server host> -port <configuration server port>
-app <backup SNMP Master Agent Application object name>
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 249
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
Starting a Backup SNMP Master Agent
When starting a backup Message Server, be sure to use the following command-line options:
-host
-port
The name of the host on which Configuration Server is running.
The communication port that client applications must use to connect to Configuration Server.
-app
The exact name of the backup SNMP Master Server
Application
object as configured in the Configuration
Database.
If you installed the backup SNMP Master Server on UNIX, make sure that you modified the run.sh
file accordingly (see the procedure “Modifying a backup
SNMP Master Agent start file” on page 249 ). For a description of the
command-line parameters specific to SNMP Master Agent, refer to “SNMP
.
Procedure:
Starting a backup SNMP Master Agent
Start of procedure
1. To start the backup SNMP Master Agent on UNIX, go to the directory in which Genesys SNMP Master Agent is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: gsnmpmasteragent -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <SNMP Master Agent Application>
[<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start the backup SNMP Master Agent on Windows, do one of the following:
•
To start as a Windows Service, refer to “Starting and Stopping with
Windows Services Manager” on page 191
.
•
To start from Genesys Administrator or SCI, refer to “Starting and
Stopping with the Management Layer” on page 173 .
•
To start manually, do one of the following:
— Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
250 Framework 8.1
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
— To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which SNMP Master Agent is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
— To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which SNMP Master Agent is installed, and type the following command line: gsnmpmasteragent.exe -host <Configuration Server host> -port
<Configuration Server port> -app <SNMP Master Agent
Application> [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 251
chapter 8: Setting Up Redundant Components Redundant SNMP Master Agents
252 Framework 8.1
Chapter
9
Setting Up the Rest of Your
System
Now that you deployed the Configuration Layer and, if required, the
Management Layer, you can deploy the rest of the Framework components and the contact center environment. This chapter provides a brief overview of this process.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Contact Center Objects, page 255
Recommended Order
Note:
If you are using Genesys Configuration Wizards, this section does not apply to you. Configuration Wizards automatically use the recommended order.
Manual deployment of the other Framework components and contact center environment objects involves:
•
Configuring the components using Genesys Administrator or
Configuration Manager. Refer to the Help files for the respective interfaces for more information.
•
Manually installing the configured components.
Deployment Guide 253
Chapter 9: Setting Up the Rest of Your System Recommended Order
Before you proceed, make sure that the Configuration Layer and Management
Layer components are installed, configured, and running (see Chapter 5 on page 85
, respectively). To help you prepare accurate configuration information and become familiar with the configuration
process, read Chapter 3, “Planning the Installation,” on page 39
for help with object-configuration information.
Follow this order for the manual deployment of the other Framework components and contact center environment objects:
1. Media Layer:
T-Server
HA Proxy for a specific type of T-Server (if applicable)
Note:
Deployment instructions for T-Server and HA Proxy (if applicable) are located in the latest version of the Framework T-Server
Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server.
2. Telephony Objects:
Switching Offices
Switches
Agent Logins
DNs
Note:
Configuration instructions for telephony objects are located in the latest version of the Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server.
3. Contact Center Objects:
Access Groups
Skills
Persons
Agent Groups
Places
Place Groups
4. Services Layer:
Stat Server
DB Server for solutions
Genesys recommends registering only those entities that you plan to use in the current configuration. The more data in the Configuration Database, the longer it takes for your system to start up, and the longer it takes to process configuration data. Remember that adding configuration objects to the
Genesys Configuration Database does not cause any interruption in the contact center operation.
254 Framework 8.1
Chapter 9: Setting Up the Rest of Your System Media Layer
Depending on how much work it is to configure all applications and objects, consider registering more
User
objects first, with a set of privileges that lets them perform configuration tasks.
Warning!
When configuring redundant applications, do not select the redundancy type
Not Specified
unless using a switchover mechanism other than that provided by the Management Layer. It is acceptable, however, to leave the redundancy type
Not Specified for nonredundant applications (that is, applications that do not have backup servers associated with them).
Media Layer
Component (T-Server and HA Proxy, if applicable) configuration and installation for the Media Layer is covered in the latest version of the
Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server. Also covered in that Guide is information about deploying components for redundant and multi-site configurations.
Telephony Objects
The configuration of Configuration Database objects for the telephony equipment used in the contact center is described in the latest version of the
Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server.
Contact Center Objects
Configure Configuration Database objects for the contact center personnel and related entities.
Access Groups
Before deciding what kind of Access Groups you must configure, look at the default Access Groups the Configuration Layer supports and the default access control settings in general.
The default security system may cover all of your needs. If a more complex access control system makes sense for your contact center, Genesys recommends managing it through Access Groups and folders rather than at the level of individuals and objects.
Deployment Guide 255
Chapter 9: Setting Up the Rest of Your System Contact Center Objects
To define an Access Group and its permissions:
1. Identify groups of people that are handling specific activities in the customer interaction network.
2. Create the required
Access Group
objects.
3. Set Access Group privileges with respect to the object types, using the folders’
Permissions or
Security
tabs, as appropriate.
In addition, to simplify the security settings, make sure that permissions are set and changed recursively using the permission propagation mechanism.
Skills
Define agent skills that might be considered as criteria for interaction processing. Skills are configured as independent configuration objects; any
Agent can be associated with more than one configured Skill. Therefore, it may be more practical to register Skills before the Agents are configured.
Users
There are two major categories of Users: Agents and Non-agents. The latter category includes all Users other than agents that need access to the CTI applications; for example, Center Administrators, Data Network and
Telephony Network personnel, designers of interaction-processing algorithms, or Supervisors.
The characteristics of your business environment and your current priorities completely determine the order of registering Persons. Most often, you will want to first configure a few registered Non-agents with a high level of access to help you set up the Configuration Database.
Assign Agent Logins and Skills when registering Agents.
Note:
You create Agent Logins when you are configuring the Switch object.
Refer to the latest version of the Framework T-Server Deployment
Guide for your specific T-Server for instructions.
If a few Agents have a certain Skill of the same level, consider using a wizard that adds the Skill to multiple
User
objects after you create them. To launch the wizard, select two or more
User
objects that have the
Is Agent
check box selected, right-click, and select
Manage Skills
. Refer to Framework
Configuration Manager Help for more information.
Remember that the Configuration Layer requires that you assign a unique user name to each User, including agents. Consider using employee IDs configured in
User
objects as default user names and passwords.
Starting in release 7.6, new Users by default are not automatically assigned to any access group, by default. They must be assigned to one or more Access
Groups explicitly. Users created in release 7.5 or earlier keep their existing set
256 Framework 8.1
Chapter 9: Setting Up the Rest of Your System Contact Center Objects of permissions and Access Group assignments. If you want new users to be added automatically to predefined Access Groups, as was the behavior in release 7.5 and earlier, you must manually disable this feature using the configuration option no-default-access.
Refer to the chapter “No Default
Access for New Users” in the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for more information about this feature, and how to use or disable it.
Some GUI applications also use Ranks to determine what functionality is made available to the User currently logged in. Unless Agents are required to use rank-dependent applications in their work, you do not have to assign any specific Ranks to them.
Ranks, as well as access privileges, are more important when registering non-agents. When registering non-agents, consider the role they have in the customer interaction business. Do these
Users
need to monitor agents’ performance? Will they need to configure the telephony resources? Are they going to design routing strategies? Having answers to these questions makes it easier to correctly set up the access privileges with respect to configuration objects, and Ranks with respect to different applications objects.
Remember that Ranks with respect to applications are not the same as access privileges with respect to the configuration objects. You must explicitly define
Ranks. Access privileges are assigned by default, according to whether the
User is an agent or not.
Genesys does not recommend changing the default access-control setting, unless absolutely necessary. Remember, the more complex the security system implemented, the more difficult it becomes to administer the database, and the more it affects the performance of the Configuration Layer software.
Note:
See also the Security Considerations section of Chapter 3, “Planning the Installation,” on page 39
.
Agent Groups
Agent Groups are an indispensable element of almost every contact center.
Remember that you can assign an agent to more than one group at a time. If you create agent groups based on Skills, use the
Find
command or the
Dependency
tab of a Skill to quickly identify all the agents that have the Skill in question.
Places
If you use Genesys CTI applications to distribute calls to individual agents or agent groups that are not limited by the switch ACD configuration, set up
Places and assign individual DNs to them. Because a typical Place consists of more than one DN, prepare the actual layout of the numbering plan to correctly configure the Places, and assign DNs to them.
Deployment Guide 257
Chapter 9: Setting Up the Rest of Your System Services Layer
Place Groups
Define Place Groups and assign individual Places to them only if they will be used for distributing calls to groups of Places and, therefore, you will need to collect availability information and real-time statistics for such groups.
Services Layer
Genesys recommends that you configure and install components of the
Services Layer when you deploy the solution they will serve.
Stat Server
The configuration and installation procedures for Stat Server are described in the documentation for Stat Server.
DB Server for Solutions
The configuration and installation procedures for a DB Server being used to access databases other than the Configuration Database and Log Database are
identical to those for the DB Server for the Log Database (see “Deploying Log
). The procedures are also described in the Framework
DB Server User’s Guide.
Next Steps
After you have completed all of this configuration, the Framework instance is configured and registered in the Configuration Database. You can now use
Wizard Manager to deploy any solution by using the appropriate Configuration
Wizard.
258 Framework 8.1
Chapter
10
Setting Up Geographically
Distributed Systems
This chapter describes Genesys Framework support for geographically distributed systems. It also describes how to set up Configuration Server Proxy and Distributed Solution Control Servers, and how to configure their clients to work with them.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Configuration Server Proxy, page 261
Distributed Solution Control Servers, page 276
Overview
Large enterprises often run contact-center operations at numerous locations worldwide. Yet, for Genesys software to function as a single unit it is usually critical that all configuration objects comprising an enterprise be stored in a single Genesys Configuration Database. Under these circumstances, network delays, component failures, and similar factors might complicate or slow down the operations of a large enterprise.
However, by operating two Framework components in different modes you can somewhat simplify the operation of a geographically distributed installation with a single Configuration Database:
•
Use Configuration Server operating in Proxy mode (referred to as
Configuration Server Proxy) in addition to the master Configuration Server to distribute configuration-related tasks among the sites.
Deployment Guide 259
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Architecture
•
Operate two or more Solution Control Servers in Distributed mode
(referred to as Distributed Solution Control Servers), to distribute management-related tasks among the sites.
Licensing Requirements
Starting Configuration Server in Proxy mode or Solution Control Server in
Distributed mode requires special licenses. Refer to the Genesys Licensing
Guide for more information.
Architecture
shows how Configuration Server Proxy and Distributed SCS fit into a Genesys configuration environment.
Figure 10: Geographically Distributed Installation
Configuration Server Proxy Functions
Configuration Server Proxy:
•
Receives subscription requests from clients and handles them without passing the requests to Configuration Server.
•
Stores in internal memory all configuration data it receives from
Configuration Server.
260 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
•
Receives notifications on data changes from Configuration Server, updates internal memory, and passes notifications to clients.
•
Receives read-data requests from clients and responds to them using the data stored in the internal memory.
Note:
A hierarchical configuration of Configuration Server Proxies—for example a Configuration Server Proxy application working with another Configuration Server Proxy that operates directly with
Configuration Server—is not supported.
Distributed Solution Control Server Functions
Distributed Solution Control Server:
•
Performs the same functions of monitoring, control, alarm detection, and alarm processing as the SCS in non-Distributed mode, but on a subset of hosts, applications and solutions explicitly assigned to this SCS in the
Configuration Database.
•
Communicates all the updates to statuses of the assigned objects to other
Distributed Solution Control Servers, using a dedicated Message Server.
•
Receives notifications about updates to the status of non-assigned objects
(that is, objects assigned to other Solution Control Servers) from Message
Server.
•
When receiving a control command on an object not assigned to this SCS, forwards this command via Message Server to the appropriate SCS.
When to Use This Architecture
Genesys recommends using Configuration Server Proxy and Distributed
Solution Control Server in a multi-site and/or multi-tenant environments.
Using Configuration Server Proxy in a single-site environment does not reduce network traffic or increase system robustness.
Configuration Server Proxy
In a geographically distributed configuration environment, the master
Configuration Server is running at the site where the Configuration Database is located. Configuration Server Proxies at multiple remote sites are connecting to the master Configuration Server.
Instead of sending all the requests to Configuration Server, Configuration
Server clients that require read-only access to Configuration Server can operate with one or more Configuration Server Proxies. Configuration Server Proxy passes messages to and from Configuration Server. Moreover, the proxy keeps the configuration data in its memory and responds to client data requests. Any
Deployment Guide 261
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
External
Authentication
Default Behavior
Writable
Configuration
Server Proxy
configuration data updates are passed immediately to Configuration Server
Proxy, so that it is always up to date; no additional configuration is required to specify an update interval.
Using Configuration Server Proxy increases the robustness of the whole system, decreases the number of client connections to Configuration Server, and minimizes network traffic. That is, clients continue their operations, and new clients can start theirs, when Configuration Server fails. Also, after
Configuration Server recovers, the client reconnect takes far less time than if all clients were directly connected to Configuration Server.
In Genesys configuration terms, Configuration Server Proxy is an application of the Configuration Server type operating in a special mode. As such, it replaces Configuration Server seamlessly for the clients.
You can also configure Configuration Server Proxy permissions so that clients of a particular proxy access only the part of configuration environment
relevant to their site. See “Security Considerations” on page 67
, and
Framework Security Deployment Guide for more information about setting permissions.
In geographically distributed systems prior to release 8.0, external authentication was configured only on the Master Configuration Server, and each Configuration Server Proxy passed authentication requests to it. RADIUS external authentication starting in release 8.0, and LDAP external authentication starting in release 8.1, can be configured on the Master
Configuration Server and on each Configuration Server Proxy. Therefore, each
Configuration Server Proxy can process authentication requests itself, and not pass them on to the Master Configuration Server. For more information about setting up external configuration on Configuration Server Proxy, refer to the
Framework External Authentication Reference Manual.
By default, Configuration Server Proxy provides read-only access to configuration data. Configuration Server clients that require write access to
Configuration Server (such as Configuration Manager, Deployment Wizards, and some others) must still connect directly to Configuration Server.
Starting in release 8.1, you can configure a Configuration Server Proxy that allows its clients to also add, delete, or modify configuration objects and permissions through the proxy to which they are connected. The requests for these changes are passed to the master Configuration Server by Configuration
Server Proxy. The master Configuration Server then sends data updates to the
Configuration Server Proxy that sent the requests, which passes them to its clients. The main benefit of this type of configuration is fewer connections—clients of Configuration Server Proxy do not have to connect directly to the master Configuration Server when requesting changes to configuration objects.
To configure a Configuration Server Proxy as writable, set the configuration option proxy-writable
to true
in the csproxy
section of the Configuration
Server Proxy
Application
object. This option has been extended in release 8.1
262 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
Support for
Multi-Language
Environments
Configuration
History Log
to apply to all clients of Configuration Server Proxy, not just Genesys Agent
Desktop.
You do not need to perform any additional configuration to have Configuration
Server Proxy support multi-language environments. If the master
Configuration Server supports UTF-8 encoded data, all Configuration Server
Proxies connected to that master Configuration Server also support UTF-8
encoding. See “Multi-language Environments (UTF-8 Support)” on page 44
for more information about using UTF-8 encoding to enable multi-language environments.
You can also use a history log with Configuration Server Proxy to store historical information about client sessions and changes to configuration
objects. Refer to “Configuration History Log” on page 63
for more information.
Setting Up Configuration Server Proxy
Note:
To ensure faultless operation, all Configuration Servers in the configuration environment must be running the same release.
Configuration Server Proxy may start with a master Configuration
Server running a later release, but only during the migration process.
Refer to the Genesys Migration Guide for more information.
Configuration Server operating in Proxy mode is referred to as Configuration
Server Proxy.
Prerequisite
•
The Configuration Layer components, including master Configuration
Server, are installed and running, as described in “Setting Up the
Configuration Layer” on page 85
.
Task Summary
The task summary on
summarizes the steps required to install and set up Configuration Server Proxy.
Deployment Guide 263
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
Task Summary: Setting Up Configuration Server Proxy
Task Related Procedures and Information
1. Configure as many instances of
Configuration Server Proxy as needed.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
2. Install the corresponding number of
Configuration Server Proxies.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• To install on UNIX, use the procedure “Installing
Configuration Server Proxy on UNIX” on page 267 .
• To install on Windows, use the procedure “Installing
Configuration Server Proxy on Windows” on page 268 .
3. Modify each Configuration Server
Proxy client.
4. (Optional) Set up redundant
Configuration Server Proxies.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Modifying a Client Application using Genesys
• “Modifying a Client Application using Configuration
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate:
• “Setting up a backup redundant Configuration Server
Proxy using Genesys Administrator” on page 273
• “Setting up a backup redundant Configuration Server
Proxy using Configuration Manager” on page 274
Procedure:
Configuring a Configuration Server Proxy Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components, including the master Configuration
Server, are installed and running, as described in Chapter 5 on page 85
.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar. This opens a
Browse
dialog box
264 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy that lists available application templates. If a Configuration Server Proxy template file is not listed, do one of the following:
•
Import the
Configuration Server Proxy_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework 8.1 product CD.
•
step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Configuration Server Proxy template file. The
Configuration
tab for the new Configuration Server Proxy
Application
object appears in the Details panel.
3. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
a. Enter a descriptive name in the
Name
text box.
b. In the list of
Connections
, add a connection to the master Configuration
Server
Application
object. If redundant master Configuration Servers are configured, specify a connection to the primary Configuration
Server.
4. In the
Server Info section:
a. Select the
Host
object on which this Configuration Server Proxy runs.
b. Specify the
Listening Ports
that Configuration Server Proxy clients must use to connect to this Configuration Server.
c. In the
Working Directory, Command Line, and
Command Line
Arguments
text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting
Configuration Server Proxy” on page 271
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install
Configuration Server Proxy, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the master Configuration Server.
d. Enter appropriate values for the other mandatory fields (those indicated by red asterisks).
e. In the
Log On As Account
field, Genesys strongly recommends that you use the default account,
Environment\default
.
5. (Optional) On the
Options
tab, do any of the following as required:
a. If you want this Configuration Server Proxy to be writable, set the option proxy-writable
in the csproxy
section to true
.
b. Set the values of the log configuration options.
6. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 265
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
Procedure:
Configuring a Configuration Server Proxy Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
Configuration Layer components, including the master Configuration
Server, are installed and running, as described in Chapter 5 on page 85
.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, right-click the
Applications
folder and select
New > Application,
which opens the
Browse
dialog box that lists the available application templates. If a Configuration Server Proxy template is not listed, either import the
Configuration Server
Proxy_<current-version>.apd
file from the Management Framework
to import it, and repeat this step.
2. In the
Browse
dialog box, select the Configuration Server Proxy template file, which opens the
Properties
dialog box for the new Configuration
Server Proxy
Application
object.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a name for the Configuration Server Proxy application.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, specify:
•
The host on which the Configuration Server Proxy is to be installed.
•
The communication ports that clients must use to connect to this
Configuration Server Proxy.
5. On the
Connections
tab, add a connection to the Configuration Server
Application
object ( confserv
). If redundant Configuration Servers are configured, specify a connection to the primary Configuration Server.
6. On the
Start Info
tab, in the
Working Directory, Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments
text boxes, do one of the following:
•
Enter the appropriate information in each of the text boxes. For
information about command-line parameters, see “Starting
Configuration Server Proxy” on page 271
.
•
Type a period (
.
) in the
Working Directory and
Command Line
text boxes, and leave the
Command Line Arguments text box blank. The information will be filled in automatically when you install
Configuration Server Proxy, but only if the Installation Package can connect to the primary Configuration Server.
266 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
7. (Optional) On the
Options
tab, do any of the following as required:
a. If you want this Configuration Server Proxy to be writable, set the option proxy-writable
in the csproxy
section to true
.
b. Set the values of the log configuration options.
8. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Installing Configuration Server Proxy on UNIX
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Server Proxy
Application
object is created.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, locate and open the installation directory appropriate for your environment:
•
For an enterprise (single-tenant) environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/single/<operating_system>.
•
For a multi-tenant environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/multi/<operating_system>.
The installation script, called install.sh,
is located in the appropriate directory.
2. Type the file name at the command prompt, and press
Enter.
3. For the installation type, type
3 to select
Configuration Server Proxy, and press
Enter.
4. To specify the host name for this Configuration Server Proxy, do one of the following:
•
Type the name of the host, and press
Enter.
•
Press
Enter
to select the current host.
5. Enter the Master Configuration Server host name, and press
Enter.
6. Enter the Master Configuration Server network port, and press
Enter.
7. Enter the Master Configuration Server user name, and press
Enter.
8. Enter the Master Configuration Server password, and press
Enter.
9. The installation displays the list of
Application
objects of the specified type configured for this
Host
object. Type the number corresponding to the
Configuration Server Proxy
Application
object you configured on
, and press
Enter.
Deployment Guide 267
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
10. To specify the destination directory, do one of the following:
•
Press
Enter
to accept the default.
•
Enter the full path of the directory, and press
Enter.
11. If the target installation directory has files in it, do one of the following:
•
Type
1
to back up all the files in the directory, and press
Enter.
Specify the path to which you want the files backed up, and press
Enter.
•
Type
2
to overwrite only the files in this installation package, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
Use this option only if the application already installed operates properly.
•
Type
3
to erase all files in this directory before continuing with the installation, and press
Enter.
Then type y
to confirm your selection, and press
Enter.
The list of file names will appear on the screen as the files are copied to the destination directory.
12. Specify the full path to, and the exact name of, the license file that
Configuration Server Proxy will use, and press
Enter
.
When the installation process is finished, a message indicates that installation was successful. The process places Configuration Server Proxy in the directory that you specified during installation.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Installing Configuration Server Proxy on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Server Proxy
Application
object is created.
Start of procedure
1. On the Management Framework 8.1 product CD, locate and open the installation directory appropriate for your environment:
•
For an enterprise (single-tenant) environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/single/windows.
•
For a multi-tenant environment, the installation directory is configuration_layer/configserver/multi/windows.
268 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
The installation script, called setup.exe,
is located in the appropriate directory.
2. Locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
3. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
4. Click
Next.
5. On the
Configuration Server Run Mode page, select
Configuration Server
Proxy.
6. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the host name, port, user name, and password for the Master
Configuration Server, then click
Next.
7. On the
Select Application
page, select the name of the Configuration
Server
Application
object that you created on
, and click
Next.
8. On the
Access to License
page, specify the license access type and the appropriate parameters, and click
Next
.
9. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object. If the specified path is invalid, the wizard generates a path to
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Singletenant or
Multitenant> Configuration Server
.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory property in the Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in the
Working Directory property.
Click
Next
to proceed.
10. On the
Ready to Install
information page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
11. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
When the installation process is finished, a message indicates that installation was successful. The process places Configuration Server Proxy in the directory that you specified during the installation process.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 269
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
Procedure:
Modifying a Client Application using Genesys
Administrator
Purpose: To enable a client application to work with Configuration Server
Proxy.
Note:
Repeat this procedure for each application that is to be a client of
Configuration Server Proxy.
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Server Proxy
Application
object exists.
•
You have identified the client applications that are to operate with this particular Configuration Server Proxy.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
, and double-click the client
Application
object that you want to connect to Configuration Server Proxy.
2. On the
Configuration
tab, open the
General
section.
3. Add a connection to the Configuration Server Proxy to which the client application should connect.
4. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration changes.
Now, when you start the client application, it will operate with the given
Configuration Server Proxy.
5. Start the client application using one of the following methods:
•
From Genesys Administrator or Solution Control Interface.
•
From the command line. In this case, you must use the parameters
-host
and
-port
to point to the Configuration Server Proxy with which the application will be operating.
6. Click
Save and Close to save the changes.
End of procedure
270 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
Procedure:
Modifying a Client Application using Configuration
Manager
Purpose: To enable a client application to work with Configuration Server
Proxy.
Note:
Repeat this procedure for each application that is to be a client of
Configuration Server Proxy.
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Server Proxy
Application
object exists.
•
You have identified the client applications that are to operate with this particular Configuration Server Proxy.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the client
Application
object that you want to connect to Configuration Server
Proxy.
2. Click the
Connections
tab.
3. Add a connection to the Configuration Server Proxy to which the client application should connect.
4. Click
Apply
and
OK
to save the configuration changes.
Now, when you start the client application, it will operate with the given
Configuration Server Proxy.
5. Start the client application using one of the following methods:
•
From Solution Control Interface.
•
From the command line. In this case, you must use the parameters
-host
and
-port
to point to Configuration Server Proxy with which the application will be operating.
End of procedure
Starting Configuration Server Proxy
The startup command line for Configuration Server Proxy must identify the:
•
Configuration Server Proxy executable file.
•
Configuration Server Proxy application name (the
-app
parameter).
Deployment Guide 271
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
•
Configuration Server host (the
-host
parameter).
•
Configuration Server port (the
-port
parameter).
•
Configuration Server Proxy license file or license server location (the
-l parameter).
Configuration Server Proxy supports the command-line parameters common to
Genesys server applications. For a description of these parameters, refer to
Note:
If using a primary-backup pair of Configuration Server Proxies, follow the same starting procedure for both primary and backup applications but make sure you specify the correct application name for each.
Procedure:
Starting Configuration Server Proxy
Prerequisites
•
You have set up Configuration Server Proxy, as described in “Setting Up
Configuration Server Proxy” on page 263
Start of procedure
1. To start Configuration Server Proxy on UNIX, go to the directory in which
Configuration Server Proxy is installed, and do one of the following:
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, type the following command line: sh run.sh
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, type the following command line: confserv [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
2. To start Configuration Server on Windows, do one of the following:
•
Use the
Start > Programs
menu.
•
To use only the required command-line parameters, go to the directory in which Configuration Server Proxy is installed, and double-click the startServer.bat
file.
•
To specify the command line yourself, or to use additional command-line parameters, open the MS-DOS window, go to the directory in which Configuration Server Proxy is installed, and type the following command line: confserv.exe [<additional parameters and arguments as required>]
End of procedure
272 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
Configuring Redundant Configuration Server Proxies
The high-availability (HA) architecture implies the existence of redundant applications, a primary and a backup, monitored by a management application.
Like Configuration Server, Configuration Server Proxy supports the warm standby
redundancy type between redundant Configuration Server Proxies.
The redundant architecture is described in Framework Architecture Help.
Prior to release 8.1.3, when a switchover occurred between the primary and backup Configuration Server Proxies, Configuration Server Proxy clients had to read configuration information anew and reestablish the connections to the backup server themselves. Especially in large configuration environments, this often led to detrimental effects on system performance, and leading clients to question the usefulness of the backup proxy server.
Starting in release 8.1.3, client connections are restored automatically by the backup Configuration Server Proxy when it switches to primary mode if the connection between the main Configuration Server and Configuration Server
Proxy is lost because the main Configuration Server is stopped via the
Management Layer. This makes the switchover practically invisible to the clients, and essentially eliminates the performance impact on the system. This restoration is made possible by the backup Configuration Server Proxy keeping its own record of client connections and disconnections. Under normal conditions, the primary proxy server notifies the backup proxy of client connections and disconnections, which the backup stores in its History Log
Database (“Configuration History Log” on page 263
). When the backup switches to primary, it is able to restore client connections based on the connection and disconnection information it has stored.
If the connection between the main and proxy servers, and ADDP is configured between Configuration Server Proxy and the main Configuration
Server and also between the proxy server and its client, the session is not restored. Clients of the Configuration Server Proxy must reregister and read all data from scratch.
Two Configuration Server Proxies configured as an HA pair cannot be separated into two standalone servers in runtime. Each of the servers must be stopped, re-configured, and then restarted.
Procedure:
Setting up a backup redundant Configuration Server
Proxy using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
A primary Configuration Server Proxy Application object already exists.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Deployment Guide 273
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
Start of procedure
1. Configure an
Application
object for the backup Configuration Server
Proxy following the procedure “Configuring a Configuration Server Proxy
Application object using Genesys Administrator” on page 264 .
2. Install a backup Configuration Server Proxy following either the procedure
“Installing Configuration Server Proxy on UNIX” on page 267
or the
procedure “Installing Configuration Server Proxy on Windows” on page 268
.
3. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Environment
>
Applications
and double-click the primary Configuration Server Proxy client
Application
object.
4. On the
Configuration
tab, open the
Server Info
section.
5. In the
Backup Server
field, specify the Configuration Server Proxy application you want to use as the backup server.
6. In Genesys Administrator, Configuration Manager, open the
Properties dialog box of the Configuration Server Proxy application that you want to configure as a primary server.
7. In the
Redundancy Type
field, select
Warm Standby
.
8. Select
Auto-Restart.
9. Click
Save and Close
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Setting up a backup redundant Configuration Server
Proxy using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
A primary Configuration Server Proxy Application object already exists.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. Configure an
Application
object for the backup Configuration Server
Proxy following the procedure described in “Configuring a Configuration
Server Proxy Application object using Configuration Manager” on page 266
.
2. Install a backup Configuration Server Proxy following either the procedure
“Installing Configuration Server Proxy on UNIX” on page 267
or the
procedure “Installing Configuration Server Proxy on Windows” on page 268
.
274 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Configuration Server Proxy
3. In Configuration Manager, open the
Properties
dialog box of the
Configuration Server Proxy application that you want to configure as a primary server.
4. Click the
Start Info
tab.
5. Select
Auto-Restart.
6. Click the
Server Info
tab.
7. Select
Warm Standby
as the Redundancy Type.
8. Specify the Configuration Server Proxy application you want to use as the backup server. Use the
Browse
button next to the
Backup Server
property field to locate the backup Configuration Server Proxy application.
9. Click
Apply
and
OK
to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Failure of Configuration Server Proxy
When Configuration Server Proxy fails or disconnects from its clients, the clients attempt to reconnect to Configuration Server Proxy. If it is not available and if a backup Configuration Server Proxy is configured, the clients attempt to connect to the backup.
When Configuration Server Proxy fails, you must restart it manually or use the
Management Layer for autorestart.
Failure of Master Configuration Server
When the master Configuration Server fails or the connection to it is lost, the clients of Configuration Server Proxy continue their normal operations.
Configuration Server Proxy initiates reconnect attempts to the master
Configuration Server. Meanwhile, Configuration Server Proxy responds to client requests using the configuration data stored in its memory.
When the master Configuration Server fails, you must restart it manually or use the Management Layer for autorestart.
shows Configuration Server Proxy behavior when a primary-backup pair of master Configuration Servers is configured.
Deployment Guide 275
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems
Configuration
Server -
Primary
Configuration
Server Proxy
Configuration
Server -
Backup
Distributed Solution Control Servers
Applications
Figure 11: Failure of Configuration Server with a Configured Backup
When the primary master Configuration Server fails or the connection to it is lost, Configuration Server Proxy initiates reconnect attempts to the master
Configuration Server and, if it is not available, to the backup Configuration
Server. If the connection to the backup Configuration Server is established,
Configuration Server Proxy remains connected to the backup server until:
•
The connection to the backup Configuration Server is lost.
•
The backup Configuration Server fails.
•
Configuration Server Proxy fails or is restarted.
Distributed Solution Control Servers
In a geographically distributed configuration environment, a number of
Solution Control Servers can communicate with each other and control a particular part of the Genesys environment while running at multiple remote sites (but within the same configuration environment).
This section provides information about ownership configuration and activating Distributed mode.
Note:
Starting Solution Control Server in Distributed mode requires a special license. Refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for more information.
SCS in Distributed Mode
You can use Solution Control Server operating in
Distributed
mode (referred to as Distributed Solution Control Server) to distribute management-related tasks among the sites in a geographically distributed enterprise that uses a single Genesys Configuration Database.
276 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Distributed Solution Control Servers
You can install and use more than one Distributed Solution Control Server within a single configuration environment. In these installations, each such server controls its own subset of the hosts, applications, and solutions.
Distributed Solution Control Servers communicate with each other through the dedicated Message Server.
When you are using Distributed Solution Control Servers, you must explicitly configure the servers’ ownership of hosts, applications, and solutions. That is, you must associate each host, application, and solution object with a particular
SCS.
Using Distributed Solution Control Servers helps you resolve some problems common to geographically distributed installation:
•
It eliminates false switchovers that occur when SCS disconnects from LCA at a remote site because of the slow network connection between sites or because of temporary network problems.
•
It prevents a single point of failure. A failure of one Distributed SCS only means a temporary loss of control over a subset of hosts, applications, and solutions; other Distributed Solution Control Servers continue to control the rest of the environment.
Because Distributed Solution Control Servers communicate with each other, they all have the same information about all hosts, applications, and solutions.
Therefore, given appropriate permissions, you can connect Solution Control
Interface to any Distributed Solution Control Server and monitor and control the whole environment as a single entity.
Configuring Distributed Solution Control Servers
Warnings!
• Do not use Solution Control Servers in Distributed and non-Distributed modes simultaneously within the same
Configuration environment. If you plan to use Distributed SCS in your installation, turn on Distributed mode for all Solution
Control Servers you install.
• When using Distributed Solution Control Servers, always ensure that each Solution Control Server, either by itself or as part of a high-availability pair, is running on the host which it controls. Failure to do so can, in some cases, result in unpredictable behavior of the Solution Control Servers in the
Distributed configuration. For example, different Solution
Control Servers may start competing for control over applications on the host.
Deployment Guide 277
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Distributed Solution Control Servers
Procedure:
Configuring Distributed Solution Control Servers
Purpose: To configure Solution Control Servers so that they can function in
Distributed mode.
Start of procedure
1. Configure as many Solution Control Server
Application
objects as
necessary, as described in Chapter 6 on page 121 .
2. For each Solution Control Server application, turn on Distributed mode. To do so, specify the following values for configuration options in the general section:
•
distributed_mode
=
ON
•
distributed_rights
=
DEFAULT
3. If you are planning to leave unassigned any of the host, application, or solution objects unassigned—that is, without specifying which SCS is to control them—dedicate one SCS to the control of all unassigned hosts, applications, and solutions. To instruct one SCS to work in this mode, specify the following values for configuration options in the general section for that particular Solution Control Server application:
•
distributed_mode
=
ON
•
distributed_rights
=
MAIN
.
Note:
Only one of the Distributed Solution Control Servers can have the value
MAIN
for the distributed_rights
configuration option.
End of procedure
Redundant Configurations for Distributed SCS
Distributed SCS supports the warm standby
redundant configuration in the same way as other Genesys servers, with the added benefit that the backup maintains data synchronization with the primary. That is, you can configure a primary and a backup pair of Distributed Solution Control Servers to operate with warm-standby redundancy.
To set up HA port synchronization between Primary and Backup Solution
Control Servers, refer to “Synchronizing HA Ports Between Redundant
Solution Control Servers” on page 240
.
278 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Distributed Solution Control Servers
Dividing Configuration Among Solution Control Servers
When you are using Distributed Solution Control Servers, you must specify which SCS controls which subset of the following objects:
•
Hosts
•
Applications
•
Solutions
Do this by changing the object’s properties, as described in the following sections.
Note:
To distribute control over the primary and backup servers in a redundant pair between different Distributed Solution Control
Servers, all Solution Control Servers in the configuration must be running release 7.5 or later.
Procedure:
Specifying a Distributed Solution Control Server to control a Host, Application, or Solution
Start of procedure
1. To assign a Distributed SCS to control a host, specify the SCS application in the
Solution Control Server
field in the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab (in Genesys Administrator), or on the
General
tab (in
Configuration Manager), of the
Host
object.
2. To assign a Distributed SCS to control an application, do not make any changes to the
Application
object. Specifying SCS ownership of the application’s host is enough. The Distributed SCS automatically controls any applications assigned to the host this SCS controls.
3. To assign a Distributed SCS to control a solution, specify the SCS application in the
Solution Control Server
field in the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab (in Genesys Administrator), or on the
General
tab (in
Configuration Manager), of the
Solution
object.
End of procedure
Recommendations
•
Do not distribute control over the primary and backup servers in a redundant pair between different Distributed Solution Control Servers if any SCS in the configuration environment is running a pre-7.5 release.
Genesys recommends that you configure the same SCS to control both the primary and backup servers in a redundant pair.
Deployment Guide 279
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Distributed Solution Control Servers
•
When you are distributing control over the configuration objects among
Distributed Solution Control Servers, ensure that the same SCS that controls a solution also controls all applications included in this solution.
While one SCS can technically control a solution while other servers control applications included in that solution, avoiding this configuration helps minimize network traffic between Solution Control Servers.
•
Genesys strongly recommends that you not assign each component in an
HA pair to different Solution Control Servers in a distributed environment.
In this configuration, the functionality of each Solution Control Server in the HA pair might be limited to handling simple application failures only
(the failure of an application within the pair). In addition, the state of each component in the monitored HA pair might become inconsistent if network failures occur between the Distributed Solution Control Servers.
Specifying Message Server for SCS Communications
Distributed Solution Control Servers communicate with each other through
Message Server. Genesys recommends that you use a dedicated Message
Server for this purpose.
Procedure:
Configuring a dedicated Message Server for
Distributed Solution Control Servers using Genesys
Administrator
Prerequisites
•
An
Application
object exists for each Distributed Solution Control Server in the configuration environment.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, configure a Message Server
Application
object
with appropriate configuration parameters. Refer to Chapter 6 on page 121
for instructions.
2. Double-click the Message Server
Application
object, and click the
Options tab.
3. Create a new section called
MessageServer.
4. In this section, create a new configuration option called signature
and set its value to scs_distributed.
Each Distributed SCS processes this option to determine which of the Message Servers specified in SCS connections to use for communications with other Solution Control Servers.
280 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Distributed Solution Control Servers
5. In the
Application
object for each Distributed Solution Control Server, add a connection to this Message Server, as follows:
a. Enter
ADDP
as the
Connection protocol.
b. Set the ADDP
Local Timeout
and
Remote Timeout
to values that are less than half the minimum alive_timeout
values between all
Distributed Solution Control Servers in the configuration environment.
In other words:
T addp
< T scs
* 0.5
where:
T addp
= ADDP timeout
T scs
= minimum alive_timeout
between all Distributed Solution
Control Servers
Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for a detailed description of the alive_timeout
option.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Configuring a dedicated Message Server for
Distributed Solution Control Servers using
Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
An
Application
object exists for each Distributed Solution Control Server in the configuration environment.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, configure a Message Server
Application
object with appropriate configuration parameters.
2. Go to the
Options
tab of the Message Server
Application Properties dialog box and create a new section called
MessageServer.
3. Within this section, create a new configuration option called signature
and set its value to scs_distributed.
Each Distributed SCS processes this option to determine which of the Message Servers specified in SCS connections to use for communications with other Solution Control
Servers.
4. In the
Application
object for each Distributed Solution Control Server, add a connection to this Message Server, as follows:
a. Enter
ADDP
as the
Connection protocol.
Deployment Guide 281
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Distributed Solution Control Servers
b. Set the ADDP
Local Timeout
and
Remote Timeout
to values that are less than half the minimum alive_timeout
values between all
Distributed Solution Control Servers in the configuration environment.
In other words:
T addp
< T scs
* 0.5
where:
T addp
= ADDP timeout
T scs
= minimum alive_timeout
between all Distributed Solution
Control Servers
Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for a detailed description of the alive_timeout
option.
End of procedure
Notes on Configuring SCI
Because Distributed Solution Control Servers communicate with each other, they all have the same information about all hosts, applications, and solutions.
Thus, you can connect Solution Control Interface to any Distributed SCS and monitor and control the whole environment as a single entity (given appropriate permissions).
When Distributed SCS receives a control command for an object that this SCS does not control, it forwards this command to the appropriate SCS and passes any further notifications back to the requestor.
Notes on Configuring Message Server for Centralized
Logging
For distributed environments using a single Configuration Database, Genesys recommends using a dedicated Message Server for centralized logging at each site. In most cases, you have to configure as many Message Servers as there are Distributed Solution Control Servers.
Notes:
You can configure as many Message Servers for centralized logging as you need per site.
You also need an additional Message Server to handle SCS communications (see
282 Framework 8.1
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Distributed Solution Control Servers
Procedure:
Verifying configuration of Message Servers used for centralized logging in a Distributed Solution Control
Server environment using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To verify that each Message Server used for centralized logging is configured and connected to a Solution Control Server and to each of the applications controlled by that Solution Control Server.
Prerequisites
•
Distributed Solution Control Servers are set up in the configuration environment.
•
The Message Server used for centralized logging in this environment is installed.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning
>
Applications
, and double-click a particular Solution Control Server
Application
object to open its
Configuration
tab.
2. In the
General
section, make sure that a connection to the Message Server that is providing the centralized logging is added to the list of
Connections
.
3. For each
Application
object that this particular Solution Control Server controls:
a. Open the
Configuration tab of the object.
b. In the
General
section, make sure that a connection to that same
Message Server is added to the list of
Connections
.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Verifying configuration of Message Servers used for centralized logging in a Distributed Solution Control
Server environment using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To verify that each Message Server used for centralized logging is configured and connected to a Solution Control Server and to each of the applications controlled by that Solution Control Server.
Deployment Guide 283
Chapter 10: Setting Up Geographically Distributed Systems Redundancy Support
Prerequisites
•
Distributed Solution Control Servers are set up in the configuration environment.
•
The Message Server used for centralized logging in this environment is installed.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. Open the
Properties
dialog box for a particular Solution Control Server
Application
object.
2. Make sure that a connection to the Message Server that is providing the centralized logging is added on the
Connections
tab.
3. For each
Application
object that this particular Solution Control Server controls:
a. Open the
Properties
dialog box.
b. Make sure that a connection to that same Message Server is added on the
Connections
tab.
End of procedure
Installing Applications
After you are finished with the configuration tasks, physically install all instances of Solution Control Server, Solution Control Interface, and Message
Server to match the configuration.
Redundancy Support
Both Configuration Server Proxy and Distributed Solution Control Server currently support warm standby
redundant configuration in the same way as other Genesys servers. That is, you can configure a primary and a backup
Configuration Server Proxy or Distributed SCS to operate with warm standby redundancy, so that if the primary application fails, the backup can take over current operations. The backup Distributed SCS synchronizes its data with the primary SCS; however, the backup Configuration Server Proxy does not.
Distributed SCS can handle switchovers between other redundant client applications, regardless of the redundancy type configured for those other applications. For example, redundant T-Servers can be configured as hot standby,
whereas redundant Universal Routing Servers can be configured as warm standby.
Distributed SCS will handle the switchover for both applications.
284 Framework 8.1
Appendix
A
Minimum Permissions
This appendix describes the minimum permissions required to install and run
Management Framework components. For information about minimum permissions required for other Genesys components, refer to product- or component-specific documentation.
This appendix contains the following sections:
•
•
Database User Privileges, page 286
•
System Permissions
Table 8 provides the minimum permissions required to install and run
Framework components.
Table 8: Minimum System Permissions for Installation
Component
Configuration Server
Solution Control Server
Message Server
DB Server
SNMP Master Agent
Local Control Agent b
Minimum Permissions
(Windows)
Administrators
group a
Administrators
group
Administrators
group
Administrators
group
Administrators
group
Administrators
group
Minimum Permissions
(UNIX)
users
group users
group users
group users
group users
group root
Deployment Guide 285
Appendix A: Minimum Permissions Database User Privileges a. The user account for the running process is usually determined by the user or object that started the process.
For example, if a process is started by LCA, then the process inherits its permissions from LCA b.
Administrators
or root
permission is required to install the component because, during installation, it updates the startup file and registry.
After a component is installed, you can update the component to start under a different user account with lower privileges. However, before doing so, make sure that you updated the working directories with the correct read and write permissions.
Example
To run LCA and Genesys Deployment Agent (GDA) as a non-root user, do one of the following, depending on your operating system:
•
Windows—Change the account associated with the LCA service. One way to do this is through Windows Administrative Services, as follows:
1.
Go to
Start
>
Settings
>
Control Panel
>
Administrative
Services
>
Services
, right-click
LCA
and select
Properties
.
2.
Open the
Log On
tab and in the
Log on as
section, select
This account
, and change the account associated with the LCA server.
•
UNIX—Create startup scripts for LCA and GDA that set up LCA and
GDA to be running under the non-root user. For these scripts, it is assumed that LCA is installed in
/home/genesys/GCTI
, and the name of the non-root user is genesys
. See “LCA Startup Script—gctilca” on page 288 and “GDA
Startup Script—gctigda” on page 290 for examples of these scripts.
To install the startup scripts, put them in the directory /etc/rc/d/init.d/ and run one or both of the following commands, as required: chkconfig -add gctilca chkconfig -add gctigda
Database User Privileges
A database user that accesses the Configuration Database on behalf of
Configuration Server, that is, the user identified in the Configuration Server configuration file, requires basic database privileges, as defined in this section.
When the database is created, it is assumed that it is created under the new user and the initialization scripts are under that user account, unless otherwise stated.
286 Framework 8.1
Appendix A: Minimum Permissions Database User Privileges
Oracle
After the new database user is created, grant the necessary privileges as follows:
GRANT CONNECT TO <DB user>
GRANT CREATE TABLE TO <DB user>
GRANT UNLIMITED TABLESPACE TO <DB user>
GRANT CREATE PROCEDURE TO <DB user>
MS SQL
For MS SQL2000, grant the public
role to the new database user on the
Database Access tab of the SQL Server Login Properties dialog box for the new user. In addition, grant the following privileges:
GRANT CREATE TABLE TO <DB user>
GRANT CREATE PROCEDURE TO <DB user>
For MS SQL 2005 and later, grant the public and db_owner roles to the new database user.
DB2
Grant the necessary privileges as follows:
CONNECT TO <database>;
GRANT CREATE TAB,CONNECT ON DATABASE TO USER <DB user>;
CONNECT RESET;
PostgreSQL
From pgAdmin, grant the following privileges:
•
Can create database object
•
Can create roles
Or, you can execute the following query:
CREATE ROLE <DB user> LOGIN ENCRYPTED PASSWORD <encrypted password>
NOINHERIT CREATEDB CREATEROLE VALID UNTIL ‘infinity’;
To configure client authentication, update the pg_hba.conf
file, located in the data directory under the PostgreSQL installation folder. For example: host GCTI_Test host GCTI_Test gctitest gctitest
<IP address1>/32
<IP address2>/32 trust trust
This enables the DB user gctitest
to connect to the GCTI_Test database from the hosts
<IP address1>
and
<IP address2>
.
Deployment Guide 287
Appendix A: Minimum Permissions
SYBASE
Sample Scripts
To configure a new database user, who is not also the Database Administrator
(DBA), do the following:
1. Create a new database under the DBA account, and run the Genesys
Configuration Manager database initialization scripts ( init_multi_syb.sql
and
CfgLocale_sby.sql
).
2. Add the new database user login using the following commands under dbaccess
: sp_addlogin <DB user>, <DB password>, <DB name>
3. Issue the following commands to transfer ownership of the new database to the new user:
1> user <new DB>
2> go
1> exec sp_changedbowner <DB user>
2> go
INFORMIX
The configured DB user must be informix
.
Sample Scripts
This section contains sample scripts referred to in earlier section of this
Appendix.
LCA Startup Script—gctilca
The following is an example of a script to allow LCA to run under a non-root user.
#!/bin/bash
#
# chkconfig: 345 80 20
# description: run lca
#
# You should put this script to /etc/rc.d/init.d and run command:
# chkconfig --add gctilca
#GCTI home dir
GCTI=/home/genesys/GCTI
DIRNAME=LCA
HOMEDIR=$GCTI/$DIRNAME
USER=genesys
SCRIPTNAME=gctilca
HOME_USER=/home/genesys
288 Framework 8.1
Appendix A: Minimum Permissions Sample Scripts
PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/sbin prog=lca
RETVAL=0 if [ ! -x $HOMEDIR/$prog ]; then exit 1 fi
# Source function library.
. /etc/rc.d/init.d/functions start () { echo -n $"Starting $SCRIPTNAME: " if [ -e /var/lock/subsys/$prog ]; then echo -n $"$SCRIPTNAME is already running."; failure $"cannot start $SCRIPTNAME: $SCRIPTNAME already running."; echo return 1 fi daemon --user=$USER ". $HOME_USER/.bash_profile ; cd $HOMEDIR ;
./run.sh >/dev/null 2>/dev/null &" sleep 1
CHECK=`ps -e | grep $prog | grep -v $SCRIPTNAME | awk '{print $4}'` if [ "$CHECK" = "$prog" ]; then
RETVAL=0 else
RETVAL=1 fi
[ $RETVAL -eq "0" ] && touch /var/lock/subsys/$prog echo return $RETVAL
} stop () { echo -n $"Stopping $SCRIPTNAME: " if [ ! -e /var/lock/subsys/$prog ]; then echo -n $"$SCRIPTNAME is not running." failure $"cannot stop $SCRIPTNAME: $SCRIPTNAME is not running." echo return 1; fi killproc $prog
RETVAL=$?
echo
[ $RETVAL -eq 0 ] && rm -f /var/lock/subsys/$prog; return $RETVAL
} usage ()
{ echo "Usage: service $PROG {start|stop|restart}"
}
Deployment Guide 289
Appendix A: Minimum Permissions case $1 in start) start
;; stop) stop
;; restart) stop start
;;
*) usage ; RETVAL=2
;; esac exit $RETVAL
Sample Scripts
GDA Startup Script—gctigda
The following is an example of a script to allow GDA to run under a non-root user.
#!/bin/bash
#
# chkconfig: 345 80 20
# description: run gda
#
# You should put this script in /etc/rc.d/init.d and run command:
# chkconfig --add gctigda
#GCTI home dir
GCTI=/home/genesys/GCTI
DIRNAME=LCA
HOMEDIR=$GCTI/$DIRNAME
USER=genesys
SCRIPTNAME=gctigda
HOME_USER=/home/genesys
PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/sbin prog=gda
RETVAL=0 if [ ! -x $HOMEDIR/$prog ]; then exit 1 fi
# Source function library.
. /etc/rc.d/init.d/functions
290 Framework 8.1
Appendix A: Minimum Permissions Sample Scripts start () { echo -n $"Starting $SCRIPTNAME: " if [ -e /var/lock/subsys/$prog ]; then echo -n $"$SCRIPTNAME is already running."; failure $"cannot start $SCRIPTNAME: $SCRIPTNAME already running."; echo return 1 fi daemon --user=$USER ". $HOME_USER/.bash_profile ; cd $HOMEDIR ;
./gda >/dev/null 2>/dev/null &" sleep 1
CHECK=`ps -e | grep $prog | grep -v $SCRIPTNAME | awk '{print $4}'` if [ "$CHECK" = "$prog" ]; then
RETVAL=0 else
RETVAL=1 fi
[ $RETVAL -eq "0" ] && touch /var/lock/subsys/$prog echo return $RETVAL
} stop () { echo -n $"Stopping $SCRIPTNAME: " if [ ! -e /var/lock/subsys/$prog ]; then echo -n $"$SCRIPTNAME is not running." failure $"cannot stop $SCRIPTNAME: $SCRIPTNAME is not running." echo return 1; fi killproc $prog
RETVAL=$?
echo
[ $RETVAL -eq 0 ] && rm -f /var/lock/subsys/$prog; return $RETVAL
} usage ()
{ echo "Usage: service $PROG {start|stop|restart}"
} case $1 in start) start
;; stop) stop
;; restart) stop start
Deployment Guide 291
Appendix A: Minimum Permissions
*)
;; usage ; RETVAL=2
;; esac exit $RETVAL
Sample Scripts
292 Framework 8.1
Appendix
B
Standard Configuration
Procedure
This appendix provides generic instructions for using Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator to configure a Genesys Framework
Application object.
This appendix contains the following sections:
Application Templates, page 293
Graphical User Interface Applications, page 306
Refer to instructions for a particular application for any application-specific deviations from the standard configuration procedure.
Application Templates
The application template provides a majority of the configuration options for server applications and the option default values. Using one application template, you can create as many
Application
objects of the same type as you need.
Before you configure an
Application
object, import a template for this application. If a suitable predefined template is not available, create a new template.
Using Genesys Administrator
The procedures in this section describe how use Genesys Administrator to import a predefined application template, and how to create a new application template.
Deployment Guide 293
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Application Templates
Tip: Before you continue, make sure you have selected
Show Advanced views in User Preferences. Refer to Framework Genesys Administrator
Help for more information about setting your User Preferences.
Procedure:
Importing a predefined application template using
Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To obtain a predefined template for an application, from which one or more
Application
objects of that type can be created.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Application Templates,
and select
Import template, located in the slide-out
Tasks
panel on the right.
Note:
If
Application Templates
is not listed under
Environment
, open user preferences, and select
Show advanced views
on the
General tab. Refer to Framework Genesys Administrator Help, if necessary.
2. In the window that appears, click
Add.
3. In the
Choose file
dialog box, locate the installation CD for your product and open the
TEMPLATES
folder.
4. Select the template file for your application.
5. Click
Open
to import the template file. The
Configuration
tab for this template is displayed.
6. Make any changes that you require, then click
Save
to save your changes and return to the list of available templates.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
If there is metadata associated with this template, import the metadata file.
Use the procedure “Importing metadata for an application template” on page 296
.
294 Framework 8.1
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Application Templates
Procedure:
Creating a new application template using Genesys
Administrator
Purpose: To create a new application template for an application, from which one or more
Application
objects of that type can be created.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Application Templates,
and click
New
in the toolbar.
Note:
If
Application Templates
is not listed under
Environment
, open user preferences, and select the
Show advanced views
checkbox on the
General
tab. Refer to Framework Genesys Administrator Help if necessary.
2. Specify the template
Name
, select a template
Type
, and specify a
Version.
3. If required, define default configuration options on the
Options
tab.
4. Click
Save
to save the changes and return to the list of available templates.
The new template is stored in the
Environment > Application Templates folder, and can be used to create a new
Application
object; you do not have to import it
End of procedure
Application Metadata
Starting with release 8.0, application templates for some Genesys components come with additional XML files called Application Metadata files. These files are used by only Genesys Administrator, and provide a user-friendly way to further configure an object. The metadata file contains all of the configuration options that can be used for the particular application, including those that are already in the template.
The metadata file is located in the same folder with the corresponding application template, and has the same filename with the extension
.xml.
To enable the metadata, you must import the metadata file and associate it with the application template.
For more information about metadata, refer to Framework Genesys
Administrator Help.
Deployment Guide 295
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Application Templates
Procedure:
Importing metadata for an application template
Note:
Genesys Administrator must be used for this procedure. Configuration
Manager does not support metadata.
Prerequisites
•
The application template to be associated with the metadata is available.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Application Templates, and select the application template to which the metadata is to be imported. The
Configuration
tab for this template is displayed.
2. Click
Import Metadata
in the toolbar.
3. In the window that appears, click
Add.
4. In the
Choose file
dialog box, locate the installation CD for your particular product and open the
TEMPLATES
folder.
5. Select the metadata file for the application.
6. Click
Open
to import the metadata file, and associate the metadata with the application template.
End of procedure
After the metadata is imported for a template, a new tab,
Settings,
appears in the details pane for each
Application
object created from that template. In that new tab, Genesys Administrator displays additional detailed information about configuration options that can be used with that application.
Using Configuration Manager
The procedures in this section describe how to use Configuration Manager to import a predefined application template, and how to create a new application template.
296 Framework 8.1
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Application Templates
Procedure:
Importing a predefined application template using
Configuration Manager
Purpose: To obtain predefined template for an application, from which one or more
Application
objects of that type can be created.
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, select the
Environment > Application
Templates
folder.
2. Select
File > Import > Application Template.
3. Click the down arrow for the
Look In field.
4. Locate the installation CD for your particular product and open the
TEMPLATES
folder.
5. Select the template file for your particular application.
6. Click
Open
to open the
Properties
dialog box for this template.
7. Make any changes that you require, then click
OK
to save them and exit the
Properties
dialog box.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Creating a new application template using
Configuration Manager
Purpose: To create a new application template for an application, from which one or more
Application
objects of that type can be created.
Prerequisites
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, select the
Environment > Application
Templates
folder.
2. Select
File > New > Application Template.
Deployment Guide 297
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
3. Specify the template
Name
, select a template
Type
, and specify a
Version.
4. If required, define default configuration options on the
Options
and
Annex tabs.
5. Click
OK
to save your changes and exit the
Properties
dialog box.
The new template is stored in the
Environment > Application Templates folder, and is available to be used to create a new
Application
object; you do not have to import it
End of procedure
Server Applications
This section contains the procedures necessary to create and configure Server applications.
Using Genesys Administrator
Procedure:
Creating and configuring a Server Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar.
2. From the available application templates in the
Browse
dialog box, choose
the template for this application. (See “Application Templates” on page 293
for information about templates.)
3. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab:
•
Enter a name for this application in the text box. The application template provides information for the application type and version.
•
If you are in a multi-tenant environment, add the tenants who will be using this application.
•
In the
Connections
field, do any of the following as required:
•
Add a connection to any server application to which this application should be a client. To enable Advanced Disconnect
298 Framework 8.1
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
Detection Protocol (ADDP) for this connection, see “Configuring
•
To enable ADDP between this server and Configuration Server, add the Configuration Server application (named confserv
) to the
Connections and specify the values for the connection protocol in
seconds (see “Configuring ADDP” on page 303 .) For more
information, refer to Framework Genesys Administrator Help.
•
Add a connection to Message Server to provide alarm-signaling and centralized-logging capabilities.
4. In the
Server Info
section, specify the following:
•
The host computer on which this server is to be installed and/or to run.
•
Listening ports that applications must use to connect to this server.
•
Working Directory
—the full path to the directory from which the application starts.
•
Command Line
properties—The command line used for starting the application; usually, it is the name of the executable file.
•
Command Line Arguments
—Additional parameters, if any, used for starting the application.
Note that the path, command line, and command-line parameters are updated automatically during the application’s installation procedure.
•
If another server application is used as a backup for this one, specify the
Backup Server
and the
Redundancy Type
.
Warning!
You must have a special high-availability (HA) license to use redundant configurations. Otherwise, the Management Layer does not perform a switchover between the primary and backup servers. Refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for details.
5. Select the
Options
tab and specify or change the values of the configuration options. For option descriptions, see:
•
The Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for
Configuration and Management Layer components’ options.
•
The latest version of the Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server and HA Proxy (if applicable) options.
•
The latest version of the Framework Stat Server User’s Guide for Stat
Server options.
If the application’s working directory differs from the directory in which the application was originally installed, configure an option named messagefile
in the log
section. Specify the full path to the application-specific log messages file (
*.lms
) as the option value.
Otherwise, the application is unable to generate its specific log events.
Deployment Guide 299
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
6. Click
Save
or
Apply
to save your changes. The new GUI application is now listed in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Configuring ADDP
You can enable ADDP for a connection between any two Genesys applications that support it.
Procedure:
Configuring Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol using Genesys Administrator
Purpose: To configure ADDP-related parameters for a connection between two applications that form a client-server pair.
Note:
Some applications do not support ADDP for certain connections. Refer to application-specific documentation or Release Notes to determine if your application supports ADDP.
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
Application
objects for each application in the client-server pair exist.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select the client application in the client-server pair.
2. Select the
Configuration
tab, and expand the
General
section.
3. In the
Connections
list, click
Add.
4. In the
CfgConnectionInfo dialog box that opens:
a. From the list of servers, select the application name that represents the connection for which you want to configure ADDP.
b. Specify addp
as the value for the
Connection Protocol
field.
c. Specify any integer as the value for the
Local Timeout field. This indicates how often, in seconds, the client application sends polling signals to the server application.
300 Framework 8.1
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
Tip: To avoid false disconnect states that might occur because of delays in the data network, Genesys recommends setting the ADDP timeouts to values equal to or greater than ten seconds.
d. If you also want to enable polling signals from the server application to the client, specify any integer as the value for the
Remote Timeout field.
This timeout is also measured in seconds.
e. If you do not want either the client or the server application to print
ADDP-related messages in its log, select the
Trace Is Turned Off value for the
Trace Mode
field. Otherwise, do one of the following:
•
Select
Trace On Client Side
for the client application to print
ADDP-related messages in its log.
•
Select
Trace On Server Side
for the server application to print
ADDP-related messages in its log.
•
Select
Trace On Both Sides
for both client and server applications to print ADDP-related messages in their log.
5. Click
OK, and then
Save to save the configuration changes.
End of procedure
Using Configuration Manager
Procedure:
Creating and configuring a Server Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, select the
Environment > Applications folder.
2. Select
File > New > Application.
3. From the available application templates in the
Browse
dialog box, choose
the template for this application. (See “Application Templates” on page 293
for information about application templates.)
4. Select the
General
tab of the
Properties
dialog box and enter a name for this application. The application template provides information for the application type and version.
Deployment Guide 301
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
5. The
Tenants
tab displays only in a multi-tenant environment. You can add tenants for this application by selecting the
Tenants
tab and clicking the
Add button.
6. Select the
Server Info
tab and specify the:
•
Host computer on which this server is to be installed and/or to run.
•
One or more communication ports that applications must use to connect to this server.
7. If another server application is used as a backup for this one, specify the
Redundancy Type
and the
Backup Server
on the
Server Info
tab.
Warning!
You must have a special high-availability (HA) license to use redundant configurations. Otherwise, the Management Layer does not perform a switchover between the primary and backup servers. Refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for details.
Note:
See “Synchronizing Options and Ports Between Primary and
for information about enabling options and ports synchronization between primary and backup servers.
8. Select the
Start Info
tab and define the:
•
Working Directory
—The full path to the directory from which the application starts.
•
Command Line
properties—The command line used for starting the application; usually, it is the name of the executable file.
•
Command Line Arguments
—Additional parameters, if any, used for starting the application.
Note that these properties are updated automatically during the application’s installation procedure.
9. Select the
Options
tab and specify or change the values of the configuration options. For option descriptions, see:
•
The Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for
Configuration and Management Layer components’ options.
•
The latest version of the Framework T-Server Deployment Guide for your specific T-Server and HA Proxy (if applicable) options.
•
The latest version of the Framework Stat Server User’s Guide for Stat
Server options.
If the application’s working directory differs from the directory to which the application is originally installed, configure an option named messagefile
in the log
section. Specify the full path to the application-specific log messages file (
*.lms
) as the option value.
Otherwise, the application is unable to generate its specific log events.
302 Framework 8.1
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
10. Select the
Connections
tab, and do any of the following as required:
•
Add a connection to any server application this application should be a client to. To enable Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP)
for this connection, see “Configuring ADDP” on page 303
.
•
To enable ADDP between this server and Configuration Server, add the
Configuration Server application (named confserv
) to the Connections and specify the values for the connection protocol in seconds (see
“Configuring ADDP” on page 303 ). For more information, refer to
Framework Configuration Manager Help.
•
Add a connection to Message Server to provide alarm-signaling and centralized-logging capabilities.
Tip: You can add a connection to Message Server for all or a set of
Application
objects after you configure them. To launch a Wizard that configures connections for multiple
Application
objects, select two or more
Application
objects, right-click, and select
Manage Connections.
Refer to Framework Configuration Manager Help for more information.
11. Click
OK
to save your changes and exit the
Properties
dialog box.
End of procedure
Configuring ADDP
You can enable the Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP) for a connection between any two Genesys applications that support ADDP.
Procedure:
Configuring Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol using Configuration Manager
Purpose: To configure ADDP-related parameters for a connection between two applications that form a client-server pair.
Note:
Some applications do not support ADDP for certain connections. Refer to documentation or Release Notes to find this information for particular applications.
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
Application
objects for each application in the client-server pair exist.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Deployment Guide 303
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, open the
Application Properties
dialog box for the client application in the client-server pair.
2. Select the
Connections
tab.
3. Double-click the application name that represents the connection for which you want to configure ADDP.
4. In the
Properties
dialog box that opens:
a. Specify addp
as the value for the
Connection Protocol
field.
b. Specify any integer as the value for the
Local Timeout field. This indicates how often, in seconds, the client application sends polling signals to the server application.
Tip: To avoid false disconnect states that might occur because of delays in the data network, Genesys recommends setting the ADDP timeouts to values equal to or greater than ten seconds.
c. If you also want to enable polling signals from the server application to the client, specify any integer as the value for the
Remote Timeout field.
This timeout is also measured in seconds.
d. If you do not want either the client or the server application to print
ADDP-related messages in its log, select the
Trace Is Turned Off value for the
Trace Mode
field. Otherwise, do one of the following:
•
Select
Trace On Client Side
for the client application to print
ADDP-related messages in its log.
•
Select
Trace On Server Side
for the server application to print
ADDP-related messages in its log.
•
Select
Trace On Both Sides
for both client and server applications to print ADDP-related messages in their logs.
5. Click
OK
to save the configuration changes, and exit the
Properties
dialog box.
End of procedure
Synchronizing Options and Ports Between Primary and Backup Servers
Configuration Manager can automatically synchronize the options and ports between primary and backup server applications. This section contains the procedures necessary to set up this automatic synchronization.
Genesys Administrator does not support this functionality.
304 Framework 8.1
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Server Applications
Procedure:
Synchronizing options between primary and backup servers
Purpose: To enable Configuration Manager to synchronize the options between primary and backup applications automatically.
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
The primary and backup servers have been installed and configured.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. Assign an application template to the primary server before using that template for a backup server. (This is the default behavior for
Configuration Manager, but not for Configuration Wizards.)
2. On the application template’s
Annex
tab, list the options that you want synchronized between the corresponding
Application
objects. You must list both the section and option names exactly as they appear in the primary application. However, instead of entering the actual option values, use one of the following values:
•
1
— Indicates that the corresponding option in the primary server should be copied into the backup server only at the moment when the backup is assigned to the primary. This leaves the option available for later independent changes in the primary and backup servers.
•
2
—Indicates that Configuration Server should not only copy the option to the backup during its assignment to the primary, but also that it should synchronize the options any time that the option is changed on the primary server.
3. Click
OK.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Synchronizing ports between primary and backup servers
Purpose: To enable Configuration Manager to synchronize the ports between primary and backup server applications automatically.
Deployment Guide 305
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Graphical User Interface Applications
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, select
View > Options
to open the
Options dialog box.
2. On the
General
tab, in the
Server Ports Assignment
section:
a. Select
Auto,
and enter a starting number for the range of port numbers that will automatically be assigned for ports on server applications.
b. Select
Auto For Backup,
and enter the first number of a range of ports that will automatically be assigned on backup applications.
When the
Auto For Backup
option is selected, ports are automatically synchronized between the primary and backup server applications.
When a port is defined on the primary server application, a compatible port is automatically allocated on the backup server application. If the two server applications are configured as a redundant pair, you cannot remove or change the ports on the backup server. If the two are not linked as a redundant pair, you can delete the ports on the application that had been the backup. Refer to Framework Configuration Manager
Help for more information.
3. Click
OK.
End of procedure
Graphical User Interface Applications
The section contains the procedures necessary to create and configure graphical user interface (GUI)
Application
objects.
Procedure:
Creating and configuring a GUI Application object using Genesys Administrator
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
At least one of the servers to which the GUI connects is installed.
•
You are logged in to Genesys Administrator.
306 Framework 8.1
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Graphical User Interface Applications
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator, go to
Provisioning > Environment >
Applications,
and select
New
in the toolbar.
2. From the available application templates in the
Browse
dialog box, choose
the template for this application. (See “Application Templates” on page 293
for information about templates.)
3. In the
General
section of the
Configuration
tab, enter a name for this application in the text box. The application template provides information for the application type and version.
4. Select the
Connections
tab. If necessary, add connections to any server applications to which this GUI application must connect.
5. Click
Save
to save your changes. The new GUI application is now listed in the list of applications.
End of procedure
Procedure:
Creating and configuring a GUI Application object using Configuration Manager
Prerequisites
•
The Configuration Layer is installed and running.
•
At least one of the servers to which the GUI connects is installed.
•
You are logged in to Configuration Manager.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager, select the
Environment > Applications
folder.
2. Select
File > New > Application.
3. From the available application templates in the
Browse
dialog box, choose
the template for this application. (See “Application Templates” on page 293
for information about templates.)
4. Select the
General
tab of the
Properties
dialog box and enter a name for this Application in the text box. The application template provides information for the application type and version.
5. Select the
Connections
tab. If necessary, add connections to any server applications to which this GUI application must connect.
6. Click
OK
to save your changes and exit the
Properties
dialog box.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 307
Appendix B: Standard Configuration Procedure Graphical User Interface Applications
308 Framework 8.1
Appendix
C
Standard Installation
Procedure
This appendix provides instructions for installing a typical Genesys application that you have configured using Configuration Manager.
This appendix contains the following sections:
Graphical User Interface Applications, page 313
Troubleshooting the Installation, page 314
Refer to the instructions for a particular application for the location of installation packages on a product CD and for any application-specific deviations from the standard installation procedure.
Server Applications
This section describes a standard installation procedure for a server application on UNIX and Windows operating systems.
Procedure:
Installing a server application on UNIX
Warning!
During installation on UNIX, all files are copied into the directory you specify. The install process does not create any subdirectories within this directory,; therefore, do not install different products into the same directory.
Deployment Guide 309
Appendix C: Standard Installation Procedure Server Applications
Prerequisites
•
An
Application
object exists for the server application. See either the
procedure or “Creating and configuring a Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 298
.
Start of procedure
1. Insert the product CD with this application into the CD-ROM drive of the application host computer.
2. In the appropriate directory, locate a shell script called install.sh
.
3. Run this script from the command prompt by typing the file name.
4. When prompted, specify the
Host Name
of the computer on which this server is to run.
5. When prompted, specify the:
•
Host Name of the computer on which Configuration Server is running.
•
Port
used by client applications to connect to Configuration Server.
•
User Name
used to log in to the Configuration Layer.
•
Password
used to log in to the Configuration Layer.
6. The installation displays the list of applications of the specified type configured for this host. Type the number of the server application that should be installed.
7. Specify the destination directory into which this server is to be installed, with the full path to it.
If the installation script finds that the destination directory is not empty, it suggests that you do one of the following:
•
Back up all files in the directory.
•
Overwrite only the files contained in this package.
•
Wipe the directory clean.
Type the number that corresponds to your selection and confirm your choice.
8. If asked which version of the product to install, either the 32-bit or the
64-bit, choose the one appropriate to your environment.
9. If you plan to use functionality that requires a license, such as Solution
Control Server (SCS) with Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP), type y
when prompted and enter one of the following:
•
The full path to the license file
•
The License Manager port and host
End of procedure
310 Framework 8.1
Appendix C: Standard Installation Procedure Server Applications
As soon as the installation process is finished, a message appears indicating that installation was successful. The process places the server application in the directory specified during the installation.
Procedure:
Installing a server application on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Prerequisites
•
An
Application
object exists for the server application. See either the
procedure or “Creating and configuring a Server Application object using
Genesys Administrator” on page 298
.
Start of procedure
1. From the product CD with this server application, open the appropriate directory.
2. Locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
3. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the server’s Release Notes file.
4. Click
Next
on the
Welcome
page to proceed with the installation.
Tip: Click
Next at the end of each step to proceed to the next page.
5. On the
Connection Parameters to the Genesys Configuration Server page, specify the following login parameters:
•
Host
and port
of Configuration Server
•
User name
and password
used to log in to the Configuration Layer.
6. The
Select Application
page displays all applications of this type that the
Configuration Database contains. When you select one application from the list, the wizard displays some parameters configured for the selected application (such as application type, host, working directory, command line, and command-line arguments).
Select the application to install.
Deployment Guide 311
Appendix C: Standard Installation Procedure Server Applications
Tip: If the component does not require a technical license, omit
8 . If the component requires a technical license for startup, omit Step 7 . If
the component requires a technical license to enable a certain feature, but the license is not otherwise required, proceed with
.
7. On the
Run-time License Configuration
page, select one of the following options:
•
Use License
if you plan to use features that require special licenses.
•
Without License
if you do not plan to use features that require special
licenses. In this instance, go to Step 9
.
If you decide to use a licensed feature later on, reinstall the server and enter the appropriate license information through the Genesys Installation
Wizard.
8. On the
Access to License
page, select one of the following options:
•
License Manager
—You want your server application to use host name and port number parameters to connect to the license server. In this instance, you must enter values for the host
and the port
of the license server.
•
License File
—You want your server application to retrieve license server information from the license file. Use the
Browse
button to navigate to the license file.
9. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the destination directory, as specified in the
Working Directory
property of the server’s
Application
object. If the path configured as
Working Directory
is invalid, the wizard generates a path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder. In this case, the wizard will update the
Application
object’s
Working Directory
in the
Configuration Database.
•
Default
button to reinstate the path specified in
Working Directory.
10. On the
Ready to Install
information page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with installation.
Installation Status
displays the installation progress.
11. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys server.
•
Windows
Services
list, as a Genesys service, with
Automatic
startup type.
End of procedure
312 Framework 8.1
Appendix C: Standard Installation Procedure Graphical User Interface Applications
Graphical User Interface Applications
This section describes a standard installation procedure for a graphical user interface (GUI) application on Windows operating systems. Genesys GUI applications are designed to operate on Windows only.
If you want to implement a security banner with the Genesys GUI application, make sure that you have the necessary files prepared before you start installing the GUI application. Refer to the Genesys Security Deployment Guide for detailed information about the security banner.
Procedure:
Installing a GUI application on Windows
Warning!
Genesys does not recommend installation of its components via a
Microsoft Remote Desktop connection. The installation should be performed locally.
Prerequisites
•
If you want to implement a security banner with the Genesys GUI application, make sure that you have the necessary files prepared before you start installing the GUI application. Refer to the Genesys Security
Deployment Guide for detailed information about the security banner.
Start of procedure
1. From the product CD with this application, open the appropriate directory.
2. Locate and double-click setup.exe
to start the Genesys Installation Wizard.
3. Use the
About
button on the wizard’s
Welcome
page to review the read_me file. The file also contains a link to the application’s Release Notes file.
4. Click
Next
to proceed with the installation.
5. On the
Security Banner Configuration
page, choose whether you want to configure a security banner for this GUI application. Refer to the Genesys
Security Deployment Guide for detailed information about the security banner. Do one of the following:
•
If you do not want to configure a security banner for this application, clear the
Enable Security Banner
check box, and click
Next.
•
If you want to configure a security banner for this application:
i. Select
Enable Security Banner
.
ii. Follow the instructions in the procedure “Installing and configuring the Security Banner” in the Genesys Security
Deployment Guide 313
Appendix C: Standard Installation Procedure Troubleshooting the Installation
Deployment Guide. When you are finished that procedure, return here and finish this procedure.
6. On the
Choose Destination Location
page, the wizard displays the path to the destination directory in the
C:\Program Files\GCTI\<Product Name> format.
If necessary, use the:
•
Browse
button to select another destination folder.
•
Default
button to reinstate the wizard-generated path (
C:\Program
Files\GCTI\<Product Name>
)
.
Click
Next.
Note:
If the GUI application requires any nonstandard installation input from the user, extra pages appear here.
7. On the
Ready to Install
page, click:
•
Back
to update any installation information.
•
Install
to proceed with the installation.
Installation Status
displays the installation progress.
8. On the
Installation Complete
page, click
Finish.
As a result of the installation, the wizard adds
Application
icons to the:
•
Windows
Start
menu, under
Programs > Genesys Solutions.
•
Windows
Add or Remove Programs window, as a Genesys application.
End of procedure
Troubleshooting the Installation
Procedure:
Troubleshooting the installation of a Genesys application
Purpose: To determine and fix the cause of a warning—generated during the installation procedure for any Genesys application—that Configuration Server is unavailable and that configuration cannot be updated.
Start of procedure
1. Finish installing the Genesys application.
314 Framework 8.1
Appendix C: Standard Installation Procedure Troubleshooting the Installation
2. When installation of the application is complete, open the Configuration tab (in Genesys Administrator) or the
Properties
dialog box (in
Configuration Manager) of the corresponding
Application
object.
3. Select the
State Enabled
check box.
4. Verify that the
Working Directory, Command Line,
and
Command Line
Arguments
are specified correctly.
5. Save the configuration updates.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 315
Appendix C: Standard Installation Procedure Troubleshooting the Installation
316 Framework 8.1
Appendix
D
Login Procedure
This appendix describes how to log in to a Framework graphical user interface
(GUI) application.
This appendix contains the following sections:
•
•
User Password Requirements and Restrictions, page 318
Logging In
When you start a Framework graphical user interface (GUI) application, or if you are being forced to log in again after a period of inactivity, a
Login
dialog box displays. The Configuration Layer checks the information specified in the
Login
dialog box and determines the user’s permission to view, create, and modify objects in the Configuration Database.
Note:
Configuration Layer will not allow users whose use of Genesys
Administrator or Configuration Manager has been disabled to log into
Genesys applications.
Procedure:
Logging in to a Framework GUI application
Start of procedure
1. Start the application. Refer to the documentation for the particular application for specific instructions.
2. In the
Login
dialog box:
a. Enter a user name. If you are logging in to the Configuration Layer for the first time, use the Master Account user name, which is default
.
Deployment Guide 317
Appendix D: Login Procedure User Password Requirements and Restrictions
After the appropriate configuration objects of the
User
type are added to the configuration, use a customized user name.
b. Enter a user password. If you are logging in to the Configuration Layer for the first time, use the Master Account password, which is password
.
After the appropriate configuration objects of the
User
type are added to the configuration, use your own password. Your System
Administrator will notify you if any requirements or restrictions apply to your password (see
).
If you have configured Configuration Server to allow access with a blank password, you can optionally leave the
Password
field empty.
Refer to the Framework Configuration Options Reference Manual for information on configuring this functionality.
c. Click either
Details
or
More options
to display additional input login fields.
d. Enter the application name, which is the instance of the application to which you are logging in, as it is registered in the Configuration
Database.
Note:
The predefined name of the Configuration Manager
Application
object is default.
You can rename it later.
e. Enter a host name, which is the name of the computer on which
Configuration Server runs.
f. Enter a port number, which is the number of the communication port that client applications use to connect to Configuration Server.
End of procedure
If your configuration uses both primary and backup Configuration Servers,
Configuration Manager and Solution Control Interface automatically reconnect to the backup server if they lose their connection to the primary server. You can specify automatic or manual reconnection; refer to the on-line Help file of your GUI application.
User Password Requirements and
Restrictions
Starting in release 8.1.1, the System Administrator or other authorized person can configure restrictions for user passwords and how they are used. The restrictions include:
•
The type and case of characters allowed in a password.
•
Whether a password can expire, and the expiration time interval.
318 Framework 8.1
Appendix D: Login Procedure User Password Requirements and Restrictions
•
After using a given password, how many different passwords must be used before using that given password again, or if re-use is permitted at all.
•
Whether the user must change their password the next time they log in.
•
The number of unsuccessful login attempts can be made after which the account is locked.
For more information about these requirements, and how to configure them, refer to the Framework Security Deployment Guide.
Deployment Guide 319
Appendix D: Login Procedure User Password Requirements and Restrictions
320 Framework 8.1
Appendix
E
Internet Protocol version 6
(IPv6)
This appendix describes Internet Protocol version 6, commonly known as
IPv6, and how it is supported and implemented in Genesys software.
This appendix contains the following sections:
Genesys 8.1 IPv6 Support, page 331
Deployment Considerations, page 333
Notes:
• This appendix contains a detailed description of IPv6 and
deployment considerations associated with it. See “IPv6 vs. IPv4
for information about activating support for
IPv6 for a Genesys component. For a list of Framework connections
that support IPv6, see “IPv6 Support” on page 37
.
• This appendix includes material that is freely available on the
Internet and from other public sources.
Overview of IPv6
IPv6 is a network layer for packet-switched inter-networks. It is designated as the successor of IPv4, the current version of the Internet Protocol, for general use on the Internet.
Deployment Guide 321
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
Addressing
Overview of IPv6
The primary change from IPv4 to IPv6 is the length of network addresses. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits long (as defined by RFC 4291), whereas IPv4 addresses are 32 bits. This amounts to an address space for IPv4 of approximately 4 billion addresses, compared to 3.4 x 10
38
unique addresses for IPv6.
IPv6 addresses are typically composed of two logical parts: a 64-bit network or subnetwork prefix, and a 64-bit host part. This host part is either generated automatically from the MAC address of the interface, or assigned sequentially.
Because globally unique MAC addresses offer an opportunity to track user equipment (and therefore users) across IPv6 address changes, RFC 3041 was developed to reduce the chance of user identity being permanently tied to an
IPv6 address, thus restoring some of the anonymity existing with IPv4. RFC
3041 specifies a mechanism by which time-varying random bit strings can be used as interface circuit identifiers, replacing unchanging and traceable MAC addresses.
Notation
IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons (
:
). For example:
2001:0db8:85a3:08d3:1319:8a2e:0370:7334
If one or more four-digit groups is
0000
, the zeros can be omitted and replaced with two colons (
::
). For example:
2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:1428:57ab can be shortened to
2001:0db8::1428:57ab
Following this rule, any number of consecutive
0000
groups can be reduced to two colons, as long as there is only one double colon used in an address.
Leading zeros in a group can also be omitted (as in
::1
for a localhost address). Therefore, the following addresses are all valid and are equivalent:
2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:1428:57ab
2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000::1428:57ab
2001:0db8:0:0:0:0:1428:57ab
2001:0db8:0:0::1428:57ab
2001:0db8::1428:57ab
2001:db8::1428:57ab
Note that having more than one double-colon syntax element in an address is invalid, as it would make the notation ambiguous. For example, the following address:
2001:0000:0000:FFD3:0000:0000:0000:57ab abbreviated to
2001::FFD3::57ab
322 Framework 8.1
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Overview of IPv6 could imply any of the following:
2001:0000:0000:0000:0000:FFD3:0000:57ab
2001:0000:FFD3:0000:0000:0000:0000:57ab or any other similar permutation.
For more information about IPV6 addressing, refer to RFC 4291.
Literal IPv6 Addresses in URLs
In a URL, the IPv6 address is enclosed in brackets. For example: http://[2001:0db8:85a3:08d3:1319:8a2e:0370:7344]/
This notation enables the parsing of a URL without confusing the IPv6 address and port number, such as in: https://[2001:0db8:85a3:08d3:1319:8a2e:0370:7344]:443/
Additional information can be found in RFCs 2732 and 3986.
Network Notation
IPv6 networks are written using Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation.
An IPv6 network (or subnet) is a contiguous group of IPv6 addresses, the size of which must be a power of two. The initial bits of any address in the network are called the prefix, and are identical for all hosts in the network.
A network is denoted by the first address in the network, and the size (in bits) of the prefix (in decimal), separated with a forward-slash (/). For example:
2001:0db8:1234::/48 stands for the network with addresses
2001:0db8:1234:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 through
2001:0db8:1234:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
Because a single host can be seen as a network with a 128-bit prefix, host addresses are often followed with
/128
.
Kinds of IPv6 addresses
IPv6 addresses are divided into the following categories (see RFC 4291 – IP
Version 6 Addressing Architecture):
•
unicast addresses
•
multicast addresses
•
anycast addresses
Deployment Guide 323
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Overview of IPv6
Unicast Addresses
A unicast address identifies a single network interface. A packet sent to a unicast address is delivered to that specific computer. The following types of addresses are unicast IPv6 addresses:
•
Global unicast addresses
•
Link-local addresses (prefix fe80::/10
): Valid only on a single link; analogous to
169.254.0.0/16
in IPv4
•
Unique local IPv6 unicast addresses
•
Special addresses (see examples in Table 9
)
Table 9: Examples of Special Addresses
::/128
::1/128
The address with all zeros is an unspecified address, and is to be used only in software.
The loopback address is a localhost address. It corresponds to
127.0.0.1
in IPv4.
::ffff:0:0/96
This prefix is used for IPv4-mapped addresses (see
“Transition Mechanisms” on page 325 ).
2002::/16 This prefix is used for 6to4 addressing.
2001:db8::/32
This prefix is used in documentation (RFC 3849).
Anywhere where an example of an IPv6 address is given, addresses from this prefix should be used.
Multicast Addresses
Multicast addresses are used to define a set of interfaces that typically belong to different nodes instead of just one. When a packet is sent to a multicast address, the protocol delivers the packet to all interfaces identified by that address. Multicast addresses begin with the prefix
FF00::/8
. The second octet identifies the scope of the addresses, that is, the range over which the multicast address is propagated. Commonly used scopes include link-local (
0x2
), site-local (
0x5
) and global (
0xE
).
Anycast Addresses
Anycast addresses are also assigned to more than one interface belonging to different nodes. However, a packet sent to an anycast address is delivered to just one of the member interfaces, typically the closest as defined by the routing protocol. Anycast addresses cannot be easily identified. They have the structure of normal unicast addresses, and differ only by being injected into the routing protocol at multiple points in the network.
324 Framework 8.1
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Overview of IPv6
Broadcast Addresses
There are no address ranges reserved for broadcast in IPv6. Applications use multicast to the all-hosts group instead. The Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA) maintains the official list of the IPv6 address space. Global unicast assignments can be found on the various Regional Internet Registries
(RIR) or on the Ghost Route Hunter Default Free Prefixes (GRH DFP) pages.
Transition Mechanisms
Until IPv6 completely supplants IPv4, which is not expected to occur in the foreseeable future, a number of transition mechanisms are needed to enable
IPv6-only hosts to reach IPv4 services and to allow isolated IPv6 hosts and networks to reach the IPv6 Internet over the IPv4 infrastructure. An overview of some of the various IPv6 transitions that currently exist are provided at: http://www.sixxs.net/faq/connectivity/?faq=comparison
Dual Stack
Because IPv6 is a conservative extension of IPv4, it is relatively easy to write a network stack that supports both IPv4 and IPv6 while sharing most of the source code. Such an implementation is called a dual stack, and a host implementing a dual stack is called a dual-stack host. This approach is described in RFC 4213.
Most current implementations of IPv6 use a dual stack. Some early experimental implementations used independent IPv4 and IPv6 stacks. There are no known implementations that implement IPv6 only.
Tunneling
To reach the IPv6 Internet, an isolated host or network must be able to use the existing IPv4 infrastructure to carry IPv6 packets. This is done using a technique referred to as tunneling. Tunneling consists of encapsulating IPv6 packets within IPv4, in effect using IPv4 as a link layer for IPv6.
IPv6 packets can be directly encapsulated within IPv4 packets using Protocol
41. They can also be encapsulated within User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets, for example, to cross a router or Network Address Translation (NAT) device that blocks Protocol 41 traffic. They can also use generic encapsulation schemes, such as Anything In Anything (AYIYA) or Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE).
Deployment Guide 325
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) IPv6 Architecture
IPv6 Architecture
Dual-Stack IPv6 Implementation
Genesys support for IPv6 relies on true dual-stack IPv6 implementation of the operating system as specified in RFC 3493. Conceptually, the configuration of a dual-stack machine with a v4 TCP and a v6 TCP application is shown in
.
Application Layer
V4 Application V6 Application
Transport Layer
TCP
Network Layer
IPv4
UDP
IPv6
Physical Layer Ethernet FDDI
Figure 12: Dual-Stack Architecture
Using this approach, you can write an application that can operate with both
IPv4 and IPv6 peers using just one socket. In addition, an application that uses a properly designed Transport Layer library and does not have to operate directly with IP addresses (and other Network Layer elements) may not be aware of the IP version used at all.
Microsoft Windows Implementation
Microsoft uses slightly different terminology when describing IPv6 architecture. For Microsoft, dual-layer refers to dual-network layers sharing a single transport layer. Dual-stack refers to dual-network layers and dual transport layers, that is, two separate stacks. Only a dual-layer architecture is compliant with RFC 3493.
326 Framework 8.1
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) IPv6 Architecture
Tip:
In this document dual-stack always refers to RFC 3493-compliant implementations, not the Microsoft definition.
Windows Server 2000/2003 and Windows XP
diagrams Microsoft Windows IPv6 implementation prior to
Windows Vista. Microsoft calls this a dual-stack architecture, but it is actually implemented as two separate stacks with separate TCP and UDP paths. This implementation forces an application to open separate sockets to talk to IPv4 and IPv6 peers.
V4 Application V6 Application
TCP for
IPv4
UDP for IPv4
TCP for
IPv6
IPv4 IPv6
UDP for
IPv6
Ethernet FDDI
Figure 13: Microsoft IPv6 Stack Prior to Windows Vista
Windows Vista
In Windows Vista, Microsoft calls its next generation IP stack dual-layer architecture, but it is actually a correct dual-stack implementation as described previously in this appendix, where there is only a single transport layer component for TCP and UDP.
Operating Systems Supporting Dual-Stack Architecture for
IPv6
Operating system support of dual-stack IPv6 implementation (RFC
3493-compliant) by different operating system platforms is provided in
Deployment Guide 327
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) DNS
. Refer to platform-specific documentation (including web sites) for additional information about supporting and implementing IPv6.
Table 10: Operating Systems Supporting Dual-Stack Architecture for IPv6
Operating System
AIX
HP-UX
Linux
Mac OS X
Solaris
Windows
Supporting Releases
AIX 4.3.3 and later
HP-UX v11i and later kernel 2.6 (Red Hat Enterprise Linux release 4) and later
Mac OS 10.3 Panther and later
Solaris 8 and later
Windows Vista and later, Windows Server 2008 and later
DNS
Genesys products are using Domain Name System (DNS) resolution of hostnames specified in configuration, and require that the DNS is operating according to the AAAA schema. IPv6 addresses are represented in the Domain
Name System by
AAAA
records (so-called quad-A records) for forward lookups; reverse lookups take place under ip6.arpa
(previously ip6.int
), where the address space is delegated on nibble boundaries. This scheme, which is a straightforward adaptation of the familiar A record and in-addr.arpa schemes,
is defined in RFC 3596. Table 11
describes the fields in an AAAA record.
Table 11: AAAA Record Fields
Field Name
NAME
TYPE
CLASS
TTL
RDLENGTH
RDATA
Description
Domain name
AAAA (28)
Internet (1)
Time to live (seconds)
Length of RDATA field
String form of the IPv6 address as described in RFC 3513
328 Framework 8.1
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Virtualization
RFC 3484 specifies how applications should select an IPv6 or IPv4 address for use, including addresses retrieved from DNS. For mixed networks, the DNS must provide both A and AAAA records.
On a historical note, the AAAA schema was one of two proposals at the time the IPv6 architecture was being designed. The other proposal, designed to facilitate network renumbering, would have had A6 records for the forward lookup and a number of other innovations such as bit-string labels and
DNAME records. It is defined in the experimental RFC 2874 and its references
(with further discussion of the advantages and disadvantages of both schemes in RFC 3364).
Virtualization
There are no known restrictions from the Genesys side for deploying IPv6 in a virtual operating environment. Check with the documentation specific to the virtual environment you are using for more information and any limitations.
License Control
Note:
The information in this section is based on information provided in
Flexera documentation, and may be specific to their products. For information about IPv6 support and implementation for other licensing products, consult documentation specific to the product.
Genesys uses FlexLM 9.5 and FlexNet Publisher 11.9-based license control, but only the FlexNet Publisher Licensing toolkit 11.9 supports IPv6. Genesys
License Server 8.1 uses FlexNet Publisher 11.9 for all platforms.
Table 12 on page 330 summarizes the addressing compatibility of a FlexNet
License Server Machine and a Flex-enabled Application Server, as described in this section.
In the license file, an IPv6 address should be defined as the host
value in the
SERVER
line. Entries in the license search path that use the port@host
convention to identify the license serve, can also specify an IPv6 address as the host
value.
Deployment Guide 329
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) License Control
Table 12: Address Compatibility Between FlexNet License Server and Application
Server
IPv4-only
FlexNet License Server Machine
Dual
IPv4/IPv6
Stack
Use IPv4 only
IPv6-only No Server
IPv4-only
Dual Stack using IPv4 only
Use IPv4 only
Use IPv4, IPv6, or both
Flex-enabled
Application
Server
Dual Stack using IPv4 and IPv6
Dual Stack using IPv6 only
Not supported Use IPv6 only
Not supported Use IPv4 only
Use IPv6 only
Use IPv4, IPv6, or both
Use IPv6 only
IPv6-only a
a. Genesys does not recommend or support IPv6-only environments.
Deploying License Servers in Mixed Protocol Environments
For FlexNet Publisher components to work properly using IPv6 addresses, all systems in an enterprise (including the network hardware and software) must be configured properly to support communication using IPv6 addresses.
Before testing or deploying a FlexEnabled application that supports IPv6 or
IPv4/IPv6 dual communication, make sure that all systems on the network can communicate successfully. If the license server can run under any of the following operating systems:
•
Any supported edition of Windows Vista
•
Any supported Linux platform
•
Any supported Unix platform it can communicate with FlexEnabled clients using either IPv4 or IPv6, so long as the network is configured properly:
Because these operating systems support dual-layer communication, both IPv4 and IPv6 FlexEnabled clients can communicate with an IPv6 license server. In addition, IPv6 clients can communicate with an IPv4 license server using the
IPv4 address.
330 Framework 8.1
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Genesys 8.1 IPv6 Support
The FlexNet Publisher license sever lmadmin supports both IPv4 and IPv6 clients. If you are using it, you must rename one of your vendor daemon executable files, because separate IPv4 and IPv6 vendor daemons are required.
If the license server runs on Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, there are certain limitations because of the limited dual-layer support on these operating
systems (see “Windows Server 2000/2003 and Windows XP” on page 327
).
IPv4 FlexEnabled clients cannot communicate with an IPv6 license server running on these operating systems. However, IPv6 FlexEnabled clients can communicate with an IPv4 license server running on these operating systems.
If an enterprise runs license servers on Windows 2003 or Windows XP, the license administrators should create and maintain two separate networks - one for IPv6 FlexEnabled clients that will use the IPv6 license server, and one for
IPv4 FlexEnabled clients that will use the IPv4 license server.
Using Wildcards in an IPv6 Address
An asterisk (
*
) can be used as a wildcard character in place of an entire field or on a byte-by-byte basis to specify a range of addresses without having to list them all. See the following example:
The following feature definition line is locked to four specific addresses:
FEATURE f1 myvendor 1.0 1-jan-2010 uncounted \
HOSTID="INTERNET=127.17.0.1,\
INTERNET=2001:0db8:0000:0000:ff8f:effa:13da:0001,\
INTERNET=127.17.0.4,\
INTERNET=2001:0db8:0000:0000:ff8f:effa:13da:0004" \
SIGN=”<...>”
The following feature definition line specifies an entire range of addresses, including the four specific ones from the line above:
FEATURE f1 myvendor 1.0 1-jan-2010 uncounted \
HOSTID="INTERNET=127.17.0.*,\
INTERNET=2001:0db8:0000:0000:*:*:*:000*"\
SIGN=”<...>”
Genesys 8.1 IPv6 Support
Genesys supports IPv6 as described in this section.
Common Principles
The implementation of IPv6 in Genesys is based on the following assumptions:
•
Dual-stack requirement and backward compatibility
•
Dual IPv4/IPv6 server sockets
•
IPv4 preference for DNS
Deployment Guide 331
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Genesys 8.1 IPv6 Support
Dual-Stack Requirement and Backward Compatibility
Only dual-stack IPv6 implementations are supported. Support of IPv6 on
Windows 2002/2003 and XP is not required, while all recent versions of UNIX have dual-stack support already. However, the connection layer must still operate on all other platforms in IPv4 mode only.
On the platforms where IPv6 support is available, the default mode of operation is IPv4 for backward compatibility. IPv6 support must be turned on explicitly by each application using one of the following methods:
•
Set the environment variable
GCTI_CONN_IPV6_ON
to
1
.
•
In the common
section of the
Application
object’s options, set enable-ipv6 to
1
.
Refer to “IPv6 vs. IPv4 Overview” on page 59 for more details about enabling
IPv6 in Genesys software.
Note:
IPv6 is, by default, not enabled. But once it is enabled using one of the methods described above, it can only be disabled by turning it off in both places—the environment variable and the option. That is, turning it off in one location only disables it if it is not enabled in the other.
Dual IPv4/IPv6 Server Sockets
By default, a server socket opened by a standard method should accept both
IPv4 and IPv6 client connections. That is, unless IPv6 is disabled on a particular node, unbound server sockets are opened with the AF_INET6 family and use the
AI_V4MAPPED
flag to interact with IPv4 clients. However, a server socket bound to a particular IP address (either IPv4 or IPv6) only accepts a connection of the same IP family.
IPv4 Preference for DNS
Within an application, a name service should be used whenever possible. An
AAAA record may return both a IPv4 and IPv6 address for dual stack nodes.
For backward compatibility reasons, client connections in this case should prefer IPv4 over IPv6. That preference can be set using the configuration option
ip-version
.
However, a client connection bound to a particular IP address (either IPv4 or
IPv6) can only interact with the server using a connection of the same IP family.
332 Framework 8.1
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Deployment Considerations
Implementation Characteristics
Individual Genesys components support the following features related to IPv6:
•
Full IPv6 support in DNS lookup: Support both AAAA records and DNS over IPv6.
•
Transparent server-side socket handling: The existing server-side interface allows IPv6 connections whenever possible using the
AI_V4MAPPED
flag.
•
Transparent client-side connection: The existing client-side connection interface allows IPv6 connections by host name or explicit IP address in text format.
•
DNS Lookup modes: Full DNS support using the synchronous method
(name lookup using standard system calls) and asynchronous DNS
(enabled by the enable-async-dns
option in the common
section of an
Application object’s options). Server and client side IPv6 sockets and connections are supported transparently, including hosts being addressed either by name, or by textual IP address in either IPv4 or IPv6 format.
•
IPv6-related changes in the configuration environment: Configuration
Server keeps IP addresses for all configured hosts, but it is not a replacement for DNS. However it is expected to be affected very little. In particular, a new field for the IPv6 address is not added to the
CfgHost structure; while the new configuration option ip-version
set at the connection level determines whether the connection uses IPv4 first (
4,6
; the default), or IPv6 first (
6,4
). To achieve compatibility with legacy servers (that is, a server without IPv6 support running on a dual-stack host, while IPv6-enabled clients try to connect), the suggested solution is to create an IPv4-only hostname alias for that host.
For more information about the two configuration options, refer to “IPv6 vs.
.
IPv6 Support by Genesys Products
To determine if a Genesys product supports IPv6, refer to the documentation
for that product. Framework connections that support IPv6 are listed in “IPv6
Deployment Considerations
When deploying IPv6 in your Genesys environment, you must take into consideration the factors discussed in this section.
Deployment Guide 333
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Deployment Considerations
Security
Preparation for IPv6 utilization will require careful planning of security measures, because IPv6 presents new challenges compared to IPv4. Some, but not all, of the challenges are discussed in this section.
TLS
In some deployments, multiple hostnames are assigned to a given computer, and are resolved to different IP versions. In this case, the TLS certificate of the given computer will have to be generated for all assigned hostnames.
Refer to the Genesys 8.x Security Deployment Guide for information about generating certificates.
Firewall and Client-Side Port
Genesys supports fine-grain firewall configuration at the port-level and applied both to incoming client connections and their target server destinations.
In IPv6 deployments, this might become even more valuable, for example, as a countermeasure against Network Discovery (ND) attacks. ND in IPv6 utilizes five different types of ICMPv6 messages for several purposes. ND attacks in
IPv6 will likely replace ARP spoofing in IPv4.
Internet Protocol Security
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is an optional feature in IPv4, but is mandatory in IPv6. In certain deployments, it could make the use of TLS unnecessary.
DNS Security Extensions
Genesys recommends the use of DNS Security Extensions (DNSSEC), but it is not mandatory. There are no dependencies from the Genesys side.
IP Tunneling
When connecting sites, you may want to use IP tunneling. For example, two sites could be operating in IPv4 mode while the interconnection requires IPv6.
In this case, one could consider embedding the IPv4 protocol into an IPv6 connection between sites.
334 Framework 8.1
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Deployment Considerations
Licensing
The G8.1 License Server (the Genesys vendor daemon) is based on FlexNet
Publisher 11.9, and is IPv6 enabled.
However, within G8.1 the IPv6-enabled licensing client libraries (FlexNet
Publisher 11.9) are implemented for only the RHEL 5 64-bit, Windows 2008
64-bit, and HP-UX Integrity (Itanium) operating systems. For all other platforms, the G8.1 applications are still using the older client libraries, which are not IPv6 enabled. This is done for to provide backward compatibility; otherwise, the deployment of a G8.1 application in an existing environment would have required a complete upgrade of the licensing system.
Therefore, Genesys recommends that IPv4 be used for licensing.
SIP
The SIP protocol can contain explicit IP address values. This creates additional challenges, for example at the NAT level, but also if the same SIP Server instance has to concurrently support multiple SIP interfaces where one is operating in IPv4 mode and another in IPv6 mode.
It is recommended to address those scenarios by using a dedicated SIP Server for IPv4 only and another one for IPv6 only.
You could also consider using available NAT solutions that perform configurable SIP protocol inspection and conversion. One example is F5
Networks Big-IP LTM.
Note:
IPv6 support for SIP is not yet implemented in Genesys components.
Thin Clients
Some Genesys client applications offer a web browser interface with an HTTP connection to a web server. These connections are under control of the given web technology, and all modern browsers already support IPv6. However, IPv6 must be enabled at both the client computer and server computer sides, and the
DNS involved must also support IPv6.
External Interfaces
IPv4 dependencies at external interfaces must be considered. This includes, for example, interfaces to Session Border Controllers (SBC), media gateways, switches, and databases.
Deployment Guide 335
Appendix E: Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) Deployment Considerations
Dynamic Runtime Changes
Changes in the IPv4/IPv6 configuration should be performed during maintenance windows, as they will require a restart of impacted processes.
These changes will include setting the following:
•
Transport parameter ip-version
•
DNS entries for hostnames
•
Local computing node settings
Third-Party Dependencies
Genesys uses several third-party products as part of the suite. The IPv6 capabilities of those products must be considered.
336 Framework 8.1
Appendix
F
Silent Setup
This appendix describes the purpose and configuration of Silent Setup.
This appendix contains the following sections:
Creating the Response File, page 338
Running the Silent Installation, page 339
About the Silent Setup Log File, page 339
Introduction
InstallShield Silent allows for an automated electronic software distribution, also known as a silent setup. InstallShield Silent only works on Windows operating systems. With InstallShield Silent, you do not have to monitor the setup or provide input via dialog boxes. Once this information is stored in a
response file, an InstallShield Silent setup runs on its own, without any intervention by the end-user.
An installation procedure for a server application differs slightly from an installation procedure for a GUI application. Both, however, require that you create a response file with the necessary parameters and then use it for the actual installation.
The following Framework components support Silent Setup installation:
•
DB Server
•
Configuration Server
•
Configuration Manager
•
Message Server
•
Solution Control Server
•
Solution Control Interface
•
T-Server
Deployment Guide 337
Appendix F: Silent Setup Creating the Response File
•
HA Proxy
•
Stat Server
Creating the Response File
To select setup options and automatically record the InstallShield Silent response file, run your setup with the following command line: setup -r
Your responses to the dialog boxes are recorded and used to create a response file. By default, the response file is named
Setup.iss, and is stored in the
Windows
directory of your computer. To specify a different directory or file name for the response file, add
/f1“[full_path to iss file\]<FileName>”
to the setup command. Include the double quotes and do not put a space between
/f1
and the path—for example: setup –r /f1”C:\GCTI\silent_response_files\mySetup.iss”
Note:
In the optional argument, the
/f1 portion uses the numeral one (1), not the letter l.
Subsequently, use the response file any time you need to install an application with the configured parameters.
Sample Response File (setup.iss)
[InstallShield Silent]
Version=v5.00.000
File=Response File
[File Transfer]
OverwriteReadOnly=NoToAll
[DlgOrder]
Dlg0=SdWelcome-0
Count=4
Dlg1=SdAskDestPath-0
Dlg2=SdSetupTypeEx-0
Dlg3=SdFinishReboot-0
[SdWelcome-0]
Result=1
[SdAskDestPath-0] szDir=C:\GCTI\TestSiebel2KSilentMode
Result=1
[SdSetupTypeEx-0]
Result=typical
[Application]
Name=G-Plus Adapter 6.5 for Siebel 2000
Version=6.5
Company=GCTI
338 Framework 8.1
Appendix F: Silent Setup Running the Silent Installation
Lang=0009
[SdFinishReboot-0]
Result=1
BootOption=0
The response file contains saved information about the number of dialog boxes displayed, the order in which the dialog boxes were displayed, the values of any data entered or selected by the end user, and which button the user clicked to close the dialog box.
Running the Silent Installation
Launch the InstallShield Silent Installation with this command line:
Setup.exe -s /f1“<full path to Setup.iss>” /f2“<full path to setup log file>”
Where:
< full path to Setup.iss
>
The full path to the Setup.iss file put within double quotation marks. For example:
"c:\winnt\setup.iss"
(by default, Setup.exe looks for a response file called
Setup.iss in the same directory as Setup.exe)
< full path to setup log file
>
The full path to the setup log file put within double quotation marks. For example:
"c:\winnt\setup.log"
(by default, setup.log generated in the same directory as the response file being used)
A silent installation program does not display a dialog if an error occurs. The status information for the silent installation is recorded (by default) in a file called setup.log.
Note:
Do not enter a space between the f1 or f2 parameter and its value in double quotation marks.
The log file generated as a result of the Silent Setup procedure is described in the following section.
About the Silent Setup Log File
InstallShield Silent prints installation results into a setup log file.
The default name for the silent setup log file is
Setup.log,
and its default location is on Disk1, in the same folder as
Setup.iss.
You can specify a different name and location for you setup log file using the f2 switch when launching
Setup.exe.
Deployment Guide 339
Appendix F: Silent Setup About the Silent Setup Log File
The Setup.log file contains three sections. The first entry in the first section,
[InstallShield Silent],
identifies the version of InstallShield Silent used in the silent setup. The second entry identifies the file as a log file.
Entries in the second section,
[Application],
identify the installed application's name and version and the company name.
The third section,
[ResponseResult],
contains the result code indicating whether the silent setup has succeeded. One of the following integer return values is assigned to the
ResultCode
key name in this section:
0
-1
Success.
General error.
-6
-7
-8
-2
-3
-4
-5
Invalid mode.
Required data not found in the Setup.iss file.
Not enough memory.
File does not exist.
Cannot write to the response file.
Unable to write to the uninstallation log file.
Invalid path to the InstallShield Silent response file.
-9 Not a valid list type (string or number).
-10 Data type is invalid.
-11 Unknown error during setup.
-12 Dialog boxes are out of order.
-51 Cannot create the specified folder.
-52 Cannot access the specified file or folder.
-53 Invalid option selected.
Sample Setup Log File
The
Setup.log
file for a T-Server application successfully installed with
InstallShield Silent is shown below.
[InstallShield Silent]
Version=v5.00.000
File=Log File
[Application]
Name=Genesys T-Server 7.0 for Rockwell Spectrum
Version=7.0
Company=GCTI
Lang=0009
[ResponseResult]
ResultCode=0
340 Framework 8.1
appendix
G
Installation Worksheet
This appendix contains tables that you can use to help prepare for and perform the installation of Framework components.
This appendix contains the following sections:
How to Prepare a Worksheet, page 341
Database Connections, page 347
How to Prepare a Worksheet
1. Fill in the database information in Table 14 on page 342
.
2. Fill in the License Manager and license file(s) information in Table 15 on page 344
.
3. Fill in the main configuration parameters you specify for Framework
applications in Table 16 on page 344
. Note that:
All applications must be configured in the Configuration Layer unless otherwise noted.
Host name or IP address can be specified as the value for the host parameter.
Application port and working directory are only specified for server applications.
Working directory is the full path to the directory in which the application is installed and/or is to be running.
4. For Windows applications, fill in the
Program Folder
information in
Deployment Guide 341
appendix G: Installation Worksheet How to Prepare a Worksheet
Table 13: Installation Worksheet
Installation Worksheet
Person responsible
Start date
Completion date
Database information
Program folders (for
Windows applications)
Refer to
Table 14 .
Licensing information
Refer to
Table 15 on page 344
.
Application configuration Refer to
Table 16 on page 344
.
Refer to
Table 17 on page 346
.
Table 14: Database Information
Parameter Value
DBMS Name
DBMS Type
Description
Configuration Database
The name or alias identifying the SQL server DBMS that handles the database.
• For DB2, this value should be set to the name or alias-name of the database specified in the db2 client configuration.
• For Informix, this value is the name of SQL server, specified in the sqlhosts file.
• For Microsoft SQL, this value should be set to the name of the SQL server (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which Microsoft SQL runs).
• For Oracle, it is the name of the Listener service.
• For PostgreSQL, this value should be set to the name of the PostgreSQL server (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which PostgreSQL runs).
• For Sybase, this is the server name stored in the
Sybase interface file.
The type of DBMS that handles the database.
342 Framework 8.1
appendix G: Installation Worksheet How to Prepare a Worksheet
Table 14: Database Information (Continued)
Parameter
Database Name
User Name
Password
DBMS Name
DBMS Type
Database Name
User Name
Password
Value Description
The name of the database as it is specified in your
DBMS. This value is required for all database types except Oracle. For Sybase, Informix, DB2, Microsoft
SQL, and PostgreSQL, this value is the name of the database where the client will connect.
The user name established to access the database.
The password used for accessing the database.
Log Database
The name or alias identifying the SQL server DBMS that handles the database.
• For DB2, this value should be set to the name or alias-name of the database specified in the db2 client configuration.
• For Informix, this value is the name of SQL server, specified in the sqlhosts file.
• For Microsoft SQL, this value should be set to the name of the SQL server (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which Microsoft SQL runs).
• For Oracle, it is the name of the Listener service.
• For PostgreSQL, this value should be set to the name of the PostgreSQL server (usually the same as the host name of the computer on which PostgreSQL runs).
• For Sybase, this is the server name stored in the
Sybase interface file.
The type of DBMS that handles the database.
The name of the database as it is specified in your
DBMS. This value is required for all database types except Oracle. For Sybase, Informix, DB2, Microsoft
SQL, and PostgreSQL, this value is the name of the database where the client will connect.
The user name established to access the database.
The password used for accessing the database.
Deployment Guide 343
appendix G: Installation Worksheet
Table 15: Licensing Information
Parameter Value
License Manager host port
License Files full path to and name full path to and name full path to and name
How to Prepare a Worksheet
Table 16: Application Configuration Parameters
Application Type Application Name Application
Host
Configuration Layer Components
Application
Port
DB Server, Primary, for
Configuration Database
(configured via configuration file)
DB Server, Backup, for
Configuration Database
(configured via configuration file)
Configuration Server,
Primary (configured via configuration file)
Configuration Server,
Backup (configured via configuration file)
Configuration Manager
Working
Directory
Not applicable
344 Framework 8.1
appendix G: Installation Worksheet How to Prepare a Worksheet
Table 16: Application Configuration Parameters (Continued)
Application Type
Local Control Agent
Application Name Application
Host
Application
Port
Working
Directory
Management Layer Components
Not applicable (Configured in
Host
Properties)
Not applicable
DB Server, Primary, for Log Database
DB Server, Backup, for Log Database
Database Access Point
Message Server, Primary
Message Server, Backup
Solution Control Server,
Primary
Solution Control Server,
Backup
Solution Control Interface
SNMP Master Agent,
Primary
SNMP Master Agent,
Backup
Not applicable
Not applicable
User Interaction Layer Components
Genesys Administrator Not applicable
Media Layer Components
T-Server, Primary, for switch ...
T-Server, Backup, for switch ...
T-Server, Primary, for switch ...
Deployment Guide 345
appendix G: Installation Worksheet How to Prepare a Worksheet
Table 16: Application Configuration Parameters (Continued)
Application Type Application Name Application
Host
Application
Port
T-Server, Backup, for switch ...
Services Layer Components
Stat Server, Primary
Stat Server, Backup
Working
Directory
Table 17: Windows Application Program Folder
Application Program Folder
Configuration Layer Components
DB Server, Primary, for Configuration Database
(configured via configuration file)
DB Server, Backup, for Configuration Database
(configured via configuration file)
Configuration Server,
Primary (configured via configuration file)
Configuration Server,
Backup (configured via configuration file)
Configuration Manager
Management Layer Components
Local Control Agent
DB Server, Primary, for Log Database
DB Server, Backup, for Log Database
346 Framework 8.1
appendix G: Installation Worksheet
Table 17: Windows Application Program Folder (Continued)
Application
Message Server, Primary
Message Server, Backup
Solution Control Server,
Primary
Solution Control Server,
Backup
Solution Control Interface
SNMP Master Agent,
Primary
SNMP Master Agent,
Backup
Program Folder
User Interaction Layer Components
Genesys Administrator
Media Layer Components
T-Server, Primary, for switch ...
T-Server, Backup, for switch ...
T-Server, Primary, for switch ...
T-Server, Backup, for switch ...
Services Layer Components
Stat Server, Primary
Stat Server, Backup
Database Connections
Database Connections
Table 18 on page 348 shows how many connections to a database the
Framework components require.
Deployment Guide 347
appendix G: Installation Worksheet Database Connections
Table 19 on page 349 shows how many connections to a database the solution
and Reporting components require.
Table 18: Number of Database Connections Required for Framework
Components
Framework
Component
Connection to
DB Server/
Database
Number of
Simultaneous
Connections
Comments
Yes
Configuration Layer
2 Configuration
Server
Configuration
Conversion
Wizard
Yes
Yes
2
2
Temporary (either
Configuration Conversion
Wizard or Database
Initialization Wizard uses the connection at a given moment)
Temporary Database
Initialization
Wizard
Configuration
Import Wizard
No 0
Yes
No
Management Layer
1
0
Message Server
Solution Control
Server
Solution Control
Interface
SNMP Master
Agent
Yes
No
1
0
Genesys
Administrator
Yes
User Interaction Layer
1 Does not use DB Server, but connects to database directly based on the connection definition from the Database
Access Point
Total per
Layer
2 + 2
2
1
348 Framework 8.1
appendix G: Installation Worksheet Database Connections
Table 18: Number of Database Connections Required for Framework
Components (Continued)
Framework
Component
DB Server
Stat Server
Connection to
DB Server/
Database
No
Yes
Number of
Simultaneous
Connections
Comments
Services Layer
0
1 Stat Server has an option to save data directly into database tables; this operation takes one connection.
Total per
Layer
1
Table 19: The Number of Database Connections Required for Solutions’
Components
Solution
Component
Connection to
DB Server/
Database
Number of
Simultaneous
Connections
Comments
Yes
Outbound Solution
n One per list Outbound
Contact Server
Outbound
Contact
Manager
Yes 1
Universal
Routing Server
Universal Routing Solution
Yes 0–1 In theory, the number of connections is unlimited
Reporting
Yes 1 Call
Concentrator
Data Sourcer
IS Data Sourcer
ETL Runtime
Purging
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
20
2
2
2
DB Server
JDBC
JDBC
JDBC
Total per
Solution
1 + n
1
31
Deployment Guide 349
appendix G: Installation Worksheet Database Connections
Table 19: The Number of Database Connections Required for Solutions’
Components (Continued)
Solution
Component
Object Tracking
BRIO Server
BRIO Report
Designer
Connection to
DB Server/
Database
Yes
Yes
Yes
Number of
Simultaneous
Connections
Comments
1
2
1
JDBC
SQLNet/ODBC
SQLNet/ODBC
Total per
Solution
350 Framework 8.1
Supplements
Related Documentation
Resources
The following resources provide additional information that is relevant to this software. Consult these additional resources as necessary.
Genesys Framework
•
Framework 8.0 Architecture Help, which helps you view the place of a particular component in the Framework architecture and learn about
Framework functionality that is new to release 8.x.
•
Framework 8.1 Genesys Administrator Deployment Guide, which helps you deploy Genesys Administrator.
•
Framework 8.1 Genesys Administrator Help, which helps you use Genesys
Administrator.
•
Framework 8.1 Configuration Manager Help, which helps you use
Configuration Manager.
•
Framework 8.1 Configuration Options Reference Manual, which provides descriptions of configuration options for Framework components.
•
Framework 8.1 Management Layer User’s Guide, which helps you better understand how the Management Layer works and how to enable its functions.
•
Framework 8.0 Solution Control Interface Help, which helps you use
Solution Control Interface.
•
Release Notes and Product Advisories for this product, which are available on the Genesys Technical Support website at http://genesyslab.com/support
.
Genesys
•
Genesys 8.1 Security Deployment Guide, which describes the security features provided by Genesys software and provides detailed instructions on deploying the features.
Deployment Guide 351
Related Documentation Resources
•
Genesys Technical Publications Glossary, which ships on the Genesys
Documentation Library DVD and which provides a comprehensive list of the Genesys and computer-telephony integration (CTI) terminology and acronyms used in this document.
•
Genesys Migration Guide, which ships on the Genesys Documentation
Library DVD, and which provides documented migration strategies for
Genesys product releases. Contact Genesys Technical Support for more information.
Information about supported hardware and third-party software is available on the Genesys Technical Support website in the following documents:
•
Genesys Supported Operating Environment Reference Guide
•
Genesys Supported Media Interfaces Reference Guide
Consult the following additional resources as necessary:
•
Genesys Hardware Sizing Guide, which provides information about
Genesys hardware sizing guidelines for the Genesys 8.x releases.
•
Genesys Interoperability Guide, which provides information on the compatibility of Genesys products with various Configuration Layer
Environments; Interoperability of Reporting Templates and Solutions; and
Gplus Adapters Interoperability.
•
Genesys Licensing Guide, which introduces you to the concepts, terminology, and procedures that are relevant to the Genesys licensing system.
•
Genesys Database Sizing Estimator 8.x Worksheets, which provides a range of expected database sizes for various Genesys products.
For additional system-wide planning tools and information, see the release-specific listings of System Level Documents on the Genesys Technical
Support website, accessible from the system level documents by release
tab in the Knowledge Base
Browse Documents
Section.
Genesys product documentation is available on the:
•
Genesys Technical Support website at http://genesyslab.com/support
.
•
Genesys Documentation Library DVD, which you can order by e-mail from Genesys Order Management at [email protected]
.
352 Framework 8.1
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
This document uses certain stylistic and typographical conventions—introduced here—that serve as shorthands for particular kinds of information.
Document Version Number
A version number appears at the bottom of the inside front cover of this document. Version numbers change as new information is added to this document. Here is a sample version number:
81fr_dep_04-2012_v8.1.101.00
You will need this number when you are talking with Genesys Technical
Support about this product.
Screen Captures Used in This Document
Screen captures from the product graphical user interface (GUI), as used in this document, may sometimes contain minor spelling, capitalization, or grammatical errors. The text accompanying and explaining the screen captures corrects such errors except when such a correction would prevent you from installing, configuring, or successfully using the product. For example, if the name of an option contains a usage error, the name would be presented exactly as it appears in the product GUI; the error would not be corrected in any accompanying text.
Type Styles
describes and illustrates the type conventions that are used in this document.
Deployment Guide—Title of Book, if Needed (Title2) 353
Document Conventions
Table 20: Type Styles
Type Style Used For Examples
Italic • Document titles
• Emphasis
• Definitions of (or first references to) unfamiliar terms
• Mathematical variables
Also used to indicate placeholder text within code samples or commands, in the special case where angle brackets are a required part of the syntax (see the note about angle brackets on
).
Please consult the Genesys Migration
Guide for more information.
Do not use this value for this option.
A customary and usual practice is one that is widely accepted and used within a particular industry or profession.
The formula, x +1 = 7 where x stands for...
Monospace font
(Looks like teletype
or typewriter text
)
All programming identifiers and GUI elements. This convention includes:
• The names of directories, files, folders, configuration objects, paths, scripts, dialog boxes, options, fields, text and list boxes, operational modes, all buttons (including radio buttons), check boxes, commands, tabs, CTI events, and error messages.
• The values of options.
• Logical arguments and command syntax.
• Code samples.
Also used for any text that users must manually enter during a configuration or installation procedure, or on a command line.
Select the
Show variables on screen check box.
In the
Operand
text box, enter your formula.
Click
OK
to exit the
Properties
dialog box.
T-Server distributes the error messages in
EventError
events.
If you select true
for the inbound-bsns-calls
option, all established inbound calls on a local agent are considered business calls.
Enter exit
on the command line.
Square brackets ([ ])
A particular parameter or value that is optional within a logical argument, a command, or some programming syntax. That is, the presence of the parameter or value is not required to resolve the argument, command, or block of code. The user decides whether to include this optional information.
smcp_server -host [/flags]
Angle brackets
(< >)
A placeholder for a value that the user must specify. This might be a DN or a port number specific to your enterprise.
Note: In some cases, angle brackets are required characters in code syntax (for example, in XML schemas). In these cases, italic text is used for placeholder values.
smcp_server -host <confighost>
354 Framework 8.1
Index
Symbols
:memory: (configuration option)
A access control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Access Group objects
Access Groups changing default permissions
default
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Master Account
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Users
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
access hosts file at startup
access privileges
Access Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Ranks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
active (configuration option)
ADDP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
between SCS and LCA
configuring in Configuration Manager
configuring in Genesys Administrator
redundant Configuration Servers
addp-remote-timeout (configuration option) redundant Configuration Servers
addp-timeout (configuration option) redundant Configuration Servers
addp-trace (configuration option) redundant Configuration Servers
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol
Agent Group objects
-app (command-line parameter) arguments with blank spaces
backup DB Server
backup Message Server
backup SNMP Master Agent
backup Solution Control Server
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
defined
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Message Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
SNMP Master Agent
Solution Control Server
with Windows Services
application failures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
application template creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
importing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Applications confserv
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
auto-detect (listening mode)
B backup Client DB Server configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
See also redundant Client DB Servers
backup Configuration DB Server configuration file
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
See also redundant Configuration DB Servers
backup Configuration Server configuration file
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
See also redundant Configuration Servers
backup DB Server
See backup Configuration DB Server or
backup Client DB Server backup Message Server configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
See also redundant Message Servers
backup SNMP Master Agent configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
See also redundant SNMP Master Agents
Deployment Guide 355
Index backup Solution Control Server configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
See also redundant Solution Control Servers
C
-c (command-line parameter) backup Configuration Server
backup DB Server
Configuration Server
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Solution Control Server
Centralized Log Database
-cfg (command-line parameter)
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
-cfglib_port (command-line parameter)
Configuration Server
-checkdb (command-line parameter)
Configuration Server
-checkerrors (command-line parameter)
Configuration Server
command-line parameters
-app
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
-c
,
-cfg
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
-cfglib_port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
-checkdb
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
-checkerrors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
-host
-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
-lmspath
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
-nco
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
-p
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
-port
-s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
-v
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
common log options
Configuration Database contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
database CfgLocale scripts
database initialization scripts
database types
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
initial installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
initializing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configuration Database section
Configuration DB Servers warm standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
configuration environments enterprise
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
hierarchical multi-tenant
multi-language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
configuration files
Configuration Server
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
SCS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuration History Log
Configuration Import Wizard recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Configuration Layer overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Configuration Manager configuring ADDP
configuring Configuration Server
configuring DB Server
configuring Log DB Server
configuring Message Server
configuring SNMP Master Agent
configuring Solution Control Interface
configuring Solution Control Server
creating DB Server
creating templates
importing templates
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
logging in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
configuration objects list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
configuration options
:memory:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
active
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
addp-remote-timeout
addp-timeout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
addp-trace
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
failsafe-store-processing
protocol
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
configuration procedure standard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Configuration Server configuration files
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
external authentication
History Log
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
installing on UNIX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
installing on Windows
multiple ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
read-only mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
starting
Configuration Server Proxy
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
external authentication
History Log
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
modifying Client Applications
proxy-writable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
356 Framework 8.1
Index recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
task summary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
writable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Configuration Server section
Configuration Unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
configuring
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
Database Access Points
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
GUI applications
Log DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Message Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
SNMP Master Agent
Solution Control Interface
Solution Control Server
Stat Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
confserv
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Application
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
confserv.conf
confserv.conf.sample
Contact Center objects
D database configuration objects
Database Access Points configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
defined
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
database CfgLocale scripts
Configuration Database
database failure
Oracle 11g RAC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
database failures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
database initialization scripts
Configuration Database
Log Database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
database types scripts for
Configuration Database
DB Server
Application
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
configuration files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
detecting DBMS failure
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
recommendations
,
redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DB2 initialization script for Log Database
scripts for Configuration Database
dbserver (section)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
dbserver.conf
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
dbserver.conf.sample
,
dbserver-n
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
default Access Groups
Users
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
defaults initial Configuration Database
deploying
Database Access Points
DB Server for Solutions
LCA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Log DB Server
Message Server
SNMP Master Agent
Solution Control Interface
Solution Control Server
using Genesys Administrator
deploying Management Layer using Configuration Manager
using Genesys Administrator
using Wizard Manager
deployment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
sequence
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Distributed Solution Control Servers
application ownership
dividing configuration
host ownership
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
recommendations
redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
remote site failure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
solutions ownership
document commenting on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
typographical conventions
version number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
E enterprise environment
external authentication
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
F failsafe-store-processing
(configuration option)
Folder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
forced re-login for inactivity
Framework
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Access Control function
Alarm-Processing function
Attached Data Distribution function
Configuration function
Deployment Guide 357
Index
External Interfaces function
Fault-Management function
Solution Control function
Troubleshooting function
Framework components
Configuration Import Wizard
Configuration Manager
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
memory allocation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
sizing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Stat Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
stopping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
T-Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Framework deployment sequence
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
G
GCTI_CONN_IPV6_ON
(environment variable)
GCTI_DNS_USE_HOSTSFILE environment variable
Genesys Administrator
configuring ADDP
creating templates
deploying Management Layer
Genesys Deployment Agent
importing templates
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Role-Based Access Control
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Genesys Deployment Agent
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
geographically distributed environment
Configuration Server Proxy
Solution Control Servers
graceful shutdown
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
graceful stop
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
H
HA port synchronization redundant Configuration Servers
redundant Solution Control Servers
HA Proxy
Media Layer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
hierarchical multi-tenant environment
History Log
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
:memory: option
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
active option
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
failsafe-store-processing option
maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
on Configuration Server
on Configuration Server Proxy
performance improvements
History of Changes Adapter section
-host (command-line parameter) backup Message Server
backup SNMP Master Agent
backup Solution Control Server
defined
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
host names defining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
I
Informix script for Log Database
scripts for Configuration Database
initializing
Configuration Database
Log Database
installation procedure standard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
installing backup Client DB Server
backup Configuration DB Server
Configuration Manager
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Genesys Administrator
interfaces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LCA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Log DB Server
Message Server
SNMP Master Agent
Solution Control Interface
Solution Control Server
Stat Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Wizard Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Wizards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
interfaces configuration layer
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
See also Genesys Administrator, Configuration
Manager, Solution Control Interface (SCI)
IPv6 client-side port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
configuration option
environment variable
DNS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
DNSSEC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
dual-stack implementation
,
358 Framework 8.1
Index dynamic runtime changes
external interfaces
firewalls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
GCTI_CONN_IPV6_ON
(environment variable)
Genesys support
IPSec
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
ip-version (configuration option)
licensing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
mixed environments
notation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
server sockets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
SIP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
supporting connections
thin clients
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
third-party dependencies
TLS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
tunneling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
ipv6 addressing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
ip-version (configuration option)
ip-version (Transport Parameter)
ITCUtility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
K
Keep-Alive Protocol (KPL)
L
-l (command-line parameter)
last logged in user authentication
LCA deploying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
log options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
LCA section
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
LDAP external authentication
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
License Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
listening modes auto-detect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
secured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
unsecured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
-lmspath (command-line parameter) defined
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Local Control Agent
Log Database database initialization scripts
initializing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Log DB Server configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
deploying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
installing
redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Log section
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
logging in
Configuration Manager
last logged in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
standard procedure
user authentication
Wizard Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
M
Management Layer overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Master Account
Media Layer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Message Server installing
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
using Configuration Manager
Microsoft SQL scripts for Configuration Database
scripts for Log Database
multi-language support
configuring Configuration Server
database prerequisites
multiple ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Configuration Server
multi-tenant environment
See hierarchical multi-tenant environment
N naming hosts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
-nco (command-line parameter) defined
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
new features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
New Users assignment to Access Groups
O objects
Access Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Agent Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
contact centers
Deployment Guide 359
Index list of configuration
Place Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Places
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Skills
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
telephony
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Users
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
options synchronization
Client DB Servers
Configuration DB Servers
Configuration Servers
Message Servers
SNMP Master Agents
Oracle script for Log Database
scripts for Configuration Database
Oracle 11g RAC DBMS failure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
overview
Configuration Layer
Management Layer
Media Layer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Services Layer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
User Interaction Layer
P
-p (command-line parameter)
Configuration Server
password
Configuration Database
passwords logging in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
requirements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
restrictions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Place Group objects
Place objects
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
-port (command-line parameter) backup Message Server
backup SNMP Master Agent
backup Solution Control Server
defined
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
port assignment multiple ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ports listening modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ports synchronization
Client DB Servers
Configuration DB Servers
Configuration Servers
Message Servers
SNMP Master Agents
PostgreSQL script for Log Database
scripts for Configuration Database
protocol (configuration option) redundant Configuration Servers
proxy-writable (configuration option)
Configuration Server Proxy
R
RADIUS external authentication
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
Ranks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
recommendations
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Distributed Solution Control Server
LCA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Log Database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Message Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
redundant Configuration DB Servers
redundant Message Servers
redundant SNMP Master Agents
redundant Solution Control Servers
SNMP Master Agent
Solution Control Interface
Solution Control Server
redundancy
HA port synchronization
redundant components
warm standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
redundancy type
Client DB Server
Configuration DB Server
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
Distributed Solution Control Server
Message Server
SNMP Master Agents
Solution Control Server
warm standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
redundant Client DB Servers options synchronization
ports synchronization
prerequisites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
redundancy type
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
task summary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
warm standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
redundant components
Client DB Servers
Configuration DB Servers
Configuration Server Proxy
Configuration Servers
Distributed Solution Control Servers
Message Servers
SNMP Master Agents
Solution Control Servers
synchronizing options
synchronizing ports
360 Framework 8.1
Index redundant Configuration DB Servers installation recommendations
options synchronization
ports synchronization
prerequisites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
redundancy type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
task summary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
redundant Configuration Servers
ADDP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
addp-remote-timeout (configuration option)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
addp-timeout (configuration option)
addp-trace (configuration option)
HA port synchronization
options synchronization
ports synchronization
redundancy type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
task summary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
warm standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
redundant DB Servers
Client DB Servers
Configuration DB Servers
redundant Message Servers
installation recommendations
options synchronization
ports synchronization
prerequisites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
redundancy type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
task summary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
redundant SNMP Master Agents
installation recommendations
options synchronization
ports synchronization
prerequisites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
redundancy type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
task summary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
warm standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
redundant Solution Control Servers
installation recommendations
prerequisites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
redundancy type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
synchronizing HA ports
task summary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
warm standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
remote deployment
,
remote deployment agent
retired features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Role-Based Access Control
run.sh (UNIX file)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
S
-s (command-line parameter)
Configuration Server
Configuration Server parameter
Sce.exe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
scripts
Configuration Database
Log Database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
scripts folder
Configuration Database
Log Database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
secure connections
secure data transfer
secured (listening mode)
security banner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
configuring
security features access permissions
database password encryption
forced re-login for inactivity
secure connections
security banner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
TLS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Services Layer
setting up
Configuration Layer
Management Layer
Silent Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
single-tenant environment
Skill objects
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
SNMP Master Agent deploying with Configuration Manager
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
SNMP Master Agents redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
SNMP support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
SOAP section
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Solution Control Interface deploying with Configuration Manager
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Solution Control Server configuration file
deploying with Configuration Manager
description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
installing
Deployment Guide 361
Index recommendations
redundancy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Solutions application failures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
availability
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
communication session failures
DB Server for
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
software exceptions
SQL scripts for Configuration Database
scripts for Log Database
sql_scripts folder
Configuration Database
starting backup Client DB Server
backup Configuration DB Server
backup Configuration Server
backup Message Server
backup SNMP Master Agent
backup Solution Control Server
Configuration Manager
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Proxy
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Framework components
Genesys Administrator
Genesys Deployment Agent
HA Proxy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
LCA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
License Manager
Message Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
SNMP Master Agent
Solution Control Interface
Solution Control Server
Stat Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
T-Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
with run.sh
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
with startServer.bat
Wizard Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Wizards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
startServer.bat (Windows file)
startup files run.sh (UNIX)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
startServer.bat (Windows)
Stat Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
stopping
Framework components
gracefully
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Sybase script for Log Database
scripts for Configuration Database
synchronizing HA ports redundant Configuration Servers
redundant Solution Control Servers
synchronizing options
Client DB Servers
Configuration DB Servers
Configuration Servers
Message Servers
SNMP Master Agents
synchronizing ports
Client DB Servers
Configuration DB Servers
Configuration Servers
Message Servers
SNMP Master Agents
T task summaries enabling Management Layer control of
Configuration Layer
manually deploying Management Layer
setting up Configuration Layer
setting up Configuration Server Proxy
setting up redundant Client DB Servers
setting up redundant Configuration
DB Servers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
setting up redundant Configuration
Servers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
setting up redundant Message Servers
setting up redundant SNMP Master
Agents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
setting up redundant Solution Control
Servers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
telephony objects
TLS security
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
multiple ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Transparent Application Failure
Oracle 11g RAC database
T-Server recommendations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
U
UNIX installing backup Client DB Server
installing backup Configuration
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
installing backup Configuration Server
installing Configuration Server
installing Configuration Server Proxy
installing DB Server
installing LCA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
installing Log DB Server
installing Message Server
installing server applications
362 Framework 8.1
Index installing SNMP Master Agent
installing Solution Control Server
starting applications
starting backup Configuration
DB Server
starting backup Configuration Server
starting backup Message Server
starting backup SNMP Master Agent
starting backup Solution Control Server
starting Configuration Server
starting Configuration Server Proxy
starting DB Server
starting Message Server
starting SNMP Master Agent
starting Solution Control Server
starting with run.sh
unsecured (listening mode)
user access permissions
user authentication
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
at login
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
forced re-login for inactivity
user authorization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
User Interaction Layer overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
User objects
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
user password logging in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Users default Access Group
UTF-8 encoding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
V
-v (command-line parameter)
W warm standby
redundant Client DB Servers
redundant Configuration DB Servers
redundant Configuration Server Proxies
redundant Configuration Servers
redundant Distributed Solution Control
Servers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
redundant Message Servers
redundant SNMP Master Agents
redundant Solution Control Servers
Windows installing backup Client DB Server
installing backup Configuration
DB Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
installing backup Configuration Server
installing Configuration Manager
installing Configuration Server
installing Configuration Server Proxy
installing DB Server
installing GUI applications
installing LCA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
installing Message Server
installing server applications
installing SNMP Master Agent
installing Solution Control Interface
installing Solution Control Server
starting applications
starting backup Client DB Server
starting backup Configuration DB Server
starting backup Configuration Server
starting backup Message Server
starting backup SNMP Master Agent
starting backup Solution Control Server
starting Configuration Manager
starting Configuration Server
starting Configuration Server Proxy
starting DB Server
starting Genesys Deployment Agent
starting Message Server
starting SNMP Master Agent
starting Solution Control Interface
starting Solution Control Server
starting with startServer.bat
Windows Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Wizard Manager logging in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
writable Configuration Server Proxy
Deployment Guide 363
Index
364 Framework 8.1
Descarcă
Link public actualizat
Linkul public către chat-ul tău a fost actualizat. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Link public document
Publicitate
